FCC ID: AZ492FT7141 2-Way Mobile Radio (with Bluetooth, Bluetooth LE, and WiFi)

 

Enhanced Single Band Mobile Radio Installation Manual JUNE 2020 2020 Motorola Solutions, Inc. All rights reserved

*MN005720A01*

MN005720A01-AB MN005720A01-AB Contents Contents List of Figures..............................................................................................................7 List of Tables............................................................................................................. 11 Foreword ...................................................................................................................12 Copyrights................................................................................................................. 13 Document History..................................................................................................... 14 Notations Used in This Manual................................................................................15 Related Publications.................................................................................................16 Commercial Warranty............................................................................................... 17 I. What This Warranty Covers And For How Long.......................................................................17 II. General Provisions.................................................................................................................. 17 III. State Law Rights (Applicable Only in U.S.A.)......................................................................... 18 IV. How To Get Warranty Service................................................................................................18 V. What This Warranty Does Not Cover...................................................................................... 18 VI. Patent And Software Provisions.............................................................................................19 VII. Governing Law...................................................................................................................... 19 Chapter 1: Introduction.............................................................................................21 1.1 Mobile Radio Description.......................................................................................................21 1.1.1 Dimensions.............................................................................................................. 21 1.2 Standard Configurations........................................................................................................ 24 1.2.1 Dash Mount Configuration....................................................................................... 24 1.2.2 Remote Mount Configuration................................................................................... 26 1.2.3 Multi Control Head................................................................................................... 31 1.3 Motorcycle Configurations..................................................................................................... 31 1.4 Base/Control Stations............................................................................................................ 31 1.5 Tools Required for Radio Installations...................................................................................31 Chapter 2: Standard Configurations....................................................................... 33 2.1 Planning the Installation.........................................................................................................33 2.1.1 Installation Examples............................................................................................... 33 2.1.2 Wiring Diagrams...................................................................................................... 35 2.1.3 Radio Operation Wiring for Dash and Remote Configurations................................ 46 2.1.3.1 Dash Mount: Power, Ignition, and Emergency Cable Installation.............. 46 2.1.3.2 Remote Mount: Power, Ignition, and Emergency Cable Installation.......... 46 2.1.4 Ignition Sense Switch (Radio Wide Advance)..........................................................48 2.1.5 Siren/PA Configuration and Programming...............................................................49 2.2 Radio Mounting......................................................................................................................50 2 MN005720A01-AB Contents 2.2.1 Dash Mount with Trunnion....................................................................................... 51 2.2.2 Remote Mount with Trunnion...................................................................................53 2.2.2.1 Remote Mount Control Head Installation................................................... 53 2.2.2.2 Multiple Control Head Installation.............................................................. 57 2.2.2.3 Cable Installation........................................................................................57 2.2.2.4 Setting the Initial Control Head ID..............................................................58 2.2.2.5 O3 Control Head and Remote Mount Cabling........................................... 59 2.2.3 Radio Locking.......................................................................................................... 62 2.2.3.1 Locking Kit..................................................................................................62 2.3 Power Cables (Transceiver and Control Head)..................................................................... 62 2.3.1 Optional Locking Feature for High-Power Chassis Power Cables...........................63 2.3.2 O2, O3, O5, O7, O9 or E5 Control Head Power Cables..........................................65 2.3.3 Battery Selector Switch............................................................................................66 2.4 Antenna Installation............................................................................................................... 67 2.4.1 Antenna Installation on a Metal Body Vehicle..........................................................67 2.4.2 Distance Between Antennas....................................................................................68 2.4.3 Mini-UHF Connection...............................................................................................69 2.4.3.1 Installing Mini-UHF Connection..................................................................70 2.4.4 GPS Antenna Placement......................................................................................... 71 2.4.5 QMA Connection......................................................................................................71 2.4.6 GPS/GLONASS and Wi-Fi Antenna Connection..................................................... 72 2.5 Installing the Speaker............................................................................................................ 72 2.5.1 Internal Speaker Disassembly................................................................................. 73 2.6 Microphone Hang-Up Clip..................................................................................................... 75 2.7 RFID (Option)........................................................................................................................ 76 2.7.1 RFID Reading.......................................................................................................... 76 2.7.2 Programming RFID (If Equipped)............................................................................ 78 2.8 Completing the Installation.................................................................................................... 79 Chapter 3: Universal Relay Controller Installation................................................ 80 3.1 Universal Relay Controller Mounting..................................................................................... 80 3.2 O7/O9 Universal Relay Controller Cable Assembly.............................................................. 82 3.2.1 Installing the Power Cable....................................................................................... 82 3.2.2 Installing Ground Cable........................................................................................... 82 3.2.3 Installing the Wires...................................................................................................83 3.2.4 Installing the O7/O9 to URC Cable.......................................................................... 85 Chapter 4: Options and Accessories Installation.................................................. 86 4.1 Dash-Mount Accessory Installation....................................................................................... 86 4.1.1 Dash-Mount Emergency Pushbutton or Footswitch Installation.............................. 86 4.1.2 Dash-Mount Horn and Lights (External Alarms) Relays.......................................... 87 3 MN005720A01-AB Contents 4.2 Installing Remote-Mount Accessory...................................................................................... 87 4.2.1 Installing Emergency Pushbutton or Footswitch...................................................... 88 4.2.2 Horn (External Alarm) Relay Installation..................................................................89 4.2.3 Lights (External Alarm) Relay Installation................................................................ 89 4.2.4 Gunlock Installation..................................................................................................89 4.2.5 Horn-Ring Transfer.................................................................................................. 90 4.2.6 Record Audio Out Jack of Transmit and Receive Audio..........................................91 4.2.7 Earphone Jack......................................................................................................... 91 4.2.8 USB Data Cables.....................................................................................................91 4.2.9 RS232 Cables..........................................................................................................92 4.3 Vehicle Interface Port Overview............................................................................................ 92 4.3.1 VIP Output Connections.......................................................................................... 92 4.3.2 VIP Input Connections............................................................................................. 94 4.4 Compatibility of Emergency when Attaching a Siren............................................................. 94 4.5 Accessory Connector Assembly Details (P2)........................................................................ 95 4.5.1 Disassembly and Assembly..................................................................................... 95 4.5.1.1 Disassembly...............................................................................................96 4.5.1.2 Assembly....................................................................................................96 4.5.2 Adapter Cable.......................................................................................................... 97 4.6 Memory and Three-Day Secure Key Retention Option......................................................... 99 Chapter 5: Motorcycle Radio Installation............................................................. 100 5.1 Motorcycle Radio Description.............................................................................................. 100 5.1.1 Transceiver Enclosure........................................................................................... 100 5.1.2 Control/Display Unit............................................................................................... 100 5.1.3 Control Head Cable............................................................................................... 100 5.1.4 Microphone............................................................................................................ 100 5.1.5 External Speaker................................................................................................... 101 5.1.6 Headset Capability.................................................................................................101 5.1.7 Antenna..................................................................................................................101 5.1.8 Ignition Sense (ACC) Wire.....................................................................................101 5.2 Installation Overview............................................................................................................101 5.2.1 Important Installation Hints.................................................................................... 102 5.2.2 Parts Identification................................................................................................. 103 5.2.3 Order of Installation................................................................................................103 5.3 Universal Mounting Plate.....................................................................................................103 5.3.1 Installing the Universal Mounting Plate..................................................................104 5.4 Speaker and Control Head Installation................................................................................ 104 5.4.1 Handlebar Installation with Speaker and Control Head Mounted Together...........105 5.4.1.1 Installing Handlebar with Speaker and Control Head Mounted Together 106 4 MN005720A01-AB Contents 5.4.2 Fuel Tank Console Installation with Speaker and Control Head Mounted Together.....................................................................................................................107 5.4.3 Handlebar Installation with Speaker and Control Head Mounted Separately........ 108 5.4.3.1 Installing Handlebar with Speaker and Control Head Mounted Separately....................................................................................................... 109 5.4.4 Fuel Tank Console Installation with Speaker and Control Head Mounted Separately..................................................................................................................109 5.5 Installing the Speaker.......................................................................................................... 111 5.6 Microphone Hang-Up Clip Installation................................................................................. 111 5.6.1 Extension Bracket Mounting.................................................................................. 111 5.6.2 Speaker/Control Head Bracket Side Mounting...................................................... 112 5.6.3 Other Hang-Up Clip Mounting................................................................................112 5.7 Installing Antenna Base and Cables....................................................................................112 5.8 Installing the Antenna.......................................................................................................... 115 5.9 Cable Routing...................................................................................................................... 115 5.10 Installing the Weather-Resistant Enclosure.......................................................................117 5.11 Transceiver and Cabling Installation..................................................................................118 5.11.1 Installing Cabling in the Enclosure.......................................................................119 5.11.2 Installing the Transceiver..................................................................................... 120 5.12 Installing the Emergency Switch Option............................................................................ 122 5.13 Installing the External Alarm Relay Option........................................................................ 122 5.14 Installing the Headset Accessory.......................................................................................122 5.15 Installing the O5 and E5 Control Head Sunshield............................................................. 123 5.16 Horn/Lights Wiring............................................................................................................. 125 5.17 Emergency Switch Wiring..................................................................................................126 Chapter 6: Finishing the Installation..................................................................... 127 6.1 Cable Connection................................................................................................................ 127 6.1.1 Connecting the Cables for O2 Control Head......................................................... 127 6.1.2 Connecting the Cables for O3 Control Head......................................................... 127 6.1.3 Connecting the Cables for O5, E5 and O7 Control Heads.................................... 128 6.1.4 Connecting the Cables for O9 Control Head......................................................... 128 6.2 Dust Cover Installation.........................................................................................................128 6.3 Miscellaneous Information................................................................................................... 130 Chapter 7: Best Practices: Installation and Troubleshooting.............................131 7.1 Checking the Wiring of Ignition and Radio Ignition Sensing................................................ 131 7.2 Checking the Physical Installation of Radio Ground and Radio Accessory Wiring..............132 7.3 Improving the Electrical Quality of the Power and Ignition Lines.........................................132 7.4 Minimizing the Effect of Poorly Grounded Antennas........................................................... 133 7.5 Jump-Starting the Vehicle....................................................................................................133 7.6 Eliminating Noise/Howling from PA Speaker.......................................................................133 5 MN005720A01-AB Contents Appendix A: Replacement Parts Ordering........................................................... 134 A.1 Service Information............................................................................................................. 135 A.2 Service Information APAC................................................................................................136 Glossary...................................................................................................................139 6 MN005720A01-AB List of Figures List of Figures Figure 1: Front and Side View of O5 Control Head with Dash Mount Transceiver and Trunnion.......... 21 Figure 2: Front and Side View of E5 Control Head with Dash Mount Transceiver and Trunnion...........21 Figure 3: Front and Side View of O2 Control Head with Dash Mount Transceiver and Trunnion.......... 22 Figure 4: Front and Side View of O7 Control Head with Dash Mount Transceiver and Trunnion.......... 22 Figure 5: Front and Side View of O3 Control Head with Coiled Cable................................................... 22 Figure 6: Front and Side View of O2 Control Head with Remote Mount and Trunnion..........................23 Figure 7: Front and Side View of O5 Control Head with Remote Mount and Trunnion..........................23 Figure 8: Front and Side View of E5 Control Head with Remote Mount and Trunnion.......................... 23 Figure 9: Front and Side View of O7 Control Head with Remote Mount and Trunnion..........................23 Figure 10: Front and Side View of O9 Control Head with Trunnion....................................................... 24 Figure 11: Top and Side View of O9 Universal Relay Controller (URC) with Trunnion (URC is an orderable accessory)......................................................................................................................... 24 Figure 12: Dash Mount Configuration for O2 Control Head................................................................... 25 Figure 13: Dash Mount Configuration for O3 Control Head................................................................... 25 Figure 14: Dash Mount Configuration for O5 Control Head................................................................... 25 Figure 15: Dash Mount Configuration for E5 Control Head....................................................................26 Figure 16: Dash Mount Configuration for O7 Control Head................................................................... 26 Figure 17: Remote Mount Configuration with Mid Power Transceiver, Transceiver Interface Board, CHIB Rear Assembly, and O2 Control Head.....................................................................................27 Figure 18: Remote Mount Configuration with Mid Power Transceiver, Transceiver Interface Board, and O3 Control Head.........................................................................................................................27 Figure 19: Remote Mount Configuration with Mid Power Transceiver, Transceiver Interface Board, CHIB Rear Assembly, and O5 Control Head.....................................................................................28 Figure 20: Remote Mount Configuration with Mid Power Transceiver, Transceiver Interface Board, CHIB Rear Assembly, and E5 Control Head..................................................................................... 28 Figure 21: Remote Mount Configuration with Mid Power Transceiver, Transceiver Interface Board, CHIB Rear Assembly, and O7 Control Head.....................................................................................29 Figure 22: Remote Mount Configuration with Mid Power Transceiver, Transceiver Interface Board, and O9 Control Head.........................................................................................................................29 Figure 23: Remote Mount Configuration with Mid Power Radio Transceiver, Universal Relay Controller (URC), and O7 Control Head (URC is optional)............................................................... 30 Figure 24: Remote Mount Configuration with Mid Power Radio Transceiver, Universal Relay Controller (URC), and O9 Control Head (URC is optional)............................................................... 30 Figure 25: Dash Mount Installation.........................................................................................................33 Figure 26: Remote Mount Installation.....................................................................................................34 Figure 27: Remote Mount Installation for Radio with O9 Control Head and Universal Relay Controller (URC is optional)...............................................................................................................34 Figure 28: Radio Installation (O2 Dash Mount)...................................................................................... 35 Figure 29: Radio Installation (O3 Dash Mount)...................................................................................... 36 7 MN005720A01-AB List of Figures Figure 30: Radio Installation (O5 Dash Mount)...................................................................................... 36 Figure 31: Radio Installation (E5 Dash Mount).......................................................................................37 Figure 32: Radio Installation (O7 Dash Mount)...................................................................................... 37 Figure 33: Radio Installation (O2 Remote Mount).................................................................................. 38 Figure 34: Radio Installation (O3 Remote Mount).................................................................................. 38 Figure 35: Radio Installation (O5 Remote Mount).................................................................................. 39 Figure 36: Radio Installation (E5 Remote Mount).................................................................................. 39 Figure 37: Radio Installation (O7 Remote Mount).................................................................................. 40 Figure 38: Radio Installation of O9 Remote Mount with Transceiver (URC is optional).........................40 Figure 39: Radio Installation (O9 Remote Mount with Pinouts)..............................................................41 Figure 40: Remote Control Head Pinouts...............................................................................................42 Figure 41: Cabling Interconnect Diagram for Dash Mount .................................................................... 43 Figure 42: Cabling Interconnect Diagram for Remote Mount................................................................. 44 Figure 43: Cabling Interconnect Diagram for O9 Remote Mount (URC is optional)...............................45 Figure 44: Enhanced Single Band Mobile Radio Trunnion Orientation.................................................. 51 Figure 45: Transmission Hump Trunnion Mounting............................................................................... 52 Figure 46: Below Dash Trunnion Mounting............................................................................................ 52 Figure 47: O5 Control Head Installation Exploded View (Also applicable for O2, O7 and E5 Control Heads).................................................................................................................................. 54 Figure 48: O9 Control Head Installation Exploded View........................................................................ 55 Figure 49: O5 Control Head Rear View (Also applicable for O2 and O7 Control Heads)...................... 56 Figure 50: E5 Control Head Rear View.................................................................................................. 56 Figure 51: O9 Control Head Rear View..................................................................................................56 Figure 52: APX Mobile O5 Control Head Front View............................................................................. 58 Figure 53: Radio Display with Current Control Head ID......................................................................... 58 Figure 54: APX Mobile O5 Control Head Front View Mode Knob....................................................... 59 Figure 55: O3 Control Head................................................................................................................... 60 Figure 56: O3 Control Head Rear View..................................................................................................61 Figure 57: Hang-Up Clip Installation Exploded View..............................................................................61 Figure 58: Locking Kit (Optional)............................................................................................................ 62 Figure 59: Inserting DC Cable to the Radio............................................................................................63 Figure 60: Installing the Locking Bracket................................................................................................64 Figure 61: Bracket Installation (Assembled State)................................................................................. 64 Figure 62: Bracket Uninstallation (1 of 2)............................................................................................... 64 Figure 63: Bracket Uninstallation (2 of 2)............................................................................................... 65 Figure 64: HKN6188_ Power Cable with External Speaker Connector..................................................65 Figure 65: HKN6187_ Power Cable with External Speaker Connector, Record Audio Output Jack

(2.5 mm) and Earphone Jack (2.5 mm).............................................................................................66 Figure 66: Battery Selector Switch......................................................................................................... 67 Figure 67: Multiple Antennas Separation for locations 16.................................................................... 68 8 MN005720A01-AB List of Figures Figure 68: Mini-UHF Connection ........................................................................................................... 70 Figure 69: Mini-UHF Connector Tool......................................................................................................71 Figure 70: GPS/GLONASS and Wi-Fi Antenna Connector on the radio................................................ 72 Figure 71: Speaker Mounting................................................................................................................. 73 Figure 72: Removing the screws on the Control Head...........................................................................74 Figure 73: Removing the Control Head.................................................................................................. 74 Figure 74: Disconnecting the Speaker Connector..................................................................................75 Figure 75: Reattaching the Control Head............................................................................................... 75 Figure 76: RFID Location....................................................................................................................... 76 Figure 77: Read Angle for Enhanced Single Band Mobile Radio...........................................................76 Figure 78: Tag Angle for Enhanced Single Band Mobile Radio............................................................. 77 Figure 79: Examples of Reader and Tag Aligned (Reader Orientation).................................................77 Figure 80: Example of Reader and Tag Misalignment (Reader Orientation)......................................... 77 Figure 81: Universal Relay Controller Orientation.................................................................................. 80 Figure 82: Universal Relay Controller Installation Exploded View..........................................................81 Figure 83: Power and Ground Cable Glands......................................................................................... 83 Figure 84: Cable Gland Assembly with Gasket...................................................................................... 83 Figure 85: Wires Installation................................................................................................................... 84 Figure 86: Wire Installation with Black Stick...........................................................................................84 Figure 87: O7/O9 to URC Cable Installation.......................................................................................... 85 Figure 88: Emergency Switch Wiring Diagram.......................................................................................86 Figure 89: Horn/Light Wiring Diagram.................................................................................................... 87 Figure 90: Emergency Jumper Removal in Remote Mount....................................................................88 Figure 91: Gunlock Switch Redundancy Diagram..................................................................................90 Figure 92: Siren/PA Horn-Ring Connections..........................................................................................91 Figure 93: Remote Control Head Pinouts...............................................................................................92 Figure 94: HKN6196_ VIP Connector Detail.......................................................................................... 92 Figure 95: Relay Coil.............................................................................................................................. 93 Figure 96: Field adjustment for Emergency Operation with Siren Accessory........................................ 94 Figure 97: Location for Pin 8.................................................................................................................. 95 Figure 98: Exploded View of Accessory Connector Assembly (HLN6863_).......................................... 96 Figure 99: Rear Accessory Connector Audio Configuration...................................................................97 Figure 100: Rear Accessory Connector Data Configuration.................................................................. 98 Figure 101: Universal Mounting Plate Installation (Part of Radio Enclosure Kit)..................................104 Figure 102: Motorcycle Control Head Cabling (3075217A01)..............................................................105 Figure 103: Handlebar Installation with Speaker and Control Head Mounted Together...................... 106 Figure 104: Fuel Tank Console Installation with Speaker and Control Head Mounted Together.........107 Figure 105: Handlebar Installation with Speaker and Control Head Mounted Separately................... 108 Figure 106: Fuel Tank Console Installation with Speaker and Control Head Mounted Separately......110 9 MN005720A01-AB List of Figures Figure 107: Location of Antenna Port...................................................................................................113 Figure 108: Enhanced Single Band Mobile Radio Antenna Band Identification...................................113 Figure 109: Routing the Coaxial Cable for GPS/Wi-Fi......................................................................... 114 Figure 110: Routing the Coaxial Cable for Antenna............................................................................. 114 Figure 111: Cable Routing....................................................................................................................116 Figure 112: Weather-Resistant Enclosure Installation......................................................................... 118 Figure 113: Installing Cables................................................................................................................ 119 Figure 114: Installing the Transceiver.................................................................................................. 121 Figure 115: Motorcycle Wiring Harness Rework.................................................................................. 123 Figure 116: Remote Mount Trunnion with Sunshield........................................................................... 123 Figure 117: Position the Sunshield.......................................................................................................124 Figure 118: Slide the Control Head onto Trunnion............................................................................... 124 Figure 119: Position Control Head as Desired..................................................................................... 125 Figure 120: Horn/Lights Wiring Diagram.............................................................................................. 125 Figure 121: Emergency Switch Wiring Diagram...................................................................................126 Figure 122: Dust Cover Installation Locations......................................................................................129 10 MN005720A01-AB List of Tables List of Tables Table 1: Document History..................................................................................................................... 14 Table 2: Tools Required for Radio Installations......................................................................................31 Table 3: Dash O2, O3, O5, O7, or O9 Radio Operations Dependent Upon A+ and Ignition Connections.......................................................................................................................................47 Table 4: Remote O2, O3, O5, E5, O7, or O9 Radio Operations Dependent Upon A+ and Ignition Connections.......................................................................................................................................47 Table 5: Remote O2, O3, O5, E5, O7, or O9 Radio Operations Dependent Upon A+ and Ignition Connections.......................................................................................................................................47 Table 6: Ignition Sense Switch Settings in CPS..................................................................................... 48 Table 7: Power Level Configurations......................................................................................................50 Table 8: Mid Power Trunnion Kit............................................................................................................ 52 Table 9: Available CAN Cables.............................................................................................................. 57 Table 10: Ignition Interface Cables.........................................................................................................57 Table 11: Power Cables......................................................................................................................... 63 Table 12: Model Number Chart in 12-Digit ASCII Format...................................................................... 78 Table 13: Serial Number with Radio Band/Tier/Power........................................................................... 78 Table 14: VIP Output Connections......................................................................................................... 93 Table 15: VIP Input Connections............................................................................................................94 Table 16: Adapter Cable.........................................................................................................................97 Table 17: Transceiver Installation Parts List.........................................................................................121 Table 18: Service Information Telephone Numbers and Addresses of the Asia and Pacific Motorola Solutions Centers............................................................................................................. 136 11 MN005720A01-AB Foreword Foreword This manual includes all the information necessary to maintain peak product performance and maximum working time, using levels 1 and 2 maintenance procedures. CAUTION: These servicing instructions are for the use of qualified personnel only. To reduce the risk of electric shock, do not service parts other than those contained in the Operating Instructions unless you are qualified to do so. Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel. 12 MN005720A01-AB Copyrights Copyrights The Motorola Solutions products described in this document may include copyrighted Motorola Solutions computer programs. Laws in the United States and other countries preserve for Motorola Solutions certain exclusive rights for copyrighted computer programs. Accordingly, any copyrighted Motorola Solutions computer programs contained in the Motorola Solutions products described in this document may not be copied or reproduced in any manner without the express written permission of Motorola Solutions. 2020 Motorola Solutions, Inc. All Rights Reserved No part of this document may be reproduced, transmitted, stored in a retrieval system, or translated into any language or computer language, in any form or by any means, without the prior written permission of Motorola Solutions, Inc. Furthermore, the purchase of Motorola Solutions products shall not be deemed to grant either directly or by implication, estoppel or otherwise, any license under the copyrights, patents or patent applications of Motorola Solutions, except for the normal non-exclusive, royalty-free license to use that arises by operation of law in the sale of a product. Please note that certain features, facilities, and capabilities described in this document may not be applicable to or licensed for use on a specific system, or may be dependent upon the characteristics of a specific mobile subscriber unit or configuration of certain parameters. Please refer to your Motorola Solutions contact for further information. Disclaimer Trademarks MOTOROLA, MOTO, MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS, and the Stylized M Logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Motorola Trademark Holdings, LLC and are used under license. All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners. European Union (EU) Waste of Electrical and Electronic Equipment (WEEE) directive The European Union's WEEE directive requires that products sold into EU countries must have the crossed out trash bin label on the product (or the package in some cases). As defined by the WEEE directive, this cross-out trash bin label means that customers and end-users in EU countries should not dispose of electronic and electrical equipment or accessories in household waste. Customers or end-users in EU countries should contact their local equipment supplier representative or service centre for information about the waste collection system in their country. 13 MN005720A01-AB Document History Document History The following major changes have been implemented in this manual since the previous edition:

Table 1: Document History Edition MN005720A01-AA MN005720A01-AB Description Initial Release. Added E5 Control Head information. Added VHF and UHF1 information. Date September 2019 June 2020 14 MN005720A01-AB Notations Used in This Manual Notations Used in This Manual Throughout the text in this publication, you will notice the use of warning, caution, and notice notations. These notations are used to emphasize that safety hazards exist, and due care must be taken and observed. WARNING: WARNING indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in death or injury. CAUTION: CAUTION indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, might result in equipment damage. NOTICE: NOTICE indicates an operational procedure, practice, or condition that is essential to emphasize. 15 MN005720A01-AB Related Publications Related Publications The following list contains part numbers and titles of related publications. 68012006035, ASTRO APX Mobile Radio O2 Control Head User Guide 6875946M01, ASTRO APX Mobile Radio O3 Control Head User Guide 6875947M01, ASTRO APX Mobile Radio O5 Control Head User Guide 68012006034, ASTRO APX Mobile Radio O7 Control Head User Guide 68007024014, ASTRO APX Mobile Radio O9 Control Head User Guide MN006147A01, ASTRO APX Mobile Radio E5 Control Head User Guide MN005718A01, Enhanced Single Band Mobile Radio Basic Service Manual MN005719A01, Enhanced Single Band Mobile Radio Detailed Service Manual PMLN6193, ASTRO APX Mobile Radio O2 Quick Reference Card PMLN5591, ASTRO APX Mobile Radio O3 Quick Reference Card PMLN5592, ASTRO APX Mobile Radio O5 Quick Reference Card PMLN6194, ASTRO APX Mobile Radio O7 Quick Reference Card PMLN5711, ASTRO APX Mobile Radio O9 Quick Reference Card MN006146A01, ASTRO APX Mobile Radio E5 Quick Reference Card (EMEA) MN006240A01, ASTRO APX Mobile Radio E5 Quick Reference Card (NALA) 6881095C99, RF Energy ExposureTraining and Product Safety Information for Mobile Two-Way Radios installed in Vehicles or as Fixed Site Control Stations MN000770A01, Dual-radio Control Head System Instruction Manual 16 MN005720A01-AB Commercial Warranty Commercial Warranty Limited Warranty For information on warranty terms, see the Support page at https://www.motorolasolutions.com. I. What This Warranty Covers And For How Long Motorola Solutions Inc. ("Motorola Solutions") warrants the Motorola Solutions manufactured Communication Products listed below ("Product") against defects in material and workmanship under normal use and service for a period of time from the date of purchase as scheduled below:

Mobile Radios Product Accessories One Year One Year The radios additionally ship with a standard 1-year Repair Service Advantage (RSA) (for U.S. customers) or 1-year Extended Warranty (for Canada customers). However, at the time of order, you may choose to omit these warranties. For more RSA or Extended Warranty information, please refer to the price pages. Motorola Solutions, at its option, will at no charge either repair the Product (with new or reconditioned parts), replace it (with a new or reconditioned Product), or refund the purchase price of the Product during the warranty period provided it is returned in accordance with the terms of this warranty. Replaced parts or boards are warranted for the balance of the original applicable warranty period. All replaced parts of Product shall become the property of Motorola Solutions. This express limited warranty is extended by Motorola Solutions to the original end user purchaser only and is not assignable or transferable to any other party. This is the complete warranty for the Product manufactured by Motorola Solutions. Motorola Solutions assumes no obligations or liability for additions or modifications to this warranty unless made in writing and signed by an officer of Motorola Solutions. Unless made in a separate agreement between Motorola Solutions and the original end user purchaser, Motorola Solutions does not warrant the installation, maintenance or service of the Product. Motorola Solutions cannot be responsible in any way for any ancillary equipment not furnished by Motorola Solutions which is attached to or used in connection with the Product, or for operation of the Product with any ancillary equipment, and all such equipment is expressly excluded from this warranty. Because each system which may use the Product is unique, Motorola Solutions disclaims liability for range, coverage, or operation of the system as a whole under this warranty. II. General Provisions This warranty sets forth the full extent of Motorola Solutions responsibilities regarding the Product. Repair, replacement or refund of the purchase price, at Motorola Solutions option, is the exclusive remedy. This warranty is given in lieu of all other express warranties, implied warranties, including without limitation, implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose, are limited to the duration of this limited warranty. In no event shall Motorola Solutions be liable for damages in excess of the purchase price of the product, for any loss of use, loss of time, inconvenience, commercial loss, lost profits or savings or other incidental, special or consequential damages arising out of the use or inability to use such product, to the full extent such may be disclaimed by law. 17 MN005720A01-AB Commercial Warranty III. State Law Rights (Applicable Only in U.S.A.) Some states do not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental or consequential damages or limitation on how long an implied warranty lasts, so the above limitation or exclusions may not apply. This warranty gives specific legal rights, and there may be other rights which may vary from state to state. IV. How To Get Warranty Service You must provide proof of purchase (bearing the date of purchase and Product item serial number) in order to receive warranty service and, also, deliver or send the Product item, transportation, and insurance prepaid, to an authorized warranty service location. Warranty service will be provided by Motorola Solutions through one of its authorized warranty service locations. If you first contact the company which sold you the Product, it can facilitate your obtaining warranty service. You can also call Motorola Solutions at 1-800-927-2744 US/Canada. V. What This Warranty Does Not Cover This warranty does not cover the following conditions:

Defects or damage resulting from use of the Product in other than its normal and customary manner. Defects or damage from misuse, accident, water, or neglect. Defects or damage from improper testing, operation, maintenance, installation, alteration, modification, or adjustment. Breakage or damage to antennas unless caused directly by defects in material workmanship. A Product subjected to unauthorized Product modifications, disassemblies or repairs (including, without limitation, the addition to the Product of non-Motorola Solutions supplied equipment) which adversely affect performance of the Product or interfere with Motorola Solutions normal warranty inspection and testing of the Product to verify any warranty claim. Product which has had the serial number removed or made illegible. Rechargeable batteries if:

- Any of the seals on the battery enclosure of cells are broken or show evidence of tampering.

- The damage or defect is caused by charging or using the battery in equipment or service other than the Product for which it is specified. Freight costs to the repair depot. A Product which, due to illegal or unauthorized alteration of the software/firmware in the Product, does not function in accordance with Motorola Solutions published specifications or the FCC type acceptance labeling in effect for the Product at the time the Product was initially distributed from Motorola Solutions. Scratches or other cosmetic damage to Product surfaces that does not affect the operation of the Product. Normal and customary wear and tear. WARNING: The circuitry found on the control head and its associated interface boards is designed to function "as-is". Any attempt at modifying or altering the circuitry would void the warranty, and/or could result in radio malfunction or hazardous conditions for the radio and its associated vehicle. 18 MN005720A01-AB Commercial Warranty VI. Patent And Software Provisions Motorola Solutions will defend, at its own expense, any suit brought against the end user purchaser to the extent that it is based on a claim that the Product or parts infringe a United States patent, and Motorola Solutions will pay those costs and damages finally awarded against the end user purchaser in any such suit which are attributable to any such claim. But such defense and payments are conditioned on the following:

Motorola Solutions will be notified promptly in writing by such purchaser of any notice of such claim. Motorola Solutions will have sole control of the defense of such suit and all negotiations for its settlement or compromise. Product or parts become, or in Motorola Solutions opinion be likely to become, the subject of a claim of infringement of a United States patent, that such purchaser will permit Motorola Solutions, at its option and expense, either to procure for such purchaser the right to continue using the Product or parts or to replace or modify the same so that it becomes noninfringing or to grant such purchaser a credit for the Product or parts as depreciated and accept its return. The depreciation will be an equal amount per year over the lifetime of the Product or parts as established by Motorola Solutions. Motorola Solutions will have no liability with respect to any claim of patent infringement which is based upon the combination of the Product or parts furnished hereunder with software, apparatus or devices not furnished by Motorola Solutions, nor will Motorola Solutions have any liability for the use of ancillary equipment or software not furnished by Motorola Solutions which is attached to or used in connection with the Product. The foregoing states the entire liability of Motorola Solutions with respect to infringement of patents by the Product or any parts thereof. Laws in the United States and other countries preserve for Motorola Solutions certain exclusive rights for copyrighted Motorola Solutions software such as the exclusive rights to reproduce in copies and distribute copies of such Motorola Solutions software. Motorola Solutions software may be used in only the Product in which the software was originally embodied and such software in such Product may not be replaced, copied, distributed, modified in any way, or used to produce any derivative thereof. No other use including, without limitation, alteration, modification, reproduction, distribution, or reverse engineering of such Motorola Solutions software or exercise of rights in such Motorola Solutions software is permitted. No license is granted by implication, estoppel or otherwise under Motorola Solutions patent rights or copyrights. VII. Governing Law This Warranty is governed by the laws of the State of Illinois, USA. 19 MN005720A01-AB Notice Installation Requirements for Compliance with Radio Frequency (RF) Energy Exposure Safety Standards Notice Installation Requirements for Compliance with Radio Frequency (RF) Energy Exposure Safety Standards CAUTION: This radio is intended for use in occupational/controlled conditions, where users have full knowledge of their exposure and can exercise control over their exposure to meet FCC limits. This radio device is NOT authorized for general population, consumer, or any other use. To ensure compliance to RF Energy Safety Standards:

Install only Motorola Solutions approved antennas and accessories. Be sure that antenna installation is per Antenna Installation on page 67 of this manual. Be sure that the Product Safety and RF Safety Booklet enclosed with this radio is available to the end user upon completion of the installation of this radio. Before using this product, read the guide enclosed with your radio which contains important operating instructions for safe usage and RF energy awareness and control for compliance with applicable standards and regulations. For a list of Motorola Solutions-approved antennas and other accessories, visit http://

www.motorolasolutions.com. WARNING: This equipment is compliant with Class A of EN55032. In a residential environment, this equipment may cause radio interference. 20 MN005720A01-AB Introduction Chapter 1 Introduction This manual covers the installation procedures for ASTRO mobile and motorcycle radios with O2, O3, O5, E5, O7, and O9 control heads and accessories required to complete the radio system. The radio system consists of a control head, radio, antenna, microphone, speaker, cabling, Universal Relay Controller (URC), and accessories. 1.1 Mobile Radio Description This chapter covers the basic dimension of the mobile radio. 1.1.1 Dimensions When installing the radio, make sure to plan the installation carefully and leave extra room in the rear of the radio for cabling and accessory connections. Leave extra space in the front of the radio for access, controls, and cabling (if remote mount) and to the sides of the radio so that you can access and install the trunnion screws/wing screws. NOTICE: The rear accessory connector adds 0.75 in. to the overall length. The remote mount length is 244 mm. Figure 1: Front and Side View of O5 Control Head with Dash Mount Transceiver and Trunnion Figure 2: Front and Side View of E5 Control Head with Dash Mount Transceiver and Trunnion 21 22418020018751802181782085180191 MN005720A01-AB Chapter 1: Introduction Figure 3: Front and Side View of O2 Control Head with Dash Mount Transceiver and Trunnion NOTICE: The rear accessory connector adds 0.75 in. to the overall length. The remote mount length is 194 mm. Figure 4: Front and Side View of O7 Control Head with Dash Mount Transceiver and Trunnion Figure 5: Front and Side View of O3 Control Head with Coiled Cable 22 22420669892222091785122420719451806115338 Figure 6: Front and Side View of O2 Control Head with Remote Mount and Trunnion MN005720A01-AB Chapter 1: Introduction Figure 7: Front and Side View of O5 Control Head with Remote Mount and Trunnion Figure 8: Front and Side View of E5 Control Head with Remote Mount and Trunnion Figure 9: Front and Side View of O7 Control Head with Remote Mount and Trunnion 23 2099912397511807518051822091789110882 MN005720A01-AB Chapter 1: Introduction Figure 10: Front and Side View of O9 Control Head with Trunnion Figure 11: Top and Side View of O9 Universal Relay Controller (URC) with Trunnion (URC is an orderable accessory) This chapter covers the dash mount, remote mount, and multi-control head configurations. 1.2 Standard Configurations 1.2.1 Dash Mount Configuration There are two versions of the mobile dash mount. The first are the O2, O5, E5, and O7 control heads which are mounted on the front of the transceiver housing. The second is the O3 control head which is connected to the transceiver through a coiled cable, which is plugged into the CAN connector on the transceiver. Electrical connection between the two takes place within the radio through a flexible circuit board between the connectors on the front of the transceiver and at the back of the control head for O2, O5, E5, and O7 and between the connectors on the front of the transceiver and at the back of the TIB for the O3. 24 1781908318521061.5 Figure 12: Dash Mount Configuration for O2 Control Head MN005720A01-AB Chapter 1: Introduction No. 1 Description ASTRO 25 Subscribers Enhanced Single Band Mobile Radio Figure 13: Dash Mount Configuration for O3 Control Head No. 1 Description ASTRO 25 Subscribers Enhanced Single Band Mobile Radio Figure 14: Dash Mount Configuration for O5 Control Head 25 111111 MN005720A01-AB Chapter 1: Introduction No. 1 Description ASTRO 25 Subscribers Enhanced Single Band Mobile Radio Figure 15: Dash Mount Configuration for E5 Control Head No. 1 Description ASTRO 25 Subscribers Enhanced Single Band Mobile Radio Figure 16: Dash Mount Configuration for O7 Control Head No. 1 Description ASTRO 25 Subscribers Enhanced Single Band Mobile Radio 1.2.2 Remote Mount Configuration In the remote control version, the transceiver and the control head are mounted separately in the vehicle. The O2, O5, E5, and O7 control heads are mounted in remote trunnions near the operator. The O3 and O9 control heads are also mounted near the operator using extension cables. The transceiver and control head are mounted using a trunnion or other mounting hardware. If the transceiver is located in a car trunk, ensure that it is mounted securely and that sufficient cooling is provided. Do not cover the transceiver with baggage, blankets, and others. NOTICE: The keypad mic should only be plugged into the Modified Modular Plug (MMP) connector located on the control head, in either dash mount or remote mount configuration. 26 111 Figure 17: Remote Mount Configuration with Mid Power Transceiver, Transceiver Interface Board, CHIB Rear Assembly, and O2 Control Head MN005720A01-AB Chapter 1: Introduction No. 1 2 Description MMP ASTRO 25 Subscribers Enhanced Single Band Mobile Radio Figure 18: Remote Mount Configuration with Mid Power Transceiver, Transceiver Interface Board, and O3 Control Head No. 1 2 Description 5 m (17 ft) Extension Cable ASTRO 25 Subscribers Enhanced Single Band Mobile Radio 27 11222212 MN005720A01-AB Chapter 1: Introduction Figure 19: Remote Mount Configuration with Mid Power Transceiver, Transceiver Interface Board, CHIB Rear Assembly, and O5 Control Head No. 1 2 Description MMP ASTRO 25 Subscribers Enhanced Single Band Mobile Radio Figure 20: Remote Mount Configuration with Mid Power Transceiver, Transceiver Interface Board, CHIB Rear Assembly, and E5 Control Head No. 1 2 Description MMP ASTRO 25 Subscribers Enhanced Single Band Mobile Radio 28 1122122

 

 

Figure 21: Remote Mount Configuration with Mid Power Transceiver, Transceiver Interface Board, CHIB Rear Assembly, and O7 Control Head MN005720A01-AB Chapter 1: Introduction No. 1 2 Description MMP ASTRO 25 Subscribers Enhanced Single Band Mobile Radio Figure 22: Remote Mount Configuration with Mid Power Transceiver, Transceiver Interface Board, and O9 Control Head No. 1 2 Description 17 ft Extension Cable ASTRO 25 Subscribers Enhanced Single Band Mobile Radio 29 11222212 MN005720A01-AB Chapter 1: Introduction Figure 23: Remote Mount Configuration with Mid Power Radio Transceiver, Universal Relay Controller (URC), and O7 Control Head (URC is optional) No. 1 2 Description 17 ft Extension Cable O7 to URC Cable Figure 24: Remote Mount Configuration with Mid Power Radio Transceiver, Universal Relay Controller (URC), and O9 Control Head (URC is optional) Description 17 ft Extension Cable O9 to URC Cable No. 1 2 30 1212 MN005720A01-AB Chapter 1: Introduction 1.2.3 Multi Control Head The multi control head option allows separate, remotely operated control heads to operate and control the radio. For example, a fire truck could have a control head located in the cab and on the rear of the truck so that the radio could be operated from outside the vehicle. NOTICE: The dual control head can be used together in the future. 1.3 Motorcycle Configurations The mobile motorcycle radio models provide most of the equipment needed for installing a standard mobile radio on a motorcycle. Most of this radio system is standard equipment. See Motorcycle Radio Installation on page 100 for further information. NOTICE: The motorcycle configurations are not applicable O9 control heads. 1.4 Base/Control Stations NOTICE: The base/control station option is not applicable for O9 control heads. The antenna installation must comply with the following requirements if mobile radio equipment is installed at a fixed location and operated as a control station or as a fixed unit to ensure optimal performance and compliance with the RF energy exposure limits in the standards and guidelines listed in the 6881095C99 manual:

The antenna should be mounted outside the building on the roof or a tower if at all possible. As with all fixed site antenna installations, it is the responsibility of the licensee to manage the site in accordance with applicable regulatory requirements and may require additional compliance actions such as site survey measurements, signage, and site access restrictions to ensure that exposure limits are not exceeded. 1.5 Tools Required for Radio Installations These are the tools required for mobile radio installation. Table 2: Tools Required for Radio Installations Tool 10 mm wrench 5 mm Allen wrench Rubber-coated pliers Part Number Regular slot screwdriver of Phillips #2 Pin removal tool 6680163F01 31 MN005720A01-AB Chapter 1: Introduction Tool RF antenna tool Wing screw torque tool Part Number HLN6695_ HLN6970_ 32 MN005720A01-AB Standard Configurations Chapter 2 Standard Configurations The radio operates only in negative ground electrical systems with a valid operating range of 10.816.3 VDC. Before starting the installation, ensure that the ground polarity of the vehicle is correct. Accidentally reversing the polarity could damage the radio and cause the cable fuses to blow. 2.1 Planning the Installation Planning is the key to fast, easy radio installation. Before starting the installation, inspect the vehicle and determine how and where you intend to mount the antenna, radio, and accessories. Plan wire and cable run to provide maximum protection from pinching, crushing, and overheating. CAUTION:

Before installing any electrical equipment, check the user manual of the vehicle for warnings or recommendations. Authorized servicer or installer should complete the installation of this device. Failure to properly install the device may result in damage to the device, or improper operation. 2.1.1 Installation Examples The mobile two-way radio offers various methods of installation, with accessories placed to the vehicle as desired. The radio can be dash or remote mounted except for the O9 control head, which can only be mounted remotely. Figure 25: Dash Mount Installation Dash mount radios mounted in the middle console, on the transmission hump, or under the dash, No. 1 2 3 4 Description Antenna -Wavelength Radio Speaker Battery 33 91132214 MN005720A01-AB Chapter 2: Standard Configurations Figure 26: Remote Mount Installation Remote mount radio control heads mounted in the middle console, on the transmission hump, or under the dash. No. Description Antenna -Wavelength Radio Speaker Battery Control Head Figure 27: Remote Mount Installation for Radio with O9 Control Head and Universal Relay Controller (URC is optional) 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 34 No. Description Antenna -Wavelength Radio Speaker Battery Control Head Siren Speaker Siren Box Universal Relay Controller Box 91135251491136752814 MN005720A01-AB Chapter 2: Standard Configurations 2.1.2 Wiring Diagrams The following figures show the wiring diagrams for all the possible configurations. Identify which of these figures shows the configuration that you are installing, and use the diagram when planning the installation. For remote mount configuration, refer to Remote Mount: Power, Ignition, and Emergency Cable Installation on page 46 and Installing Emergency Pushbutton or Footswitch on page 88 for further details and recommended wiring of the emergency cables. Figure 28: Radio Installation (O2 Dash Mount) 35 BATTERYHORNRELAYLIGHTRELAYMICCLIPSPEAKERMICEMERGENCYSWITCHFUSEFUSEBLOCK(+)(-)REDLEADFUSEFIREWALLHOLEMOUNTINGSCREWDASHMOUNT RADIOANTENNACONNECTIONANTENNA 13ftIGNSENSE(ACC)P2(SEEJ2PINOUT)DCPOWERCABLETRUNNIONJ2REAR ACCESSORY CONNECTOR1781413202126SPKR-SPKR+VIPOUT212V(RELAY)VIPOUT112V(RELAY)GROUNDEMERGENCYIGNSENSE(ACC)ANTENNACONNECTIONANTENNA 2WI-FI(OPTIONAL)ANTENNACONNECTIONANTENNA 3GPS (OPTIONAL)3ft MN005720A01-AB Chapter 2: Standard Configurations Figure 29: Radio Installation (O3 Dash Mount) Figure 30: Radio Installation (O5 Dash Mount) 36 BATTERYHORNRELAYLIGHTRELAYMICCLIPSPEAKERMICEMERGENCYSWITCHFUSEFUSEBLOCK(+)(-)REDLEADFUSEFIREWALLHOLEMOUNTINGSCREWDASHMOUNT RADIOANTENNACONNECTIONANTENNA 13ftIGNSENSE(ACC)P2(SEEJ2PINOUT)DCPOWERCABLETRUNNIONJ2REAR ACCESSORY CONNECTOR1781413202126SPKR-SPKR+VIPOUT212V(RELAY)VIPOUT112V(RELAY)GROUNDEMERGENCYIGNSENSE(ACC)ANTENNACONNECTIONANTENNA 2WI-FI(OPTIONAL)ANTENNACONNECTIONANTENNA 3GPS (OPTIONAL)3ftBATTERYHORNRELAYLIGHTRELAYMICCLIPSPEAKERMICEMERGENCYSWITCHFUSEFUSEBLOCK(+)(-)REDLEADFUSEFIREWALLHOLEMOUNTINGSCREWDASHMOUNT RADIOANTENNACONNECTIONANTENNA 13ftIGNSENSE(ACC)P2(SEEJ2PINOUT)DCPOWERCABLETRUNNIONJ2REAR ACCESSORY CONNECTOR1781413202126SPKR-SPKR+VIPOUT212V(RELAY)VIPOUT112V(RELAY)GROUNDEMERGENCYIGNSENSE(ACC)ANTENNACONNECTIONANTENNA 2WI-FI(OPTIONAL)ANTENNACONNECTIONANTENNA 3GPS (OPTIONAL)3ft Figure 31: Radio Installation (E5 Dash Mount) MN005720A01-AB Chapter 2: Standard Configurations Figure 32: Radio Installation (O7 Dash Mount) 37 BATTERYHORNRELAYLIGHTRELAYMICCLIPSPEAKERMICEMERGENCYSWITCHFUSEFUSEBLOCK(+)(-)REDLEADFUSEFIREWALLHOLEMOUNTINGSCREWDASHMOUNT RADIOANTENNACONNECTIONANTENNA 13ftIGNSENSE(ACC)P2(SEEJ2PINOUT)DCPOWERCABLETRUNNIONJ2REAR ACCESSORY CONNECTOR1781413202126SPKR-SPKR+VIPOUT212V(RELAY)VIPOUT112V(RELAY)GROUNDEMERGENCYIGNSENSE(ACC)ANTENNACONNECTIONANTENNA 2WI-FI(OPTIONAL)ANTENNACONNECTIONANTENNA 3GPS (OPTIONAL)3ftBATTERYHORNRELAYLIGHTRELAYMICCLIPSPEAKERMICEMERGENCYSWITCHFUSEFUSEBLOCK(+)(-)REDLEADFUSEFIREWALLHOLEMOUNTINGSCREWDASHMOUNT RADIOANTENNACONNECTIONANTENNA 13ftIGNSENSE(ACC)P2(SEEJ2PINOUT)DCPOWERCABLETRUNNIONJ2REAR ACCESSORY CONNECTOR1781413202126SPKR-SPKR+VIPOUT212V(RELAY)VIPOUT112V(RELAY)GROUNDEMERGENCYIGNSENSE(ACC)ANTENNACONNECTIONANTENNA 2WI-FI(OPTIONAL)ANTENNACONNECTIONANTENNA 3GPS (OPTIONAL)3ft MN005720A01-AB Chapter 2: Standard Configurations NOTICE: In dash mount configuration, it is mandatory that a rear accessory cable is attached to the back of a mid power radio, to ground the Emergency pin to ground (GND). Or, an emergency footswitch or pushbutton switch must be attached to the back of a mid power radio. If the emergency pin is not grounded, upon the attachment of the A+ cable at the DC connector, the radio detects HIGH for the emergency pin state, and assume that emergency has been activated. This condition is an attempt to power on the radio, and results in excessive current draw and incorrect radio operation. Refer to Dash Mount: Power, Ignition, and Emergency Cable Installation on page 46 for further details and recommended wiring of Emergency in dash mount configuration. Figure 33: Radio Installation (O2 Remote Mount) Figure 34: Radio Installation (O3 Remote Mount) 38 BATTERYHORNRELAYLIGHTRELAYMICCLIPSPEAKERMICEMERGENCYSWITCHREDLEADFUSEBLOCKYELLOWLEADBLACKLEAD(+)(-)FUSEFUSECONTROL HEADFIREWALLHOLEANTENNACONNECTIONANTENNACONNECTIONANTENNACONNECTIONANTENNA 1DC POWERCABLERADIOFUSEANTENNA 2WI-FI(OPTIONAL)ANTENNA 3GPS (OPTIONAL)PWRSPKJ400-1REDSWB+J400-2GREENGNDJ400-3-NOPINJ400-4-"VIP"detect:GPIO=HIGHJ400-5BLUEVIP_OUT_1J400-6YELLOWVIP_OUT_2J400-7BLACKVIP_OUT_3J400-8WHITEVIP_IN_1(VIP_INGPIO)J400-9ORANGEVIP_IN_2(VIP_INGPIO)J400-10VIOLETVIP_IN_3CANCANUSBACCPORTS ON REAR OF REMOTE CONTROL HEADVIP CONNECTOR PIN-OUTJ4006910742581RadioPinNumberVIPCable(HKN6196_)WireColorFunction3ft3ftDEKVIPJ400BATTERYHORNRELAYLIGHTRELAYCHhangupboxSPEAKERO3CH5m(17ft)CABLE(PMLN4958)EMERGENCYSWITCHFUSEFUSEBLOCK(+)(-)REDLEADFUSEFIREWALLHOLEMOUNTINGSCREWIGNSENSE(ACC)P2(SEEJ626PINOUT)CABLEHLN6863DCPOWERCABLETRUNNIONconnecttoP2FRONTACCESSORYCABLE(PMLN4959)ANTENNACONNECTIONANTENNACONNECTIONANTENNACONNECTIONANTENNA1J2REARACCESSORYCONNECTOR1781413202126SPKR-SPKR+VIPOUT212V(RELAY)VIPOUT112V(RELAY)GROUNDEMERGENCYIGNSENSE(ACC)ANTENNA2WI-FI(OPTIONAL)ANTENNA3GPS(OPTIONAL)3ft3ftRADIO

 

 

Figure 35: Radio Installation (O5 Remote Mount) MN005720A01-AB Chapter 2: Standard Configurations Figure 36: Radio Installation (E5 Remote Mount) 39 BATTERYHORNRELAYLIGHTRELAYMICCLIPSPEAKERMICEMERGENCYSWITCHREDLEADFUSEBLOCKYELLOWLEADBLACKLEAD(+)(-)FUSEFUSECONTROL HEADFIREWALLHOLEANTENNACONNECTIONANTENNACONNECTIONANTENNACONNECTIONANTENNA 1DC POWERCABLERADIOFUSEANTENNA 2WI-FI(OPTIONAL)ANTENNA 3GPS (OPTIONAL)PWRSPKJ400-1REDSWB+J400-2GREENGNDJ400-3-NOPINJ400-4-"VIP"detect:GPIO=HIGHJ400-5BLUEVIP_OUT_1J400-6YELLOWVIP_OUT_2J400-7BLACKVIP_OUT_3J400-8WHITEVIP_IN_1(VIP_INGPIO)J400-9ORANGEVIP_IN_2(VIP_INGPIO)J400-10VIOLETVIP_IN_3CANCANUSBACCPORTS ON REAR OF REMOTE CONTROL HEADVIP CONNECTOR PIN-OUTJ4006910742581RadioPinNumberVIPCable(HKN6196_)WireColorFunction3ft3ftDEKVIPJ400BATTERYHORNRELAYLIGHTRELAYMICCLIPSPEAKERMICEMERGENCYSWITCHREDLEADFUSEBLOCKYELLOWLEADBLACKLEAD(+)(-)FUSEFUSECONTROL HEADFIREWALLHOLEANTENNACONNECTIONANTENNACONNECTIONANTENNACONNECTIONANTENNA 1DC POWERCABLERADIOFUSEANTENNA 2WI-FI(OPTIONAL)ANTENNA 3GPS (OPTIONAL)PWRSPKJ400-1REDSWB+J400-2GREENGNDJ400-3-NOPINJ400-4-"VIP"detect:GPIO=HIGHJ400-5BLUEVIP_OUT_1J400-6YELLOWVIP_OUT_2J400-7BLACKVIP_OUT_3J400-8WHITEVIP_IN_1(VIP_INGPIO)J400-9ORANGEVIP_IN_2(VIP_INGPIO)J400-10VIOLETVIP_IN_3CANCANUSBACCPORTS ON REAR OF REMOTE CONTROL HEADVIP CONNECTOR PIN-OUTJ4006910742581RadioPinNumberVIPCable(HKN6196_)WireColorFunction3ft3ftDEKVIPJ400 MN005720A01-AB Chapter 2: Standard Configurations Figure 37: Radio Installation (O7 Remote Mount) Figure 38: Radio Installation of O9 Remote Mount with Transceiver (URC is optional) 40 BATTERYHORNRELAYLIGHTRELAYMICCLIPSPEAKERMICEMERGENCYSWITCHREDLEADFUSEBLOCKYELLOWLEADBLACKLEAD(+)(-)FUSEFUSECONTROL HEADFIREWALLHOLEANTENNACONNECTIONANTENNACONNECTIONANTENNACONNECTIONANTENNA 1DC POWERCABLERADIOFUSEANTENNA 2WI-FI(OPTIONAL)ANTENNA 3GPS (OPTIONAL)PWRSPKJ400-1REDSWB+J400-2GREENGNDJ400-3-NOPINJ400-4-"VIP"detect:GPIO=HIGHJ400-5BLUEVIP_OUT_1J400-6YELLOWVIP_OUT_2J400-7BLACKVIP_OUT_3J400-8WHITEVIP_IN_1(VIP_INGPIO)J400-9ORANGEVIP_IN_2(VIP_INGPIO)J400-10VIOLETVIP_IN_3CANCANUSBACCPORTS ON REAR OF REMOTE CONTROL HEADVIP CONNECTOR PIN-OUTJ4006910742581RadioPinNumberVIPCable(HKN6196_)WireColorFunction3ft3ftDEKVIPJ400MICMICCLIPEMERGENCYSWITCH(SEE J2PINOUT)GUN LOCKEARJACKControl HeadSpeakerSiren SpeakerSiren BoxRED LEADHORNRELAYANTENNA 1FIREWALLHOLEDC POWERCABLEURC Controller BoxBLACKLEADLIGHTBARO9 TO URC CableRADIOCAN CableANTENNACONNECTIONANTENNACONNECTIONANTENNA 2(+)(-)RED LEADRED LEADRED LEADYELLOW LEADCONTROL HEADFUSEFUSEFUSEFUSEBLOCKBATTERYFUSECIRCUIT BREAKER Figure 39: Radio Installation (O9 Remote Mount with Pinouts) MN005720A01-AB Chapter 2: Standard Configurations No. Description 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 J500 USB J100 M.A.P J200 PWR/SPKR (RED) J300L CAN (BLUE) J300R CAN (BLUE) J400 DEK/VIP (YELLOW) GCAI 41 VIP CONNECTOR PIN-OUTJ4006910742581J400-1 RED SWB +J400-2 GREEN GNDJ400-3 - NO PINJ400-4 - "VIP" detect: GPIO=HIGHJ400-5 BLUE VIP_OUT_1 J400-6 YELLOW VIP_OUT_2J400-7 BLACK VIP_OUT_3J400-8 WHITE VIP_IN_1 (VIP_IN GPIO)J400-9 ORANGE VIP_IN_2 (VIP_IN GPIO)J400-10 VIOLET VIP_IN_3 RadioPinNumberVIP Cable(HKN6196_)Wire ColorFunctionJ2REAR ACCESSORY CONNECTOR1781413202126SPKR-SPKR+VIPOUT 212V(RELAY)VIPOUT 112V(RELAY)GROUNDEMERGENCYIGN SENSE(ACC)1234567 MN005720A01-AB Chapter 2: Standard Configurations Figure 40: Remote Control Head Pinouts No. Description J100 J200 J300L J300R J400 J500 USB DEK VIP (YELLOW) CAN (BLUE) CAN (BLUE) PWR SPK (RED) M.A.P 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 42 123456121110987 Figure 41: Cabling Interconnect Diagram for Dash Mount MN005720A01-AB Chapter 2: Standard Configurations 43 RADIO COMPARTMENT = OPERATOR COMPARTMENTVEHICLE BATTERY COMPARTMENTCONTROL HEADIGN SENSE (thin RED)ACC lineGROMMETVEHICLEIGNITION SWITCHVEHICLEBATTERYCHASSIS GNDFUSEFUSESEE NOTEA+ (RED)SPEAKERMICROPHONETRANSCEIVERNOTE:See TABLE 2-1 for wiring of the thin RED wire. A good GROUND connection to the car chassis is required for correct radio opearaions.NOTE:Ignition sense cable uses either 3-amp fuse (6580283E01) or 4-amp fuse (6580283E02) REARCONNECTOR MN005720A01-AB Chapter 2: Standard Configurations Figure 42: Cabling Interconnect Diagram for Remote Mount 44 IGN SENSE(YELLOW) ACC lineVEHICLEIGNITION SWITCHGROMMETVEHICLEBATTERYCHASSIS GNDMICROPHONECONTROL HEAD (REAR VIEW)DIGITAL CONTROL CABLEREMOTE MOUNT OPERATIONRADIO COMPARTMENTVEHICLE BATTERYCOMPARTMENTOPERATOR COMPARTMENTTRANSCEIVERCHASSIS GNDNOTE:See TABLE 2-1 for wiring of the YELLOW wire. A good GROUND connection to the car chassis is required for correct radio operation.REARCONNECTORTIBGROMMETSPEAKERA+ (RED)SEE NOTEFUSEFUSE Figure 43: Cabling Interconnect Diagram for O9 Remote Mount (URC is optional) MN005720A01-AB Chapter 2: Standard Configurations 45 RADIO COMPARTMENTCAUTIONOPERATOR COMPARTMENTVEHICLE BATTERYCOMPARTMENTSiren Box(BLK)A+(Red)A+(Red)15A FuseMICROPHONEVEHICLEIGNITION SWITCHVEHICLEBATTERYPART OFVEHICLEWIRINGSiren SpeakerON/ACC3A OR 4A FUSESEE NOTESPEAKERRADIO POWER CABLE(RED/BATTERY HOT)15A, 20A OR30A FUSE16A Circuit BreakerGROMMETGROMMETGROMMETREARCONNECTORURC ControllerBoxChassis GNDGCAI to RJ45CableRADIOTIBChassis GNDCAN extension cableA+(Red)IGN Sense(yellow)(BLK)Control Head (Rear View)Chassis GND(+)(-)NOTE:For remote mount configurations, do not supply IGNITION at the radio's rear accessory connector. IGNITION should be supplied according to TABLE 2-2. See TABLE 2-2 for combinations of wiring theRED and YELLOW cables.The RED and YELLOW power cables connect to either the vehicle battery or the ignition switch. Connect the RED cable directly to the battery. The receiver operates when the control head is on. Connecthe YELLOW cable to the ignition switch. The transmitter operates only when the ignition switch is on.Alternate connections: Connecting both RED and YELLOW cables to the battery allows the control head to turn the receiver and transmitter on or off. Connecting both RED and YELLOW cables to theignition switch allows the ignition switch to turn the receiver and transmitter on or off. Alternator whine and other noise problems may occur. Isolate the RED cable with a Motorola relay (5900813674). MN005720A01-AB Chapter 2: Standard Configurations 2.1.3 Radio Operation Wiring for Dash and Remote Configurations Determine the radio functionality you wish to achieve from the tables in Remote Mount: Power, Ignition, and Emergency Cable Installation on page 46, which is the vehicle ignition switch state is controlling, the physical wiring of the radio ignition sense (ACC) wire, and by the programmed CPS setting. For more radio functionality as determined by the programming of the ignition switch in the CPS, refer to the Help menu in your CPS (Ignition as: Required, Blank, Soft Power Off, TX Inhibit, PTT TX Inhibit, Ignition Only Power Up). Choose a clean ignition point which is not shared in the immediate vicinity by other high current accessories/devices. This choice helps to reduce the transients on the ignition line. Examples of high-current accessories/devices are air horn, relays, and lightbars. It is safe to wire to the vehicle ACC line, not the START, or the solenoid side of the ignition circuit. Refer to Finishing the Installation on page 127 for best installation practices. The Ignition sense (ACC) cable uses either a 3 A fuse

(6580283E01) or 4 A fuse (6580283E02). 2.1.3.1 Dash Mount: Power, Ignition, and Emergency Cable Installation The standard dash mount rear ignition sense cable HLN6863 contains a thin red ignition wire, a jumper wire that shorts emergency to ground, and two gray wires attached to an external speaker plug. The thin RED wire is the ignition sense wire. Refer to the tables from Remote Mount: Power, Ignition, and Emergency Cable Installation on page 46 for its correct wiring configurations. NOTICE: This cable must be attached for the radio to operate in dash mount configuration regardless of how emergency is programmed in the CPS or wired inside the vehicle. Either the emergency jumper wire or an emergency accessory (footswitch or button) must be wired to the rear of the radio in dash mount configuration. Otherwise, upon attachment of the radio power cable to the vehicle battery, the radio incorrectly determines that emergency operation has been activated, such as when an emergency footswitch is de-pressed and the emergency pin is ungrounded. 2.1.3.2 Remote Mount: Power, Ignition, and Emergency Cable Installation The single control head O2, O3, O5, E5, O7, and O9 remote mount configurations receive power from the J200 red and black wires connector. The yellow wire at J200 is an ignition sense wire. On mid power radios, the J2 and J600 connectors can also be used for ignition sense. On high-power radios, the J200 yellow wire or the J600 connector can be used for ignition sense. If HLN6863 is attached at J100 of the O2, O3, O5, E5, O7, or O9 control head, the thin red wire do not function as an ignition sense wire, since the J100 connector has no ignition sense electrical connection. NOTICE: It is incorrect to attach the ignition sense wire to more than one wire or connector. Refer to the following tables for its correct wiring configurations. The O3 control head receives its power down the CAN cable, and detects the ignition state by the ignition sense pin at either J2 or J600. On mid power radios, the J2 and J600 connectors can also be used for ignition sense. On high-power radios, only the J600 connector can be used for ignition sense. In Multi-Control Head installations, the yellow ignition wire must be connected to the head assigned ID

#1. See Setting the Initial Control Head ID on page 58 for further information. In remote mount O2, O3, O5, E5, O7, or O9, an Emergency jumper to ground is placed by default on the TIB (JU344) so that there is no need to attach a cable with an emergency accessory to either J2 or J600. This jumper must be removed if an emergency accessory (footswitch or button to Ground) is installed at either J2 or J600 (or J626 on the accessory cable). If the jumper JU344 is removed but no 46 Dash Mount Connected to battery Connected to ignition switch Ignition switch controls Remote Mount Connected to battery Connected to ignition switch Ignition switch controls MN005720A01-AB Chapter 2: Standard Configurations emergency accessory is installed, the radio powers up incorrectly into emergency mode all the time. Refer to Figure 90: Emergency Jumper Removal in Remote Mount on page 88 for details. The design of the control head is different compared to the radio. Therefore it is also not necessary to attach HLN6863 to J100 to prevent accidental emergency operation. The control head uses an edge-

detect, not a state-detect like on the radio, so mounting of HLN6863 is not mandatory. Table 3: Dash O2, O3, O5, O7, or O9 Radio Operations Dependent Upon A+ and Ignition Connections Transceiv-

er Red Power Wire HLN6863 Thin Red Wire Transceiv-

er Red Power Wire HLN6863 Thin Red Wire Transceiv-

er Red Power Wire HLN6863 Thin Red Wire X X X X X No ignition switch control. Enables ignition switch functionality as program-

med in the codeplug. Illegal wiring configura-

tion. Table 4: Remote O2, O3, O5, E5, O7, or O9 Radio Operations Dependent Upon A+ and Ignition Connections Control Head Red Wire Control Head Yel-

low Wire Control Head Red Wire Control Head Yel-

low Wire Control Head Red Wire Control Head Yel-

low Wire X X X X X No ignition switch control. Enables ignition switch functionality as program-

med in the codeplug. Illegal wiring configura-

tion. Table 5: Remote O2, O3, O5, E5, O7, or O9 Radio Operations Dependent Upon A+ and Ignition Connections Transceiv-

er Red Power Wire Mid Pow-

er Dash/

Remote High-Pow-

er Dash/

Remote HLN6863 Thin Red Wire at J2 HLN6863 Thin Red Wire at J626 Transceiv-

er Red Power Wire HLN6863 Thin Red Wire at J2 HLN6863 Thin Red Wire at J626 Transceiv-

er Red Power Wire HLN6863 Thin Red Wire at J2 HLN6863 Thin Red Wire at J626 Connected to battery X X X X X X X 47 MN005720A01-AB Chapter 2: Standard Configurations Mid Pow-

er Dash/

Remote High-Pow-

er Dash/

Remote Connected to ignition switch Ignition switch controls Transceiv-

er Red Power Wire HLN6863 Thin Red Wire at J2 HLN6863 Thin Red Wire at J626 Transceiv-

er Red Power Wire HLN6863 Thin Red Wire at J2 HLN6863 Thin Red Wire at J626 Transceiv-

er Red Power Wire HLN6863 Thin Red Wire at J2 HLN6863 Thin Red Wire at J626 X X X No ignition switch control. Enables ignition switch functionality as program-

med in the codeplug. Illegal wiring configura-

tion. CAUTION:

DO NOT connect any wires to the battery terminals until you have finished the entire radio installation (dash or remote mount configuration) to avoid potential equipment damage. Incorrect wiring of the radio may result in incorrect ignition sense detection, incorrect power-on state, or incorrect power-off state of the radio system. The Control Head Power cable wire (RED) and Transceiver Power cable wire (RED) are always attached to the battery terminal and NOT to the ignition switch. 2.1.4 Ignition Sense Switch (Radio Wide Advance) The CPS (Customer Programming Software) selectable settings is used to control the radio functionality based on the state of the vehicle Ignition status. These descriptions can be found in the CPS tool HELP Guides and are repeated here for convenience. Table 6: Ignition Sense Switch Settings in CPS Feature Blank Description Radio POWERS ON when the Power button is pressed or with the Emer-

gency Power-up feature. Radio POWERS OFF when the Power button is pressed. TX Inhibit Radio POWERS ON when the Power button is pressed or with the Emer-

gency Power-up feature. Radio POWERS OFF when the Power button is pressed. If IGNITION is not present, all transmissions are inhibited. The radio does not affiliate with trunking systems and therefore cannot receive any trunking dispatch communications. Emergency Alarm transmissions are NOT possible with the use of the Emergency Power-up feature. PTT TX Inhibit Radio POWERS ON when the Power button is pressed or with the Emer-

gency Power-up feature. Radio POWERS OFF when the Power button is pressed. 48 MN005720A01-AB Chapter 2: Standard Configurations Feature Description If IGNITION is not present, all transmissions are inhibited. The radio is able to affiliate with trunking systems. The radio can ONLY receive trunking dispatch communications. Emergency Alarm transmissions are possible with the use of the Emer-

gency Power-up feature. Required Radio POWERS ON when the Power button is pressed and Ignition is Radio POWERS ON when Ignition is cycled and radio was previously Radio POWERS OFF when the Power button is pressed, or when Igni-

Soft Power-off Radio POWERS ON when the Power button is pressed, or when Ignition Radio POWERS OFF when the Power button is pressed, or when Igni-

present. turned ON. tion is lost. is detected. tion is lost. Ignition Only Pow-

er-up Radio POWERS ON when Ignition is present. Radio POWERS OFF when Ignition is lost. Control head Power button is ignored. NOTICE: When either TX Inhibit, PTT TX Inhibit or Required are selected, the Emergency Power-up feature is not available. When any other Ignition Switch setting is made, Emergency Power-up is available regardless of the current ignition state. Any optional inactivity time-out timer setting in CPS may delay the power-off of the radio once Ignition sense is removed. 2.1.5 Siren/PA Configuration and Programming The Siren/PA is shipped pre-wired for 100 W operation. It can be rewired for 65 W, 75 W, or 130 W power levels. Refer to this procedure if you want to change to another power level. Procedure:

1 Open the Siren/PA connector cover to gain access to the two-connector speaker leads. Do not change the speaker common lead (pin 20). The other lead is connected to pin 35 (for 100 W operation). 2 Using an appropriate pin removal tool, extract pin 35 and move it to one of the following pin locations:

Pin location 36 for 75 W operation Pin location 28 for 65 W or 130 W operation 3 Do one of the following:

For 65 W or 75 W operation, reassemble the connector. 49 MN005720A01-AB Chapter 2: Standard Configurations For 130 W operation, parallel the two 11 speakers, each rated at 65 W minimum. Proper phasing of the two speakers is important when connecting two speakers in parallel, wire similar speaker terminals together to ensure maximum loudness and prevent "deadspots". For example, if the terminals are marked "1" and "2", connect the terminals marked "1" together and connect those wires to one speaker lead. Connect the terminals marked "2" together and connect those wires to the other speaker lead. CAUTION: Before continuing, remember that under a high-line supply condition (16.6 V), up to 30% more power goes to the speakers after reconfiguring for 130 W operation. Do this setting only when your PA speakers can handle the extra power. 4 When the Siren/PA is configured for dual speaker for 130 W operation, it is necessary to remove a resistor and move two jumpers to set the correct power level. Remove the Siren/PA cover, and locate resistor R219 (0 ). This resistor should be removed for 130 W operation. Locate jumpers JU100 and JU101. These jumpers should be installed for 130 W operation. 5 Close and reconnect the Siren/PA connector cover. NOTICE: Jumpers JU100 and JU101 do not affect the Siren output level. JU100 and JU101 compensate for the lower speaker load and the two speakers in parallel by decreasing the gain U102-1. JU100 affects the radio PA level and JU101 affects the PA audio level. Pin locations of various power level configurations are listed in the following table. Table 7: Power Level Configurations Power Level Pin Location of Speaker Leads 65 W 75 W 100 W 130 W 20, 28 20, 36 20, 35 20, 28 R219 JU100/JU101 IN IN IN Across pins A and B Across pins A and B Across pins A and B OUT Across pins B and C 2.2 Radio Mounting CAUTION:

DO NOT mount the radio on a plastic mounting surface without first reinforcing the mounting surface; the weight of the radio may crack or break the mounting surface. DO NOT mount the radio on a flat or concave surface where the radio could be partially submersed in water. It is especially important if the cab area of the vehicle is cleaned by spraying it with water. If the radio sits in water for a length of time, moisture may seep inside the radio and damage the electronic components. DO NOT allow water to stand in recessed areas of vertically mounted radios. Remove any moisture immediately to prevent it from seeping down into the radio. Shield the control head (front and back) from direct exposure to pressurized water. The pressurized water from a hose usually is more severe than the stated test and conditions in typical environments. The mounting location must be accessible and visible. Select a location that permits routing the RF antenna cable as directly as possible. 50 MN005720A01-AB Chapter 2: Standard Configurations NOTICE: For optimum radio performance, orient the mounting trunnion as shown in the following figures. For new or existing installations of APX 2500, APX 4500, and APX 1500, use only the APX mobile trunnion, kit number HLN6861_. Figure 44: Enhanced Single Band Mobile Radio Trunnion Orientation Applies to radios in dash and remote installations. No. 1 Description Radio Front 2.2.1 Dash Mount with Trunnion Procedure:

1 Referring to the following table, select the suitable trunnion kit per the type of mid power radio. 2 Mount your radio on the transmission hump or under the dash. NOTICE:

When mounting the trunnion on the transmission hump, ensure that the transmission housing is not affected. Plan your installation, ensuring enough room for the accessory connector and cable at the back of the radio. This configuration shows the O5 control head. The TIB is used for O3 control head for the same configuration. 51 1 MN005720A01-AB Chapter 2: Standard Configurations Figure 45: Transmission Hump Trunnion Mounting Figure 46: Below Dash Trunnion Mounting Table 8: Mid Power Trunnion Kit Item Part Number Description Mid Power Radio 0305760W04 0312002B14 HLN6861_

Trunnion Mounting Wing Screw Self-Drilling Tap-

ping Screw ASTRO Trunnion Hardware Kit Threaded Hole for Screw Groove

Enhanced Single Band Mobile Enhanced Single Band Mobile Enhanced Single Band Mobile 1 2 3 4 5 52 11311456327 MN005720A01-AB Chapter 2: Standard Configurations Item 6 Part Number Description Mid Power Radio

Plastic Guides

3 Using the trunnion mounting bracket as a template, mark the positions of the holes on the mounting surface. Use the innermost four holes for a curved mounting surface such as the transmission hump, and the four outermost holes for a flat surface such as under the dash. 4 Center punch the spots you have marked and realign the trunnion in position. 5 Secure the trunnion mounting bracket with the four self-drilling screws provided. 6 Ensure that the plastic guides are aligned (horizontal) to the grooves of the trunnion. Slide the radio into the grooves until it snaps into place. 7 Secure the radio with the two screws provided (Item 1). The torque down force for 0371859H01 should be between 50 in-lbf to 52 in-lbf. 8 For screw 0305760W04, the wing screw torque tool (HLN6970_) is designed to securely tighten the trunnion wing screws while installing the radio. The tool can also be used to loosen the wing screws. Detailed instructions are included in the tool packaging. 2.2.2 Remote Mount with Trunnion For remote mount installation, the radio may be mounted anywhere in the vehicle, as long as the installation location is safe, follows the cautions mentioned at the beginning of this section, and is accessible for servicing/maintenance and cabling. A typical mounting location recommended by Motorola Solutions is in the trunk of the vehicle. The trunnion provided may still be used to mount the transceiver, and the mounting process is the same for dash mount installation. See Figure 35: Radio Installation (O5 Remote Mount) on page 39 or Figure 37: Radio Installation (O7 Remote Mount) on page 40 for remote installation. 2.2.2.1 Remote Mount Control Head Installation Choose a mounting location for the radio, considering accessibility, and control and antenna cable lengths. The recommended mounting surfaces for the control unit are under the mounting surface, on the transmission hump, or on the center console. Installing Remote Mount Control Head on page 54 shows how you should install the trunnion, control head, and cables for the O2, O3, O5, E5, O7, or O9 control head. NOTICE:

Connector-protective covers (Dust Covers) HLN6980_ are provided with the radio. Install the covers on exposed connectors for added environmental robustness. An adjustable trunnion, which allows several mounting positions, is supplied to mount the control unit. The installation must not interfere with the operation of the vehicle or its accessories, nor disturb passenger seating or leg room. The control head must be within convenient reach and viewing of the user. If the trunnion is mounted on a plastic mounting surface, all four mounting screws should penetrate the supporting metal frame of the mounting surface. If that is not possible, use a metal backing plate (not supplied) to strengthen the installation. 53 MN005720A01-AB Chapter 2: Standard Configurations 2.2.2.1.1 Installing Remote Mount Control Head Procedure:

1 Use the control unit trunnion as a template to mark the mounting holes; drill 5/32" holes. If mounting on a plastic surface, use a metal backing plate. 2 Attach the trunnion bracket using all four 10-16" x 5/8" self-tapping screws provided. 3 Temporarily install the control head (adjusting for proper viewing angle) and fasten it to the 4 Test the installation to ensure that the control head feels securely locked in place while you are trunnion with two wing screws. pressing its buttons. 5 Finish the installation by fully tightening the screws. Figure 47: O5 Control Head Installation Exploded View (Also applicable for O2, O7 and E5 Control Heads) Description Metal Backing Plate (Not Supplied) No. 1 54 1 Figure 48: O9 Control Head Installation Exploded View MN005720A01-AB Chapter 2: Standard Configurations No. Description Mounting surface Adjust the control head to a desired angle and secure with wing screws IMPORTANT: If the trunnion is mounted on a plastic or unstable surface, use a metal backing plate (not supplied). Drill four 5/32 holes in the mounting surface Trunnion Use four mounting screws on all installations 1 2 3 4 5 6 55 123456 MN005720A01-AB Chapter 2: Standard Configurations Figure 49: O5 Control Head Rear View (Also applicable for O2 and O7 Control Heads) Figure 50: E5 Control Head Rear View Figure 51: O9 Control Head Rear View 56 MN005720A01-AB Chapter 2: Standard Configurations 2.2.2.2 Multiple Control Head Installation Install control heads in a multiple control head configuration as per the steps detailed in Installing Remote Mount Control Head on page 54. Two heads can be connected to each of the two CAN connectors on the radio, with the remaining heads connected to one or both of the first two. You can also connect control heads in a daisy chain configuration from the CAN connector of a single radio. See the following figures for examples. NOTICE: The transceiver must be configured for Multiple Control Head through CPS programming. Navigate to the Control Head tab in the Radio Wide section of the CPS, and select Help for further information and tutorials. NOTICE: In Multiple Control Head (MCH) installations, the yellow ignition sense wire must be connected to the head assigned ID # 1. See Setting the Initial Control Head ID on page 58 for further information. Use the most convenient configuration for your installation, ensuring that the combined cable lengths do not exceed 131 feet (40 meters). See Table 9: Available CAN Cables on page 57 for a list of available CAN cable lengths. Control head ground, power and ignition sense wires (black, red, and yellow respectively) may need more length (not supplied) in installations that locate the head more than 10 feet from a power source. Table 9: Available CAN Cables Part Number Description HKN6164_ HKN6165_ HKN6166_ HKN6167_ HKN6168_ HKN6169_ HKN6170_ Cable, Remote Mount, 40 m (131 ft) Cable, Remote Mount, 35 m (115 ft) Cable, Remote Mount, 23 m (75 ft) Cable, Remote Mount, 15 m (50 ft) Cable, Remote Mount, 9 m (30 ft) Cable, Remote Mount, 5 m (17 ft) Cable, Remote Mount, 3 m (10 ft) PMLN4958_ Cable, O3 Extension, 5 m (17 ft) Table 10: Ignition Interface Cables Part Number Description HLN6863_ Cable, M.A.P. 26 pin with Only Ignition and SPK PMLN4959_ Cable, Y-Splitter with DB-25 and M.A.P. Interface 2.2.2.3 Cable Installation Route the cables where they are protected from pinching, sharp edges or crushing. Use grommets in any holes where the cable passes through metal panels. Figure 41: Cabling Interconnect Diagram for Dash Mount on page 43 shows how the cables and components are connected. It is not recommended to route cabling or wiring inside the wheel wells of a vehicle. 57 MN005720A01-AB Chapter 2: Standard Configurations 2.2.2.4 Setting the Initial Control Head ID The Front Panel Programming (FPP) mode allows you to define which control head in a Multi-Control Head system becomes control head number 14. Prerequisites: Set the control head ID number for each attached head the first-time Multi-Control Head is used. Procedure:

1 Press the Power button to power off the radio. 2 Simultaneously press and hold the left-most Soft Menu key and the Emergency button on the control head. Figure 52: APX Mobile O5 Control Head Front View No. 1 2 3 Description Power button Left-most Soft Menu key Emergency button 3 Press the Power button to power on the control head. Figure 53: Radio Display with Current Control Head ID The head is powered on into FPP mode and displays the current control head ID number. 4 Turn the Mode knob to change the control head ID number. 58 O5321 Figure 54: APX Mobile O5 Control Head Front View Mode Knob MN005720A01-AB Chapter 2: Standard Configurations No. 1 Description Mode Knob 5 Repeat step 1 through step 4 to set the ID of the remaining control heads. NOTICE: In Multiple Control Head (MCH) installations, the yellow ignition sense wire must be connected to the head assigned ID #1. 2.2.2.5 O3 Control Head and Remote Mount Cabling Choose a mounting location for the radio, considering accessibility, control, and antenna cable lengths. The control head extension cable and the accessories cable should be installed and routed properly to avoid complications. Prerequisites: Route the cables in the wiring troughs (where available) of the vehicle or route the cables where they are protected from pinching, sharp edges, or crushing. One suggested route is along one side of the driveshaft hump under the carpet. Use grommets in any holes where the cable passes through metal panels. 59 O51 MN005720A01-AB Chapter 2: Standard Configurations Figure 55: O3 Control Head No. Description Top Left Front Right Back 1 2 3 4 5 60 The recommended mounting surface for the control unit is on the center console. Figure 57: Hang-Up Clip Installation Exploded View on page 61 shows how the hang-up clip control head, and cables should be installed for the O3 control head. A mounting clip, which allows the control head to be mounted, is supplied together with the control head. Procedure:

1 Use the provided mounting clip to determine the location of the two screw holes. 2 Drill 7/16 deep holes for the upper and lower screws. 3 Use the tapping screw provided to install the mounting clip. 12345 MN005720A01-AB Chapter 2: Standard Configurations CAUTION: Shield the control head (front and back) from direct exposure to pressurized water. The pressurized water from a hose is usually more severe than the stated test and conditions in typical environments. Figure 56: O3 Control Head Rear View Figure 57: Hang-Up Clip Installation Exploded View Item No. 1 2 3 Part Number 01-80743T91 03-07644M19 Description Mic Hang-Up Clip Assembly Screw, Machine, 8-32 x 7/16

Vehicle Mounting Surface 61 1223 MN005720A01-AB Chapter 2: Standard Configurations 2.2.3 Radio Locking 2.2.3.1 Locking Kit The section describes the radio locking on the trunnion. Enhanced Single Band Mobile Radio If an optional locking kit (HLN6372_) is used, position the lock housing on the trunnion after installing the radio mounting screws. Then rotate the lock with the key in it and remove the key to lock the radio. You can install the lock on either side of the radio, and in dash and remote mount installations. Figure 58: Locking Kit (Optional) Description Wing Screw Lock Housing Lock 2.3 Power Cables (Transceiver and Control Head) Route the RED power cable from both the radio and the control head to the vehicle battery compartment, using accepted industry methods and standards. Be sure to grommet the firewall hole to protect the cable. Remove the 15 A (part number 6580283E06), 20 A (part number 6580283E07), or 30 A (part number 6580283E09) fuse from the fuseholder and connect the red lead of the radio power cable to the positive battery terminal using the hardware provided as shown in Figure 64: HKN6188_ Power Cable with External Speaker Connector on page 65 and Figure 65: HKN6187_ Power Cable with External Speaker Connector, Record Audio Output Jack (2.5 mm) and Earphone Jack (2.5 mm) on page 66. No. 1 2 3 62 123 Connect the black lead to a convenient solid chassis ground point. DO NOT connect the black lead directly to the battery negative terminal. MN005720A01-AB Chapter 2: Standard Configurations Table 11: Power Cables Description Mid Power Dash Mount Mid Power Remote Mount O5, O7, and O9 Remote Control Head Power Cable Part Number HKN4191_ HKN4192_ HKN6188_ NOTICE: Remote Control Head power cable uses a 5 A Fuse (part number 6580283E03). 2.3.1 Optional Locking Feature for High-Power Chassis Power Cables An optional clip (HLN7017_) can be used to increase DC cable retention in high-power radios. 1 Insert the DC cable to the radio by aligning the male and female portions of the battery side with Procedure:

the mating components on the radio side. Figure 59: Inserting DC Cable to the Radio 2 Insert the locking bracket (HLN7017_) onto the DC cable. 3 Slide the bracket toward the radio until the bracket clips snap onto the radio features. 63

 

 

MN005720A01-AB Chapter 2: Standard Configurations Figure 60: Installing the Locking Bracket Figure 61: Bracket Installation (Assembled State) 4 To disassemble the power cable, squeeze the locking bracket clips inward and while squeezing the clips, pull the locking clip and power cable to remove the power cable. Figure 62: Bracket Uninstallation (1 of 2) 64 Figure 63: Bracket Uninstallation (2 of 2) MN005720A01-AB Chapter 2: Standard Configurations 2.3.2 O2, O3, O5, O7, O9 or E5 Control Head Power Cables Figure 64: HKN6188_ Power Cable with External Speaker Connector 65 MN005720A01-AB Chapter 2: Standard Configurations Figure 65: HKN6187_ Power Cable with External Speaker Connector, Record Audio Output Jack

(2.5 mm) and Earphone Jack (2.5 mm) NOTICE:

Audio Out Does not require CPS programming. Attaching a headset mutes the external speakers of the radio which are attached to the SPK jack of the control head. Record Out Requires CPS programming. In CPS, navigate to Radio Wide/Advanced/Record Audio and select TX + RX Audio. 2.3.3 Battery Selector Switch In vehicles with a Battery Selector Switch, the ignition sense (yellow) wire should be the only wire connected to the Battery Selector Switch. The radio transceiver and control head power wires (red) must be connected directly to the vehicle battery. If the control head power wire and the control head ignition sense wire are both connected to a Battery Selector Switch, but the radio transceiver power lead is not, improper power-cycling and off-state battery drainage may occur. If the desired state of the radio is a total battery drain elimination, then route all power and ignition sense wires through the Battery Selector Switch, so that the control head and radio transceiver both see the loss of battery power at the same time. 66 Figure 66: Battery Selector Switch MN005720A01-AB Chapter 2: Standard Configurations 2.4 Antenna Installation IMPORTANT: To ensure optimum performance and compliance with RF Energy Safety standards, these antenna installation guidelines, and instructions are limited to metal-body vehicles with appropriate ground planes and consider the potential exposure of back seat passengers and bystanders outside the vehicle. NOTICE: For mobile radios with rated power of 7 W or less, the only installation restrictions are to use only Motorola Solutions approved antennas and install the antenna externally on metal body vehicles. For mobile radios with tuned power greater than 7 W, always adhere to all the guidelines and restrictions in Antenna Installation on a Metal Body Vehicle on page 67. 2.4.1 Antenna Installation on a Metal Body Vehicle You can install the antenna at the following locations:

External installation Check the requirements of the antenna supplier and install the vehicle antenna external to a metal body vehicle in accordance with those requirements. Roof top For optimum performance and compliance with RF Energy Exposure regulations, mount the antenna at the center of the roof. Trunk lid On some vehicles with clearly defined, flat trunk lids, you can mount the antennas of some radio models at the center of the trunk lid. For vehicles without clearly defined, flat trunk lids

(such as hatchback autos, sports utility vehicles, and pick-up trucks), mount the antenna at the center of the roof. Ensure that the following are observed before installing an antenna on the trunk lid:

- Ensure that the distance from the antenna location on the trunk lid is at least 85 cm (33 in.) from the rear seat head-rest to ensure compliance with RF Energy Exposure regulations.

- Ensure that the trunk lid is grounded by connecting grounding straps between the trunk lid and the vehicle chassis. CAUTION: If these conditions cannot be satisfied, then mount the antenna on the roof top. NOTICE:

Do not cut the antenna cables to ensure compliance with RF Energy Exposure regulations. To ensure compliance with RF Energy Exposure regulations, mount the 1/4 wave antenna of VHF and UHF bands only at the center of the roof, . 67 MN005720A01-AB Chapter 2: Standard Configurations Ensure that the antenna cable can be easily routed to the radio. Route the antenna cable as far away as possible from any vehicle electronic control units and associated wiring. Check the antenna location for any electrical interference. NOTICE: Any two metal pieces rubbing against each other such as seat springs, shift levers, trunk and hood lids, exhaust pipes, and others close to the antenna can cause severe receiver interference. 2.4.2 Distance Between Antennas The following figure indicates the separation distances required for the various antennas used with all mobile radios. Each "cross-hair" symbol represents a possible location (LOC) of an antenna. The recommendation is to locate them as close to the center of the roof and/or trunk as possible, without interference with a lightbar. NOTICE: Do not cut the antenna cable. Figure 67: Multiple Antennas Separation for locations 16 Letters A, B, C, and D indicates the maximum distance of 8 inches between the edge of the ground plane and the accessory antenna location. 68 BBACCDDALOC:3LOC:1LOC:4LOC:5LOC:2LOC:6RoofCenterTrunkCenter MN005720A01-AB Chapter 2: Standard Configurations NOTICE:

(LOC:2). A minimum of 18 inches separation is required between the lightbar and any roof-mounted antennas to prevent interference with the lightbar circuitry (see lightbar manufacturers installation information). LMR antennas should only be placed at the center of the roof (LOC:1) or center of the trunk To ensure compliance with RF Energy Exposure regulations, install VHF and UHF 1/4 wave antenna at LOC:1 (center of the roof only). The LTE antenna must be separated from any LMR antenna by at least 40 inches. Install the LTE Main and Diversity Antenna at LOC:5 and LOC:6 when the LMR antenna is only located at LOC:1 for a single band mobile radio (LTE opposite location from the LMR). Install the LTE Main and Diversity Antenna at LOC:3 and LOC:4 when the LMR antenna is only at LOC:2 for a single band mobile radio (LTE opposite location from the LMR). Install the Wi-Fi/Bluetooth roof mount antenna at LOC:3, LOC:4, LOC:5, or LOC:6. For the installation of glass mount Wi-Fi/Bluetooth antenna, refer to the antenna installation manual. In some mobile installations that include an LTE modem, external filtering on the LMR port and/or the LTE port is needed to reduce interference. Contact your local Motorola Solutions Service Center for more information and for filter kit numbers (see Replacement Parts Ordering on page 134 on page 128 for contact information). 2.4.3 Mini-UHF Connection To help the installation of the radio antenna, there are labels indicating the frequency. The first is on the FCC label at the top of the radio which calls out the frequency with arrows indicating the location of the RF connector at the back of the radio. The second is at the back of the radio, next to the RF connector. To ensure a secure connection of an antenna cable mini-UHF plug to a radio mini-UHF jack, their interlocking features must be properly engaged. If they are not properly engaged, the system loosens. Do not use a tool (pliers or wrench) to overcome a poor engagement. NOTICE: Applying excessive force with a tool such as stripping threads, deforming the collar or connector, or causing the connector to twist in the housing opening and break, can damage the antenna or the connector. The mini-UHF connector tool (Motorola Solutions part number HLN6695_) is designed to securely tighten the antenna plugradio jack connection without damaging either the plug or the jack. Motorola Solutions recommends the following sequence to ensure proper attachment of the system

(see the following figures). 69 MN005720A01-AB Chapter 2: Standard Configurations Figure 68: Mini-UHF Connection No. Description Coax Conductor Plug (Pin) Collar Pulled Back to Flange Flange Cable Mini UHF Jack RF Antenna Connector Label 2.4.3.1 Installing Mini-UHF Connection Prerequisites:

Ensure that there is sufficient slack in the antenna cable. Ensure that the collar of the antenna cable plug is loose and does not bind. Ensure that the mini-UHF jack is tight in the radio housing. Procedure:

1 Slide the collar back against the flange. 2 Insert the antenna cable plug pin fully into the radio jack, but do not engage the threads. 3 Ensure that the plug and jack interlocking features are fully seated. Do the check up by grasping the crimp on the cable jack, rotating the cable, and noting any movement. If the features are seated correctly, there should be NO movement. 4 Finger-tighten the antenna cable plug collar onto the radio jack. 5 Give a final tug by hand to the collar and retighten by hand as firmly as possible. 6 Slip the mini-UHF connector tool over the coaxial cable, using the gap between the tool legs. 1 2 3 4 5 6 70 123456 Figure 69: Mini-UHF Connector Tool MN005720A01-AB Chapter 2: Standard Configurations No. 1 2 3 Description Squeeze Firmly Together Tighten HLN6695_ 7 Slide the tool up onto the knurled collar of the plug. 8 Squeeze the two straight legs of the tool firmly together between your thumb and index finger and turn clockwise (as shown) to tighten the collar. It should take 1/4 turn or less. NOTICE: DO NOT use pliers or any other device to grip the tightening tool. It has been designed to allow you to achieve the proper torque on the collar without overtightening. Overtightening the collar can damage the connector and the radio. When you feel the tool slipping on the collar, the connection has been properly tightened. The tool can also be used to loosen a tight collar. Place the GPS antenna (excluding the Motorcycle GPS antenna) at least, 3 ft

(0.9 m) away from any transmitting antenna, and the antenna must have a clear, unobstructed view of the sky for best performance. Consider the length of the cabling before the installation is started. 2.4.4 GPS Antenna Placement 2.4.5 QMA Connection The radio uses a quick disconnect connection called QMA. This does not require any tightening. Ensure there is sufficient slack in the antenna cable. Ensure that the collar of the antenna cable plug does not bind. Engage the QMA cable plug onto the jack, listening for a click to ensure proper engagement. Gently tug on the cable to ensure that it is engaged. To disengage, pull back on the cable plug collar and pull the cable straight off the jack. 71 132 MN005720A01-AB Chapter 2: Standard Configurations 2.4.6 GPS/GLONASS and Wi-Fi Antenna Connection Connect GPS and Wi-Fi antenna cable QMA plug to the radio QMA jack for GPS and Wi-Fi respectively. Figure 70: GPS/GLONASS and Wi-Fi Antenna Connector on the radio 2.5 Installing the Speaker The speaker kit includes a trunnion bracket that allows the speaker to be mounted in various ways. With the trunnion bracket, the speaker can mount permanently on the mounting surface or in accessible firewall areas. The trunnion allows the speaker to tilt for best operation. Mount the speaker out of the way so that the vehicle occupants cannot kick or knock around it. CAUTION: DO NOT ground the radio speaker leads. This system has a floating speaker output

(DC voltage on both leads); damage to the audio circuit results if either lead is grounded or if they are shorted together. Prerequisites:

Procedure:

1 To mark the mounting hole locations, use the speaker mounting bracket as a template. 2 Use the self-drilling screws provided to fasten the trunnion. 3 Attach the speaker and fasten it to the trunnion with two wing screws. 4 Route the speaker wires under the carpet or floor covering, or behind the kick panels. Ensure that the wires are out of the way of the occupants of the vehicle. 5 Do not submerse the 2-pin speaker connector in water nor place this connector in an area that could have standing water. 72 Figure 71: Speaker Mounting MN005720A01-AB Chapter 2: Standard Configurations No. 1 2 3 4 Description Trunnion Bracket Firewall Dashboard EITHER way 2.5.1 Internal Speaker Disassembly Prerequisites:

NOTICE:

This configuration is only applicable for O2 Control Heads. Procedure:

1 Unplug the power, antenna, microphone, and all accessories connections. If the radio is a remote-mount radio, disconnect the remote-mount control cable from the front of the transceiver. 2 Remove the four screws found on the control head with a Torx T-20 bit. Discard the screws. 73 1234 MN005720A01-AB Chapter 2: Standard Configurations Figure 72: Removing the screws on the Control Head 3 Firmly grasp the front panel of the control head. Carefully remove the front housing assembly from the back housing assembly. Note the position of the attached flex and do not pull on it excessively. Figure 73: Removing the Control Head 4 Put the control head face down on a clean, flat surface to avoid damaging it. Do not touch the o-

ring on the back housing. 5 Carefully disconnect the speaker connector from the circuit board. 74 Figure 74: Disconnecting the Speaker Connector MN005720A01-AB Chapter 2: Standard Configurations 6 Reattach the front housing assembly to the back housing assembly. Ensure that the flex is returned to its original position and that the o-ring on the back housing assembly is not pinched. Figure 75: Reattaching the Control Head 7 Secure the front housing assembly back to the back housing assembly with four new screws using the Torx T-20 bit. Apply 9 in. lbs. torque for each screw. 2.6 Microphone Hang-Up Clip This section describes the microphone hang-up clip for mobile radios. The hang-up clip must be within reach of the operator and close enough to the control head to prevent cable strain. Measure this distance before actually mounting the bracket. Since the bracket has a positive-detent action, you can mount the microphone at any position. To locate the mounting holes, use the hang-up clip as a template. To avoid interference when removing the microphone, install the flathead screw at the top clip hole. Some microphone models require the grounding of the microphone clip in order for HUB operation to work correctly. Refer to the documentation that comes with your Motorola Solutions microphone model. NOTICE: For multi-control head configuration where only one of the control heads has a microphone, the control heads without a microphone attached must have their HUB or Monitor pin (J100-22) jumpered by a wire to GND (J100-1 or J100-14) for HUB operation to work. 75 MN005720A01-AB Chapter 2: Standard Configurations 2.7 RFID (Option) A mobile radio equipped with an RFID tag allows an alternate option to track the radio. Each RFID equipped radio has an RFID tag preprogrammed with the serial number (also found on the FCC label), band, and radio model information of the radio. Figure 76: RFID Location No. 1 Description RFID Tag 2.7.1 RFID Reading To read an RFID tag using a UHF Gen 2 RFID reader (for example, Motorola Solutions MC9090-G), open an appropriate RFID read application, point the RFID reader at the tag, and activate the RFID antenna of the reader. The RFID reader must be within 1 ft. from the tag to read. Two variables, Read Angle and Reader Orientation, aid in the distance to read and write the RFID Tag. Read distance is independent of Tag Angle, but the reader should be as close to perpendicular to the tag as possible (Read Angle). As Read Angle increases past 60 degrees, read distance begins to decrease, and the tag becomes unreadable once Read Angle exceeds 90 degrees. RFID tag cannot be read through metal. The orientation of the reader (Reader Orientation) and the tag must be aligned to improve read and writability. Figure 77: Read Angle for Enhanced Single Band Mobile Radio 76 112 No. 1 2 No. 1 2 No. 1 MN005720A01-AB Chapter 2: Standard Configurations Figure 78: Tag Angle for Enhanced Single Band Mobile Radio Descrption RFID Tag Read Angle Descrption RFID Tag Tag Angle Figure 79: Examples of Reader and Tag Aligned (Reader Orientation) Figure 80: Example of Reader and Tag Misalignment (Reader Orientation) Descrption Reader 77 12112212 MN005720A01-AB Chapter 2: Standard Configurations No. 2 Descrption Tag 2.7.2 Programming RFID (If Equipped) Reprogram the tag (up to 12 ASCII characters when encoded to hexadecimal format) by using any UHF Gen 2 capable RFID writer, for example, Motorola Solutions MC9090-G. NOTICE: Follow the read direction in RFID Reading on page 76 to optimize reprogramming. Table 12: Model Number Chart in 12-Digit ASCII Format Model Number Radio Tier/Band/Output Level Last Two Digits M22URS9PW1BN APX 4500 700/800 MHZ M24URS9PW1BN APX 2500 700/800 MHZ M25URS9PW1BN APX 6500 700/800 MHZ M25URS9PW1BNI APX 5500 700/800 MHZ M36URS9PW1BN APX 1500 700/800 MHZ Table 13: Serial Number with Radio Band/Tier/Power Characters Radio Band/Tier/Power F8 F8 F5 F5 F9 700/800 and 900 VHF UHF 700/800 and VHF VHF and UHF UHF1 and UHF2 700/800 and UHF APX 7000 APX 7500 Mid Power APX 7500 High Power APX 6000 APX 6500 Mid Power APX 6500 High Power APX Low Tier Portable APX Low Tier Mobile MP/APX 4500 MP/APX 2500 MP APX Lowest Tier Mobile MP/APX 1500 MP F D E R T E S 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 78 MN005720A01-AB Chapter 2: Standard Configurations 2.8 Completing the Installation Follow the following steps to complete the installation. Procedure:

1 Connect the speaker to the accessory cable. 2 Verify that the ignition sense wire is attached according to planned ignition sense. 3 Attach the accessory cable into J600. 4 Verify that the control head is attached to either the TIB or the CAN extension cable. 5 Attach the power cable to the back of the transceiver. 79 MN005720A01-AB Chapter 3: Universal Relay Controller Installation Chapter 3 Universal Relay Controller Installation The Universal Relay Controller (URC) is an extension of an orderable accessory for O7 or O9 control head. URC is used to control high power switching peripherals, for example, lightbar. URC works on all power application controlled lightbars. URC is connected to the transceiver GCAI port. The URC design consists of a microcontroller and uses ten relays to control the switching device. A separate ground for isolation exists between the relay and MCU sections, which is provided by the use of iCoupler from Analog Devices. Each relay is connected to an output with 15 A fuse. The maximum load allowed on each output is 12 A. Two cables, each with the maximum of 60 A, can be used to connect to the input connector at the bus bar. Each cable is connected with a 60 A circuit breaker. One-wire EEPROM is employed to enable GCAI to recognize the URC accessory ID. CPS can be used to program the relay patterns. When installing URC, make sure to plan the installation carefully and leave more room in the front and rear of the box for cabling and accessory connections; and also to the sides of the radio so that you may access and install the trunnion screws. The recommended mounting location for URC is in the car trunk, either next to the transceiver or within the area not further than 4.5 m away from the transceiver. Ensure that sufficient cooling is provided. Do not cover URC with baggage, blankets, and so on. CAUTION: Do not backfeed power into URC. 3.1 Universal Relay Controller Mounting The mounting location must be accessible and visible. Select a location that permits routing the cable as directly as possible. Prerequisites:

NOTICE: For optimum URC performance, orient the mounting trunnion as shown in the following figure. Figure 81: Universal Relay Controller Orientation An adjustable trunnion, which allows several mounting positions, is supplied for mounting the URC. The installation must not interfere with the operation of the vehicle or its accessories. 80 MN005720A01-AB Chapter 3: Universal Relay Controller Installation Procedure:

1 Use the URC trunnion as a template to mark the mounting holes. Then, drill 5/32 in. holes. If mounting on a plastic surface, use a metal backing plate. 2 Attach the trunnion bracket using all four 10 16 in. x 5/8 in. self-tapping screws provided. 3 Temporarily install the URC (adjust for proper viewing angle) and fasten it to the trunnion with two wing screws. Test the installation to ensure that the unit is securely locked in place. Figure 82: Universal Relay Controller Installation Exploded View No. Description Use four mounting screws on all installations Mounting surface Metal backing plate (not supplied) IMPORTANT: Use this plate if mounting trunnion on plastic or unstable surface. Drill four 5/32 holes in mounting surface Trunnion 1 2 3 4 5 81 123456 MN005720A01-AB Chapter 3: Universal Relay Controller Installation No. 6 Description Adjust the universal relay controller to desired angle and secure with wing screws 3.2 O7/O9 Universal Relay Controller Cable Assembly This sections provides the instruction for URC cable assembly. 3.2.1 Installing the Power Cable Procedure:

1 Remove the cap nut of power cable gland assembly, and insert the power cable through the cap nut and neoprene seal in the cable gland body. Use power cable with either AWG 6 or AWG 8 only (recommended OD range of cable is 5.5 mm to 9 mm) that is able to withstand 80 A and 50 A respectively, to ensure water sealing of the controller. User can decide to install one or two power cables based on the requirements. The power cables (A+) are not supplied. 2 The loose end of the power cable with cable strip length 7.94 mm (5/16) is then placed on the power lug and secured down by a set screw. The cap nut is then reassembled with tightening torque 18 lb-in. 3 The other end of the power cable should be connected to circuit breaker (Motorola Solutions part number 40012006001) end which indicates "AUX" and then, to power supply on the other end which indicates "BAT", instead of connecting to power supply directly. 4 Repeat step 1 to step 3 to install the second power cable, if required. 5 If only one power cable is installed, it is recommended to cover the other side of the power cable gland with power cable gland seal with tightening torque 18 lb-in. 3.2.2 Installing Ground Cable Procedure:

1 Remove the cap nut of ground cable gland assembly, insert the ground cable through the cap nut, and then reassemble the cap nut. Use ground cable with AWG 14 only (recommended OD range of cable is 2 mm to 4 mm) that is able to withstand 5 A. The ground cables (A+) are not supplied. NOTICE: The ground is used to switch the relays, and not act as a ground to the actual device being controlled. 2 The loose end of the ground cable with cable strip length 7.94 mm (5/16) is then connected to a two-pin terminal block. Both pins on the terminal block are inter-connected and either pin can be used. The cap nut is then reassembled with tightening torque 7 lb-in. 82 Figure 83: Power and Ground Cable Glands MN005720A01-AB Chapter 3: Universal Relay Controller Installation Description Ground Cable Gland Power Cable Gland Figure 84: Cable Gland Assembly with Gasket No. 1 2 No. 1 2 3 4 5 Description Cable Gland Body Neoprene Seal Cap Nut Gasket, Cable Gland Counter Nut 3.2.3 Installing the Wires Procedure:

1 Assemble the wires into the lightbar gasket retainer and lightbar gasket. The URC can support lightbars through control wires with outer diameter ranging from 1.52 mm to 3.77 mm (0.06 in. to 0.148 in.), with wire gauges ranging from AWG 1220. 83 1232154 MN005720A01-AB Chapter 3: Universal Relay Controller Installation 2 Each individual loose wire (before stripping off the wire jacket) is inserted one at a time through the chassis. Ensure that the lightbar wire is straight before inserting the wire into the chassis. The radial gasket seals each of the wire individually. When a thick wire (for example AWG 14 wire or wire OD > 2.90 mm) is inserted through the chassis, there is potential tearing at the rubber gasket. Remove the rubber gasket residual. 3 Thin wires 2.5 mm and below should be dressed into the retention feature using a black stick. Thick wires above 2.5 mm should be routed above the retention feature. Strip off the wire until 7.94 mm (5/16 in.) after the wire is inserted into the URC, and install the wire into the respective lightbar terminal block. Figure 85: Wires Installation No. Description 1 2 3 Lightbar Wire with Diameter above 2.5 mm Lightbar Wire with Diameter 2.5 mm and below Wire Retention Feature Figure 86: Wire Installation with Black Stick 84 1231 MN005720A01-AB Chapter 3: Universal Relay Controller Installation Description Black Stick No. 1 inserted. 4 Cover the lightbar gasket retainers hole with seal, gasket, and ground cable gland, if no wire is 5 The lightbar gasket should be replaced at each reassembly of the wire. NOTICE: Use of other cable gauges except as recommended in this manual may result in water intrusion. Any reassembly of wire needs a new lightbar gasket replaced. If the current loading for one wire is higher than 12 A, the wires should be split before being assembled to the URC system. Wires kit (PMKN4109_) is provided to ease installation of the URC. Incorrect use of the wires kit, for example, improper connection at external loose end wires, may impact the robustness of the URC. 6 Remove the wires and gasket residual inside the URC after the wire installation, before closing the top housing of the URC. 3.2.4 Installing the O7/O9 to URC Cable The O7/O9 to URC cable (Motorola Solutions part number 3064153H02) can be assembled either before or after reassembling the top housing. Procedure:

1 Insert the RJ45 port of the cable into the RJ45 connector on the URC and turn the locking collar 90 to the right to ensure that it is locked properly. 2 Test if the cable is locked properly by trying to pull out the cable. Figure 87: O7/O9 to URC Cable Installation 85 MN005720A01-AB Chapter 4: Options and Accessories Installation Chapter 4 Options and Accessories Installation This chapter provides the options and accessories installation for dash mounted and remote mounted configurations. 4.1 Dash-Mount Accessory Installation For dash-mounted configurations, the accessories must be installed through the accessory connector assembly that is on the rear of the radio, next to the power connector. Motorola Solutions-approved accessories are supplied with male terminals crimped to a 20-gauge wire designed to fit the plug of the accessory connector assembly. Insert the male terminal into the accessory connector assembly in the appropriate location and connect the accessory connector assembly in the rear accessory port. Do not use other generic terminals in the plug. Generic terminals cause electrical intermittences and may damage the plug. 4.1.1 Dash-Mount Emergency Pushbutton or Footswitch Installation Mount the footswitch using the hardware that comes with the kit. Open the accessory cable connector housing; remove the jumper wire. Connect the emergency switch wires to pins 14 and 15 (see Figure 88: Emergency Switch Wiring Diagram on page 86). Close the connector housing; route the finished cable from the switch location to the control head location. NOTICE: The emergency footswitch should be attached with A+ unattached. A+ should be attached after successfully securing the screws in the connector. Figure 88: Emergency Switch Wiring Diagram 86 ACCESSORIESCONNECTORJ2 IN DASH MOUNTJ100 IN REMOTE MOUNTPIN 14PIN 15NOTE 1SPST NORMALLY CLOSEDEMERGENCY SWITCHNOTE 1: REMOVE BLACK JUMPER WIRE INSIDE ACCESSORY CONNECTOR HOUSING. INSERT WIRES FROM EMERGENCY SWITCHGNDEMER1781413202126 MN005720A01-AB Chapter 4: Options and Accessories Installation CAUTION: The radio is sold with correct accessory cables and jumpers to have emergency deactivated by default, regardless of the setting in Customer Programming Software (CPS). However, if cables are not used, or if jumpers are removed without replacing with an emergency accessory button/switch at one of the accessory ports, the radio powers up upon the application of A+. The display may not show an indication that the radio is on, and this condition can result in an incorrect operation of the radio and excessive current drain of the vehicles battery when the engine is off. 4.1.2 Dash-Mount Horn and Lights (External Alarms) Relays Prerequisites: For installations that use the horn/lights option, select a suitable location for mounting

(normally under the dash). Referring to Figure 89: Horn/Light Wiring Diagram on page 87, perform the following procedure:

Procedure:

1 Horn Relay Connect the relay contacts across the horn ring switch, typically found in the steering column. Open the accessory cable connector and connect the two control wires (male pins) into locations 18 and 24 of the connector. 2 Lights Relay Connect the relay across the head lamp ON/OFF switch, typically found in the steering column. Open the accessory cable connector and connect the two control wires (male pins) into locations 19 and 24 of the accessory connector. Figure 89: Horn/Light Wiring Diagram 4.2 Installing Remote-Mount Accessory Procedure:

1 Select an appropriate place to mount the option or accessory hardware. 2 Route the accessory-to-control head cables under floor coverings or behind panels so that the vehicle occupants do not snag or break the wires. 87 CONNECTACROSS HORNRING SWITCHCONNECTACROSS HEADLAMP SWITCHSPSTN.O.RELAY12V COIL12V COILVIP OUT 1SWB+VIP OUT 2SPSTN.O.RELAYACCESSORIESCONNECTORPIN 18PIN 24PIN 19SWB+VIP OUT 2(LIGHTS)VIP OUT 1(HORN)1781413202126 MN005720A01-AB Chapter 4: Options and Accessories Installation 3 Attach wires from the accessory to the appropriate wire on the VIP cable (see Table 14: VIP Output Connections on page 93 and Table 15: VIP Input Connections on page 94). CAUTION: The radio is sold with correct accessory cables and jumpers to have emergency de-activated by default, regardless of the setting in Customer Programming Software (CPS). However, if cables are not used, or if jumpers are removed without replacing with an emergency accessory button/switch at one of the accessory ports, the radio will power up upon the application of A+. The display may not show an indication that the radio is on, and this can result in an incorrect operation of the radio and excessive current drain of the vehicle battery when the engine is off. 4.2.1 Installing Emergency Pushbutton or Footswitch When and where to use:

Mount the switch using the hardware that comes with the kit. Connect the button/switch wires to a ground pin and the emergency pin, removing the default jumper wire in the rear accessory cable. The button/switch shorts the pins when inactive. When the button/switch is pressed, its contact opens, the emergency path is ungrounded and pulled-high inside the radio transceiver, and detected by the processor. If an emergency accessory is used at either (or both) J2 connector and J626 connectors, all jumper wires, shorting emergency to ground, must be removed so the button/switch press can be detected. In additional to removing the default jumper wires in accessory cables, remove a jumper part on the printed circuit board of the TIB, in order for the button/switch to be detected. On the TIB PCB (both mid power and high power use the same TIB), a 0 jumper is placed by default so that the radio does not go into emergency when no cable is attached at either J2 or J626 in remote mount configuration. This jumper part, JU344, must be removed if either or both J2 and J626 have any type of emergency cable and button/switch attached. Otherwise, the processor will never see emergency become un-grounded. Figure 90: Emergency Jumper Removal in Remote Mount Procedure:

1 Turn off power to the radio system. 2 Detach the TIB from the radio transceiver. 3 Detach the TIB flex. 4 Remove TIB PCB from the plastic housing using TORX T10 screwdriver. Refer to the disassembly procedure in the Basic Service Manual. 5 Locate JU344, See Figure 90: Emergency Jumper Removal in Remote Mount on page 88. 6 Remove JU344 from the TIB PCB using a soldering gun. Clean off excess solder. 88 MN005720A01-AB Chapter 4: Options and Accessories Installation 7 Reassemble the TIB following the Basic Service Manual procedure. Use 6-8 in-lbs torque on each screw. Remember to include the TIB O-ring gasket. 8 Reattach the TIB flex. 9 Reattach the TIB to the radio transceiver. 10 To secure the TIB to the radio transceiver, apply 6-8 in-lbs of torque to each screw . 4.2.2 Horn (External Alarm) Relay Installation Mount the horn relay in a suitable location (normally under the dash). Connect the relay contacts across the horn ring switch, typically found in the steering column. Connect the two control wires to a SW B+ pin and a VIP OUT pin on the VIP connector. 4.2.3 Lights (External Alarm) Relay Installation Mount the light relay in a suitable location (normally under the dash). Connect the relay contacts across the head lamp ON/OFF switch. Connect the two control wires to a SW B+ pin and a VIP OUT pin on the VIP connector. 4.2.4 Gunlock Installation The O7 or O9 control head can program up to three gunlocks through the programmable buttons. You can set the time for the momentary trigger using the time-out trigger button. Connect the relay contacts across the gunlock switch to install the gunlock. Connect the two control wires to a SW B+ pin and a VIP OUT pin on the VIP connector. Install a failsafe or redundant bypass switch for the gunlock. It is suggested to use a separate timer switch or a manual push-on button switch to activate the gunlock. Connect the switch from the supply to the gunlock directly, as shown in Figure 91: Gunlock Switch Redundancy Diagram on page 90. Place the manual button at a suitable and reachable location, yet not easily seen. 89 MN005720A01-AB Chapter 4: Options and Accessories Installation Figure 91: Gunlock Switch Redundancy Diagram 4.2.5 Horn-Ring Transfer Configure the Horn Relay for either Negative Contact or Positive Contact as shown in section 6.3 of the siren/PA manual (6881093C18). Program the designated VIP-OUT line for Horn-Ring Transfer and program the designated VIP-IN line for Horn-Ring. Figure 92: Siren/PA Horn-Ring Connections on page 91 shows wiring diagrams for connecting the Horn-Ring through a transfer relay for both negative and positive ground systems. Refer to the siren/PA manual (6881093C18) for more information. 90 Transceiverandcontrol headVIP CableVIP OUTGNDGNDGNDGunlockRedundancyWiringCar BatteryMomentary ortime-out bypassmanual switch Figure 92: Siren/PA Horn-Ring Connections MN005720A01-AB Chapter 4: Options and Accessories Installation 4.2.6 Record Audio Out Jack of Transmit and Receive Audio The use of Power Cable kit HKN6187_ (see Figure 65: HKN6187_ Power Cable with External Speaker Connector, Record Audio Output Jack (2.5 mm) and Earphone Jack (2.5 mm) on page 66) provides access to both the transmitted and the received audio speech. This audio can be recorded with a standard tape recorder using a 2.5 mm connector. The use of Power Cable kit HKN6187_ (see Figure 65: HKN6187_ Power Cable with External Speaker Connector, Record Audio Output Jack (2.5 mm) and Earphone Jack (2.5 mm) on page 66) allows the use of a standard earphone/headset instead of the external speaker. Once a cable is plugged into this 2.5 mm jack, the external speaker attached at the control head turns mute. 4.2.7 Earphone Jack 4.2.8 USB Data Cables It is recommended that the USB 1.5 m data cable HKN6163_ is used for both dash mount configurations (at J2 connector) and for remote mount configurations (at J100 connector) because the HKN6163_ has the emergency jumper present, which is necessary for correct dash mount configurations. For interfacing at the MMP port, use Cable HKN6184_ which is a USB device cable. The USB 4 m (15 ft.) data cable HKN6172_ is recommended for remote mount configurations only (at J100). If the customer intends to use the HKN6172_ for dash mount configurations (at J2), the cable 26-pin connector must be opened and an emergency jumper-wire placed across pins 14 and 15. Refer to Figure 88: Emergency Switch Wiring Diagram on page 86. 91 To Control Head VIPOutput Programmed forHorn-Ring TransferTo SW B+ atVIP ConnectorAny SPDT Relay with 12V Coiland Suitable Contact Ratings forVehicle InstallationNormally-OpenMomentaryContact PushbuttonTo Control Head VIPOutput Programmed forHorn-Ring TransferTo SW B+ atVIP ConnectorTo Control Head VIPInput Programmedfor Horn-RingTo DIG. GND atVIP ConnectorTo HornBreakHereHornRingUnder HoodHorn RelayBreakHereHornRing+ 12VN.C.N.C.COM.COM.N.O.N.O.To VIP Input Programmed for Horn-RingTo DIG. GND at VIP ConnectorPositive-Contact Horn-RingPushbutton ConnectionsNOTE: Locate Pushbuttonin a Location Convenient tothe Driver+ 12VHornTo Control Head VIPInput Programmedfor Horn-RingNegative-Contact Horn-Ring MN005720A01-AB Chapter 4: Options and Accessories Installation 4.2.9 RS232 Cables RS232 cables are not compatible with Customer Programming Software (CPS) radio reading or programming, but can be used for interfacing with RS232 accessories or RS232 computer programs. HKN6122_ is an RS232 serial COM port computer interface cable from J600 connector. The followings are the RS232 cables :

HKN6160_ is a 6 feet dash RS232 cable from J2 connector HKN6161_ is a 20 feet dash RS232 cable from J2 connector HKN6183_ is a 4 meter cable from MMP connector 4.3 Vehicle Interface Port Overview The Vehicle Interface Port (VIP) allows the control head to operate outside circuits and to receive inputs from outside the control head. There are three VIP outputs which are used for relay control. There are also three VIP inputs which accept inputs from switches (remote mount only). Figure 93: Remote Control Head Pinouts Figure 94: HKN6196_ VIP Connector Detail No. 1 Description Yellow Ring 4.3.1 VIP Output Connections 92 The VIP output pins are on the back of the control head (J100 and J400), or the rear accessory port

(J2), as shown in Wiring Diagrams on page 35, Figure 99: Rear Accessory Connector Audio J400-1 RED SWB +J400-2 GREEN GNDJ400-3 - NO PINJ400-4 - "VIP" detect: GPIO=HIGHJ400-5 BLUE VIP_OUT_1 J400-6 YELLOW VIP_OUT_2J400-7 BLACK VIP_OUT_3J400-8 WHITE VIP_IN_1 (VIP_IN GPIO)J400-9 ORANGE VIP_IN_2 (VIP_IN GPIO)J400-10 VIOLET VIP_IN_3 RadioPinNumberVIP Cable(HKN6196_)Wire ColorFunctionVIP CONNECTOR PIN-OUTJ4001 MN005720A01-AB Chapter 4: Options and Accessories Installation Configuration on page 97 and Figure 100: Rear Accessory Connector Data Configuration on page 98, respectively. Use these connections to wire control relays. One end of the relay should connect to switched B+

voltage, while the other side connects to a software controlled ON/OFF switch inside the control head. The relay can be normally on or normally off depending on the configuration of the VIP outputs. There are three VIP output connections, as follows:

Table 14: VIP Output Connections VIP OUT NUMBER J400 SW B+

Pin Num-

ber Red 1 Red 1 Red 1 On/Off Switched Pin Num-

ber 5 (Blue) 6 (Yellow) 7 (Black) J2 SW B+

Pin Num-

ber 24 24 NA On/Off Switched Pin Num-

ber 18 19 NA J100 SW B+

Pin Num-

ber 24 24 NA On/Off Switched Pin Num-

ber 18 19 NA 1 2 3 The function of these VIP outputs can be field programmed in the control head. Typical applications for VIP outputs are external horn/lights alarm and horn ring transfer relay control. For further information on VIP outputs, see the control head programming manual. VIP OUT 1 and VIP OUT 2 can be accessed from either J100 or J400 connectors to allow a previously wired VIP OUT at J2 to move easily to J100. However, when any cable is inserted into J400, J100 VIP OUTs are disabled. When installing relays to the VIP OUT lines, a diode is necessary to prevent damage to the transistor or MOSFET, due to back EMF when the field collapses on the relay coil. Some vendor relays already come with this diode built-in, and other relays require the customer to install it. Figure 95: Relay Coil on page 93 shows the proper placement of the diode across the relay coil. The transistor or MOSFET is located inside the radio or the D.E.K. box. Figure 95: Relay Coil NOTICE: See Replacement Parts Ordering on page 134 to order relay for your VIP OUT applications. Example relay hardware: TLN4533_ (relay without internal diode), HLN6969_

(relay with internal back EMF protection diode), and HKN4258_ (relay wiring cable). 93 N.C.N.O.RelayGDSVIPoutSW B+Note:To 'activate' a VIPOUT, you have to ground the VIPOUT, such that the current now flows thru the relay coil to GND through a MOSFET inside the radio or control head, which causes the relay wiper to toggle. The MOSFET of a VIPOUT should never be used to directly drive an accessory. The MOSFET should be used to control an external relay. ProtectionDiode MN005720A01-AB Chapter 4: Options and Accessories Installation 4.3.2 VIP Input Connections The VIP input pins are only available on the back of the control head (remote mount). These connections control inputs from switches. One side of the switch connects to ground while the other side connects to a buffered input on the control head. The switch can be normally closed (NC) or normally open (NO) depending on the configuration of the VIP inputs. The following are the three VIP input connections:

Table 15: VIP Input Connections VIP IN NUMBER J400 J2 Ground Pin Number On/Off Switch-

ed Pin Number Ground Pin Number On/Off Switch-

ed Pin Number 2 (green) 2 (green) 2 (green) 8 (white) 9 (orange) 10 (violet) NA NA NA NA NA NA NOTICE: Remote Mount requires the VIP cable to be attached to J400. MCH installations require the VIP inputs to be connected to the head assigned ID #1. See Setting the Initial Control Head ID on page 58 for further information. CAUTION: ASTRO mobile radios equipped with the following features are able to transmit automatically, even if the radio is turned off:

Automatic Vehicle Location Other Special Data Products All ASTRO mobile radios have accessory connector pins 14 and 15 connected together to allow the radio to power down. Opening this connection by removing the accessory connector, or otherwise failing to maintain a normally closed path, could, if left unchecked, drain the vehicle battery, and possibly cause transmissions to occur. 4.4 Compatibility of Emergency when Attaching a Siren Procedure:

1 When using emergency footswitch or pushbutton with siren/PA configuration, REMOVE pin 8

(emergency) from the siren connector of the HKN4363_ siren cable. Figure 96: Field adjustment for Emergency Operation with Siren Accessory 1 2 3 94 1 MN005720A01-AB Chapter 4: Options and Accessories Installation No. 1 Description Siren Cable 2 Remove the knob from the siren/PA cable connector. 3 Remove all four screws from the connector in the siren/PA cable. 4 Open the connector cap and locate pin 8. 5 Using the contact removal tool (6684690C02), remove pin 8 from the connector. 6 Put the connector cap in place and proceed to reinstall the four screws and the knob. Figure 97: Location for Pin 8 4.5 Accessory Connector Assembly Details (P2) The APX mobile accessory connector assembly is mounted on the right rear of the radio, opposite the antenna and next to the power connector. It is fastened to the radio via jackscrews and held together by the two cover screws. It is a multi-

functional connector that allows for many different types of adaptations. All approved accessory wires are securely strain-relieved through the exiting slots at the back of the accessory connector assembly. The terminations that are supplied with all accessories are fully engaged and locked into the plug connector (6680163F01). They can also be detached for service with the assistance of a terminal removal tool. The accessory connector assembly can be serviced multiple times for future installation upgrades. The accessory connector assembly, supplied with every APX mobile dash-mounted radio, is equipped with a 26-pin plug assembly, two covers, two jackscrews, two cover screws, one emergency jumper, one ignition sense cable assembly, and one speaker pigtail. The jumper is provided to complete the circuit for emergency mode. If this circuit becomes open, the radio is set to emergency mode. 3980034F05 is the crimping pin part number for use with any wires used inside the accessory cable connector. 4.5.1 Disassembly and Assembly This section provides the detailed disassembly and reassembly information. 95 123 4567 89AB29303132 3334 3536 37232425261617181910111213 1415 20212227281 MN005720A01-AB Chapter 4: Options and Accessories Installation 4.5.1.1 Disassembly Procedure:

1 Disconnect the negative terminal from the vehicle battery. Make sure that the battery cable is secured such that it cannot power the vehicle electrical system. 2 Unscrew both jackscrews completely. 3 Pull the accessory connector assembly out from the radio. 4 Loosen both cover screws, but do not remove them completely. 5 Pull the jackscrews away from the plug and hold them back. 6 Pry apart the accessory connector assembly covers. 7 Attach any new wire to its proper location by pushing in the male terminal. When you hear a pop, the wire is engaged. To verify that the wire is engaged, tug gently on the wire and be sure that it does not come out. To avoid severe damage to the plug, do not overload the wire. 4.5.1.2 Assembly Procedure:

1 Place the plug-in one cover. Be sure that the flange of the plug is in the slot of the cover. See Figure 98: Exploded View of Accessory Connector Assembly (HLN6863_) on page 96. 2 Push the jackscrew through the plug to hold it in. 3 Position each wire across the strain-relief features in the cover. Avoid damaging loads on the plug by allowing some slack in each wire in the accessory connector wire chamber. 4 Place the second cover onto the plug. Be sure that the flange is protruding through both covers. Figure 98: Exploded View of Accessory Connector Assembly (HLN6863_) 96 MN005720A01-AB Chapter 4: Options and Accessories Installation 5 Squeeze the covers together bending the wires in the strain-relief features. You may need a pair of pliers to seat the assembly covers. 6 Once the covers are fully seated, fasten them with the cover screws. Tighten the screws firmly but do not over-tighten them. Be sure that none of the wires are pinched. 7 Reattach the accessory connector assembly to the back of the radio and fasten it by finger-tightening the jackscrews to prevent any loosening. NOTICE: See Enhanced Single Band Mobile Radio Basic Service Manual for detailed descriptions of these pins and other connectors located in the mobile radio. 4.5.2 Adapter Cable Table 16: Adapter Cable Part Number HKN6158_ HKN6159_ If you are planning on installing a mobile radio as a replacement for an ASTRO Spectra radio, the following adapter cables are available:

Description Cable, Audio Adapter Kit Cable, Data Adapter Kit NOTICE: The adapter cables can only be connected to J2 in the rear of the transceiver. Use the HKN6158_ audio adapter kit cable if your vehicle was formerly wired for an ASTRO Spectra or ASTRO Spectra Plus radio, and use the rear cable pins as shown in the following figure. Figure 99: Rear Accessory Connector Audio Configuration No. Description 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 GND SPKR LO-

SPKR HI+

IGNITION SWB+

VIP OUT 2 EMER 97 543219101112131415768123456789810111288 MN005720A01-AB Chapter 4: Options and Accessories Installation No. Description N.C. MIC HI PTT VIP OUT 1 DISC. AUD Use the HKN6159_ data adapter kit cable if your vehicle was formerly wired for an ASTRO Spectra or ASTRO Spectra Plus radio, and used the rear cable pins as shown in the following figure. Figure 100: Rear Accessory Connector Data Configuration 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 98 No. Description DIG GND SPKR LO-

SPKR HI+

IGNITION SWB+

VIP OUT 2 EMER CTS-ASTRO RTS_DCE RTS- ASTRO CTS_DCE BUS+

TX-ASTRO RX_DCE VIP OUT 1 RX-ASTRO RX_DCE BUS-

BUSY You must attach the correct adapter. Installing the wrong adapter may damage the data communication circuitry inside your radio. If you are unsure of the pinout of your former wiring harness, consult your ASTRO radio installation technician. 543219101112131415768123456789101112131415 MN005720A01-AB Chapter 4: Options and Accessories Installation 4.6 Memory and Three-Day Secure Key Retention Option For the installation or removal of the Memory or 3-Day Secure Key Retention Options

(MHLN6999_ and MHLN7000_), see the Enhanced Single Band Mobile Radio Basic Service Manual. NOTICE: The Three-Day Secure Key Retention Option is not applicable for APX 2500/APX 4500/APX 1500 Enhanced Single Band Mobile Radio. 99 MN005720A01-AB Chapter 5: Motorcycle Radio Installation Chapter 5 Motorcycle Radio Installation This chapter covers the motorcycle radio installation. The motorcycle radio installation is not applicable for APX 4500/APX 1500 radios and O9 control heads. 5.1 Motorcycle Radio Description The motorcycle model includes all the same components in the standard radio, with the exceptions listed in the model charts in the Enhanced Single Band Mobile Radio Basic Service Manual

(MN005718A01). 5.1.1 Transceiver Enclosure The transceiver is mounted in the weather-resistant enclosure that consists of a bottom housing and a hinged top cover. The top cover has a locking latch that requires a key to open. The enclosure is mounted above the rear motorcycle wheel, oriented so that the lock is forward and the hinged cover opens toward the rear of the motorcycle. The bottom housing has a grommeted hole for cable entry and weep holes to permit water drainage. The enclosure is mounted on the motorcycle with a universal mounting plate and shock and vibration isolators. A large, braided ground-strap (installed between the mounting plate bolts and the motorcycle frame) grounds the transceiver. 5.1.2 Control/Display Unit All radio functions, except push-to-talk (PTT), are activated from the weather-resistant control head. The control head and the external speaker are mounted for easy access near the center of the handlebars. The control head is positioned for unobstructed viewing, and it may be tilted on the horizontal axis for ease of viewing. The microphone cable port on the front of the control head is plugged and is not used. 5.1.3 Control Head Cable The control-head cable connects the control head to the transceiver. The cable is routed along the motorcycle frame and has weather-resistant connections at both ends. Excess cable is coiled under the transceiver inside the weather-resistant enclosure. Each end of the cable is strain-relieved with jackscrews at the control head and the transceiver. The cable is shielded to reduce the effects of radio frequency interference and ignition sense noise. 5.1.4 Microphone 100 A weather-resistant, palm microphone, and coiled cord plug into a pigtail connector on the control cable. The microphone attaches to a hang-up bracket located within easy reach of the motorcycle rider. The coiled cord is long enough to be operated by someone standing next to the motorcycle, yet short enough to not interfere with the motorcycle steering or operation. MN005720A01-AB Chapter 5: Motorcycle Radio Installation A 3.2-Ohm, 10-watt-rated-audio-power, external speaker is mounted on the front of the motorcycle. The speaker cable is routed along the motorcycle frame to the transceiver rear accessory connector. A sealed, weather-resistant, speaker-muting (toggle) switch is mounted on top of the speaker. The external speaker connects to the rear accessory connector of the transceiver. 5.1.5 External Speaker 5.1.6 Headset Capability The motorcycle radio is compatible with headset accessories that would provide hands-free operation of the radio. Motorola Solutions does not manufacture headset equipment, but provides the interconnection for headset equipment with the motorcycle radio. Aftermarket headset equipment is available through Motorola Solutions (see Replacement Parts Ordering on page 134). CAUTION: To avoid loud audio, refer to the CPS help menu for audio settings if the Motorola Solutions mobile radio is used with any motorcycle helmet headset. 5.1.7 Antenna The antennas are mounted on top of the transceiver weather-resistant enclosure. The enclosure metal lining acts as the antenna ground plane. 5.1.8 Ignition Sense (ACC) Wire The ignition sense wire connects to the motorcycle fuse box and is routed along the motorcycle frame to the transceiver rear accessory connector. The radio is wired so that transmission is inhibited if the motorcycle ignition sense switch is off. If the PTT switch is pressed with the ignition sense off, a low-frequency tone sounds. The receiver is controlled by the control head on/off switch. 5.2 Installation Overview All mobile radios are tested and inspected before shipment. It is suggested that the transmitter frequency, deviation, and power output be checked at the time of installation. It is the license holder's responsibility to ensure that the operating parameters of his station comply with applicable laws governing radio communications equipment. For tests and alignment procedures, refer to the appropriate service manual (refer to Related Publications on page 16). Generally, the installation of the motorcycle radio takes place in the following parts:

Mounting the universal mounting plate and related hardware at the rear of the motorcycle. Mounting the control head, speaker, microphone, and related hardware forward on the motorcycle. Routing the power cable, control-head cable, speaker cable, and ignition sense cable to the weather-resistant enclosure. 101 MN005720A01-AB Chapter 5: Motorcycle Radio Installation Mounting the weather-resistant enclosure and radio chassis, and connecting the cables. Mounting the antennas to the weather-resistant enclosure. A universal mounting plate, supplied by Motorola Solutions, is first mounted to either a motorcycle carrier at the rear of the motorcycle or to the rear frame of the motorcycle itself. The mounting procedures for the universal mounting plate vary from motorcycle to motorcycle. Therefore, the procedures given in this manual for installing the mounting plate may not specifically apply, but are provided for guidance. The control head, speaker, and microphone are mounted forward on the motorcycle, on or near the steering column. There are several possible mounting configurations which use a combination of Motorola Solutions and customer-built brackets. These configurations are outlined in this manual. Because of the large number of motorcycle makes and models in existence, the customer-built brackets are necessary to tailor the mounting of the Motorola Solutions equipment to the particular motorcycle being used. Suggestions for customer-built brackets are given in this manual. The power cable, control-head cable, speaker cable, and ignition sense cable are routed to the weather-resistant enclosure position. The enclosure and the radio chassis are then mounted. Special care is required when connecting cables to the radio equipment within the enclosure. 5.2.1 Important Installation Hints Consider the following when mounting the radio components:

Excess lengths of control-head, power, ignition sense, and speaker cables must be routed in the enclosure as shown in Figure 113: Installing Cables on page 119. All components must be mounted securely in order to withstand the constant and sometimes severe vibration experienced on a motorcycle. No cantilever action, which could cause severe vibration, should be generated in the mounting The control head and microphone must be placed for ease of accessibility by the motorcycle Forward components (control head, microphone, and speaker) should not interfere with visual or physical access to controls and instruments. Forward components should not interfere with the handling of the motorcycle. Cabling between the control head and the radio chassis should be run to minimize interference with hardware. operator. operator movements. operator. The weather-resistant enclosure should be placed to avoid any interference with the motorcycle Electrical continuity must be present through the enclosure shock mounts to the motorcycle frame for proper electrical and RF grounding. The antenna is designed for mounting on the top of the weather-resistant enclosure. Only the supplied microphone mounting clip should be used to ensure secure mounting of the microphone. This clip has a very strong spring to ensure positive retention of the microphone over rough terrain. Also, there must be electrical continuity from this clip to the motorcycle frame for DC grounding. Direct access to the microphone should be provided from both sides of the motorcycle. Sufficient slack in the microphone coiled cord should be allowed so as not to impede steering. Mounting hardware must be stainless steel to prevent corrosion. 102 MN005720A01-AB Chapter 5: Motorcycle Radio Installation If an extra length of cable is used to extend the microphone, ensure that the added capacitance does not interfere with the operation of the radio. A suitable covering should be applied to the DB-9 receptacle when the water resistant microphone

(HMN1079B) is not connected. 5.2.2 Parts Identification The following installation procedures refer to Figure 101: Universal Mounting Plate Installation (Part of Radio Enclosure Kit) on page 104 through Figure 114: Installing the Transceiver on page 121. Detailed descriptions of the mounting hardware used in each procedure are provided in parts lists section of the Enhanced Single Band Mobile Radio Basic Service Manual. The parts that are supplied by Motorola Solutions are contained in one of the following kits:

Motorcycle Weather-Resistant Microphone Motorcycle Weather-Resistant Speaker with Mute Switch Motorcycle Hardware Kit SECURENET or Motorcycle Hardware Kit Motorcycle Power Cable Kit Motorcycle Mounting Kit Weather-Resistant Enclosure (Black) Antenna 5.2.3 Order of Installation Prerequisites:

Before starting the installation, familiarize yourself with the mounting hardware (see Figure 101:

Universal Mounting Plate Installation (Part of Radio Enclosure Kit) on page 104 through Figure 114:

Installing the Transceiver on page 121). Perform the installation procedures in the order that follows. Procedure:

1 Install the universal mounting plate on the motorcycle. 2 Install the control head and speaker. 3 Install the microphone hang-up clip. 4 Install antenna base and cable onto enclosure. 5 Install the cables. 6 Install the weather-resistant enclosure on the universal mounting plate. 7 Route the cables inside the weather-resistant enclosure. 8 Install the transceiver in the weather-resistant enclosure. 9 Install the antennas on the enclosure. 5.3 Universal Mounting Plate The universal mounting plate, supplied with the motorcycle radio, must be mounted on the motorcycle first. It provides the base for the weather-resistant enclosure to be mounted. The method used for mounting the plate depends on the make and model of the motorcycle and whether the plate is mounted to a carrier or to the motorcycle chassis. After the plate has been 103 MN005720A01-AB Chapter 5: Motorcycle Radio Installation securely mounted to the motorcycle, mounting the weather-resistant enclosure onto the plate is straightforward. Figure 101: Universal Mounting Plate Installation (Part of Radio Enclosure Kit) on page 104 illustrates the universal mounting plate mounted to a motorcycle carrier. Since there are so many makes and models of motorcycles and motorcycle carriers, it is impossible to give specific step-by-step instructions for mounting the universal mounting plate. However, noting the following considerations aids in the installation procedure. A minimum of holes are pre-drilled into this plate as supplied. Mounting holes must be drilled as required for the particular motorcycle on which the plate is being mounted. The universal mounting plate should be mounted on the motorcycle in such a manner that the later mounting of the weather-resistant enclosure does not interfere with the motorcycle seat back, with any other obstacles, or with the motorcycle operator. The enclosure may be temporarily bolted to the universal mounting plate and the unit positioned on the motorcycle to ensure that the criteria are met. To ensure a good grounding path from the universal mounting plate to the motorcycle carrier or frame, stainless steel lock washers must be used with the mounting hardware in two areas to score through the paint on the universal mounting plate and on the carrier or frame. It provides good electrical contact with the underside of the motorcycle carrier or motorcycle frame. Figure 101: Universal Mounting Plate Installation (Part of Radio Enclosure Kit) 5.3.1 Installing the Universal Mounting Plate Follow the procedure to mount the universal mounting plate to the motorcycle. Procedure:

1 Determine the mounting position for the mounting plate. 2 Determine whether stainless steel spacers are required for clearance in mounting the plate. 3 Drill four 9/32-inch holes in the mounting plate and the corresponding motorcycle carrier or chassis for mounting the plate. 4 Attach the universal mounting plate to the motorcycle using four machine screws, eight lock washers, and four nuts. Tighten screws securely. The lock washers must cut through the paint on the plate and motorcycle carrier or frame to ensure a good ground path. 5.4 Speaker and Control Head Installation NOTICE: To disable the internal speaker of the O2 Control Head, refer to Internal Speaker Disassembly on page 73. 104 UNIVERSALMOUNTING PLATE64-83673F02SCREW03-00001908LOCKWASHER04-00139951LOCKWASHER04-00139951NUT02-00009644CARRIER MN005720A01-AB Chapter 5: Motorcycle Radio Installation The control head mounting location and configuration is determined largely by the make and model of motorcycle. Two different mounting configurations are described below. One involves mounting the speaker and control head together as a unit using the combination speaker/control-head bracket

(shown in Figure 103: Handlebar Installation with Speaker and Control Head Mounted Together on page 106) supplied by Motorola Solutions. Alternately, the control head may be mounted by itself using a smaller control-head bracket supplied by Motorola Solutions. In this case, the speaker is mounted elsewhere. This section outlines installation procedures for each configuration mentioned above. The customer (or installer) is in the best position to determine the most appropriate mounting configuration for the control head and speaker based on the particular motorcycle on which the equipment is to be mounted. CAUTION: When determining its location, position the control head so that it is clearly visible and within easy reach of the motorcycle operator. Figure 102: Motorcycle Control Head Cabling (3075217A01) 5.4.1 Handlebar Installation with Speaker and Control Head Mounted Together Figure 103: Handlebar Installation with Speaker and Control Head Mounted Together on page 106 illustrates the combination of speaker/control head bracket. This combination bracket is used only when the control head and speaker are mounted as a unit. Handlebar-mounting bracket which may be required if the combination speaker/control-head bracket cannot be easily mounted to the motorcycle. In this case, the handlebar-mounting bracket is mounted to the motorcycle, and the combination bracket is then mounted to the handlebar-mounting bracket. 105 MN005720A01-AB Chapter 5: Motorcycle Radio Installation Figure 103: Handlebar Installation with Speaker and Control Head Mounted Together Provision has been made on the combination speaker/control-head bracket for mounting the microphone hang-up clip. If that mounting is desired, the hang-up clip must be attached to the bracket before installing the control head and speaker. See Microphone Hang-Up Clip on page 75 for the hang-

up clip procedure. 5.4.1.1 Installing Handlebar with Speaker and Control Head Mounted Together Follow the procedure to install the speaker and control head. Procedure:

1 Determine the location to mount the speaker/control head. Consider how the speaker/control-

head bracket may be mounted, and whether a handlebar-mounting bracket is needed. Select a location that is not only mechanically convenient, but is located for ease of operation. NOTICE: The angle at which the handlebar-mounting bracket or the speaker/control-

head bracket is mounted to the motorcycle determines the firing angle of the speaker. 2 If the handlebar-mounting bracket is needed, install it first. 3 Mount the speaker/control-head bracket, either directly to the motorcycle, or, if used, to the handlebar-mounting bracket, using four stainless-steel machine screws, lock washers, and nuts. 4 Mount the 9-pin D-connector end of the motorcycle control-head cable to the speaker/control head bracket, using two machine screws, flat washers, and nuts. (Cable routing directions appear later in this section.) 5 Mount the speaker on the speaker/control-head bracket, using two machine screws and lock washers. Torque these screws to 20 in-lbs. 6 Attach the control-head cable to the control head and tighten the locking screws on the connector. This connection must be made before you mount the control head in the bracket.

(Cable routing directions appear later in this section.) 7 Mount the control head to the bracket, using two machine screws, lock washers, and flat washers. 8 Adjust the control head viewing angle by loosening its mounting screws and rotating the control head to the desired angle. Re-tighten the screws to 20 in-lbs torque. 106 MN005720A01-AB Chapter 5: Motorcycle Radio Installation 5.4.2 Fuel Tank Console Installation with Speaker and Control Head Mounted Together Some motorcycles provide a console for mounting radio equipment. This console is attached to the top of the fuel tank. With the use of a mounting bracket, screws, nuts, and lock washers, the combination speaker/control-head bracket can be mounted to this console. Figure 104: Fuel Tank Console Installation with Speaker and Control Head Mounted Together on page 107 illustrates this type of mounting. The console attachment screws must be removed, and the console must be lifted slightly from the fuel tank to gain access to attach mounting hardware, and to route cables later. In this installation, the microphone (mic), mic hang-up bracket, and mic extension bracket interfere with handlebar travel. Installation using this method is the same as in Installing Handlebar with Speaker and Control Head Mounted Together on page 106. Figure 104: Fuel Tank Console Installation with Speaker and Control Head Mounted Together 107 MN005720A01-AB Chapter 5: Motorcycle Radio Installation 5.4.3 Handlebar Installation with Speaker and Control Head Mounted Separately It may be necessary to use the smaller control head bracket (part number 0780127N02) and mount the speaker and microphone hang-up clip in another location on the motorcycle. Temporarily fasten the control-head end of the control-head cable to the control head. Also, fasten the control head to its bracket before installing the control head using the described bracket. Motorola Solutions-supplied spacers and mic-cable bracket are required to mount the control head to the handlebar. This mic-cable bracket has holes to mount the microphone-cable connector. Figure 105: Handlebar Installation with Speaker and Control Head Mounted Separately 108 MN005720A01-AB Chapter 5: Motorcycle Radio Installation 5.4.3.1 Installing Handlebar with Speaker and Control Head Mounted Separately Follow the procedure when mounting the smaller control-head bracket. Procedure:

1 Determine the location to mount the control head. Choose a location that is not only mechanically convenient, but is located for ease of operation. 2 Securely mount the Motorola Solutions-supplied spacers, mic-cable bracket, and small control-

head bracket to the handlebars. 3 Mount the 9-pin D-connector end of the motorcycle control-head cable to the mic-cable bracket, using two machine screws, flat washers, and nuts. Refer to Cable Routing on page 115 for Cable routing directions. 4 Attach the control-head end of the cable to the control head and tighten the locking screws on the connector. wing screws and tighten firmly. 5 Mount the control head to the small control-head bracket, at the proper viewing angle, using two 5.4.4 Fuel Tank Console Installation with Speaker and Control Head Mounted Separately The control head may be mounted to the fuel tank console using the smaller control-head bracket and spacers/hardware. In this configuration, the microphone cable connector may be attached directly to the console, eliminating the need for a custom bracket. 109 MN005720A01-AB Chapter 5: Motorcycle Radio Installation Figure 106: Fuel Tank Console Installation with Speaker and Control Head Mounted Separately 110 MN005720A01-AB Chapter 5: Motorcycle Radio Installation Installation is the same as detailed in Fuel Tank Console Installation with Speaker and Control Head Mounted Together on page 107 and Installing Handlebar with Speaker and Control Head Mounted Separately on page 109. 5.5 Installing the Speaker Follow the procedure when the speaker is mounted separately from the control head. When and where to use: The speaker bracket supplied with the speaker may be used alone if a suitable location can be found, or if necessary, a customer-supplied bracket may be fabricated for mounting the speaker. NOTICE: To disable the internal speaker of the O2 Control Head, please refer to Internal Speaker Disassembly on page 73. Procedure:

supplied bracket. 1 Determine the location to mount the speaker and whether there is a requirement for a customer-

2 Fabricate a bracket if required. Use the Motorola Solutions-supplied speaker bracket as a template for drilling mounting holes. Drill holes in the fabricated bracket for mounting to the motorcycle. 3 Mount the fabricated bracket to the motorcycle chassis. 4 Mount the Motorola Solutions-supplied bracket to the fabricated bracket using two machine screws, flat washers, lock washers, and nuts. 5 Mount the speaker to the speaker bracket using two wing screws. Refer to Cable Routing on page 115 for Cable routing directions. 5.6 Microphone Hang-Up Clip Installation Install the hang-up clip either on the supplied microphone extension bracket or on the side of the speaker/control head bracket. Both methods are shown in Figure 103: Handlebar Installation with Speaker and Control Head Mounted Together on page 106. Determine the mounting location and install as described in the following paragraphs. NOTICE: Wherever the hang-up clip is mounted, it must be DC grounded for proper operation. After mounting the clip, be sure there is electrical continuity between the clip and the motorcycle chassis. 5.6.1 Extension Bracket Mounting Follow the procedure to mount the clip facing the operator. Procedure:

1 Attach the bracket to the speaker/control-head bracket using two machine screws, four lock washers, and two nuts as shown in Figure 103: Handlebar Installation with Speaker and Control Head Mounted Together on page 106. 2 Torque nuts to 20 in-lbs torque. 3 Fasten the hang-up clip to the extension bracket using two machine screws, lock washers, and nuts as shown in Figure 103: Handlebar Installation with Speaker and Control Head Mounted Together on page 106. 111 MN005720A01-AB Chapter 5: Motorcycle Radio Installation 4 Torque nuts to 20 in-lbs torque. 5.6.2 Speaker/Control Head Bracket Side Mounting Follow the procedure for the speaker/control head bracket side mounting. Procedure:

1 Attach the hang-up clip to the left side of the speaker/control-head bracket using two machine screws, lock washers, and nuts as shown in Figure 103: Handlebar Installation with Speaker and Control Head Mounted Together on page 106. 2 Torque nuts to 20 in-lbs. torque. 5.6.3 Other Hang-Up Clip Mounting A customer-supplied bracket may be used to mount the microphone hang-up clip in another location. When and where to use:

Suggested locations include the handlebars, fuel-tank console, or any location which provides easy access to the microphone without blocking controls and indicators and without interfering with motorcycle handling. See Figure 104: Fuel Tank Console Installation with Speaker and Control Head Mounted Together on page 107, Figure 105: Handlebar Installation with Speaker and Control Head Mounted Separately on page 108, and Figure 106: Fuel Tank Console Installation with Speaker and Control Head Mounted Separately on page 110 for alternative microphone hang-up clip mounting methods. Procedure:

1 Fabricate a bracket, then secure it to the motorcycle. 2 Use two machine screws, lock washers, and nuts to secure the hang-up clip to the customer-

supplied bracket. Ensure that the microphone clip is DC grounded to the motorcycle chassis (a grounding lug and strap are provided in the hang-up clip kit for this purpose) this is essential for proper radio operation. 5.7 Installing Antenna Base and Cables Prerequisites:

The GPS antenna assembly must be done after the removal of the metal liner but before reinstalling the radio liner. Procedure:

1 Open the top cover of the weather-resistant enclosure. 2 Uninstall the metal liner that is shipped attached to the weather-resistant enclosure. This liner has one depressed area at the top of the enclosure liner just toward the rear of the enclosure. This metal liner is not used with Enhanced Single Band Mobile Radio. 3 Place the metal liner with two round, depressed areas toward the enclosure hinge and 5/8-inch hole near the front of the housing, inside the top cover, and align the six slots in the metal liner with the screw holes in the top housing. 4 The metal liner of the enclosure top cover acts as a ground plane for the antenna. 5 Locate the two round, depressed areas about 3 inches in diameter in the metal liner near the enclosure hinge. These areas are either Band 1 or Band 2 depending on the antenna port they 112 MN005720A01-AB Chapter 5: Motorcycle Radio Installation align to. Refer to band markings on radio for the proper antenna port location. For the GPS antenna, use the 5/8-inch hole near the front of the housing near the lock. Figure 107: Location of Antenna Port No. Description Top Cover for Radios GPS/Wi-Fi Antenna Antenna Port Enhanced Single Band Mobile Radio 1 2 3 4 5 6 These holes in the metal liner is used as a template to mark the position of the holes to be drilled at the top cover. The following guidelines provide the available options. Single Band Attached your single band antenna in the appropriate antenna position. GPS/Wi-Fi Mark a hole in the GPS/Wi-Fi Antenna position. Figure 108: Enhanced Single Band Mobile Radio Antenna Band Identification No. 1 2 3 Description Antenna Port GPS Antenna Port Wi-Fi Antenna Port 7 Remove the metal liner from the top cover. 8 For antenna positions, use the Motorola Solutions RPX-4378A Hole-Cutting Saw or equivalent, and carefully drill a 3/4-inch hole at the marked location from the inside of the cover until the saw bottoms out. For the GPS/Wi-Fi, carefully drill a 1 1/16-inch hole at the marked location from the inside of the cover until the saw bottoms out. The saw should have a clean and neat circle to ensure good contact between the antenna and the housing. 113 21345123

 

 

MN005720A01-AB Chapter 5: Motorcycle Radio Installation IMPORTANT: For proper seating of the antennas, deburr and scrape any foreign matter from both sides of the hole, being careful not to mar the finish of the shell. 9 Clean the mounting surface around the hole to remove dirt and wax. 10 Refer to the Motorcycle GPS Instruction Manual for further installation instruction for the GPS. GPS must be mounted before the metal liner is installed. 11 Re-install the metal liner with the cable clamps provided in the weather-resistant housing. If installing GPS, the GPS coaxial cable must be fed through the hole in the metal liner before the liner can be placed onto the housing. Then route the GPS Coaxial Cable through the cable clamps before tightening the hex screws. CAUTION: Be sure to observe the correct routing of the antenna cable. Failure to do so can damage the cable. Figure 109: Routing the Coaxial Cable for GPS/Wi-Fi No. 1 2 3 Description Cable Clamp Coaxial Cable Connector 12 To attach the 700/800, VHF, or UHF antenna base, refer to the Antenna Installation Manual. 13 Route the coaxial cable for the 700/800, VHF, or UHF antenna through the cable clamps. Figure 110: Routing the Coaxial Cable for Antenna 114 123123 MN005720A01-AB Chapter 5: Motorcycle Radio Installation No. 1 2 3 Description Cable Clamp Coaxial Cable Attach to Antenna Connector on Radio 14 After routing the cable, allow enough of the cable to reach the radio antenna connector and cut off any excess length of the cable. 15 To install the connector, refer to the Antenna Installation Manual. 5.8 Installing the Antenna Procedure:

1 Connect the appropriate antenna connectors to the antenna receptacles on the radio. Tighten the coupling until fully engaged. IMPORTANT: Antenna Placement and Cable Routing as described inside the Antenna Installation Manual is not applicable for the APX radio series. 5.9 Cable Routing Five cables must be installed to interconnect the components of the radio system as shown in the following figure. The antenna cable is routed away from the other cables inside the enclosure hinged cover (see Installing Antenna Base and Cables on page 112). The four remaining cables, routed along the motorcycle frame, are described in the following paragraphs. NOTICE: Antenna Hole Placement and Cable Routing information in the Antenna Installation Manual is not applicable to the APX series. Removal of the fuel tank and seat from the motorcycle facilitates routing the cables along the frame. Motorcycles with consoles attached to fuel tanks require routing cables between console and fuel tank. In this case the tank is not removed. 115 MN005720A01-AB Chapter 5: Motorcycle Radio Installation Figure 111: Cable Routing No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 116 Description Speaker Cable Speaker / Control Head Control Head Cable Microphone Ignition Cable Chassis Ground Fused Power Cable Speaker Cable Antenna Cable Accessory Cable Power Cable Control Head Cable Battery Fuse Block 4578632114131211109 MN005720A01-AB Chapter 5: Motorcycle Radio Installation Speaker Cable Control Cable Power Cable Runs from the speaker to the accessory-cable connector inside the weather-resistant enclosure. Runs from the rear of the control head to the front of the transceiver inside the enclosure. Ignition Sense (Red) Wire Portion of Accessory Cable Runs from the ignition sense fuse terminal of the fuse box to the rear area inside the enclosure. The lug for attaching the ignition sense wire is contained on the accessory cable. The red, unterminated end runs from the positive terminal of the battery to the power connector that plugs in the rear of the transceiver. Lugs for attaching the red and black leads are contained in the motorcycle power-cable kit. The black, unterminated end runs from a suitable motorcycle chassis ground to the power connector. DO NOT connect the black lead directly to the negative battery post. You may route the cables in any order. As you route each cable, temporarily fasten it at both ends. When all cables have been run, permanently fasten the cables with appropriate cable tie wraps. Observe the followings during routing and hook-up:

1 Route the cables so that none interfere with motorcycle operation. 2 Fasten the cables with supplied nylon tie wraps. The wraps should be firmly installed at frequent intervals along the cable length in such a manner that motorcycle vibration will not cause metal fatigue and subsequent breakage of the cable wires. 3 Position cables away from parts of the motorcycle that become hot. Bundle excess cable length inside the weather-resistant enclosure as discussed in Transceiver and Cabling Installation on page 118. The fifth cable is the microphone with coiled cord. Plug the 9-pin D-connector end of the coiled cord into its mating connector, which is attached near the control head discussed in an earlier paragraph. Tighten the coiled-cord-retention screws. Insert the S-hook strain relief (terminated to the coiled cord) into the hole in the mounting bracket. Slide the microphone into the microphone hang-up bracket. 5.10 Installing the Weather-Resistant Enclosure Procedure:

1 Remove the radio-mounting plate by removing four screws, lock washers, and flat washers. 2 The weather-resistant enclosure is mounted to the universal mounting plate using shock mounts. Assemble the shock-mount components exactly as shown in Figure 112: Weather-

Resistant Enclosure Installation on page 118. Be sure to install ground straps between the shock-mount and the transceiver trunnion mount, and install one 7-1/2-inch ground strap between the right rear mount and the enclosure lids antenna ground plane 0 (shown in Figure 112: Weather-Resistant Enclosure Installation on page 118 and in Figure 114: Installing the Transceiver on page 121). 3 The order of assembly is important to ensure proper shock mount operation. All components are supplied with the mounting kit. The five 7-1/2-inch straps are used on the rear and front shock mountsfour from shock mount to trunnion, and one from the shock mount to the lids antenna ground plane. NOTICE: Grounding through the power-supply cable is NOT sufficient. Whether the radio transceiver is mounted to a carrier or the chassis itself, the transceiver MUST be properly grounded to the motorcycle chassis. The ground strap supplied with the installation kit may have to be used to ensure a good RF ground path from the radio transceiver to the motorcycle chassis. 117 MN005720A01-AB Chapter 5: Motorcycle Radio Installation 4 Install the 3-foot ground strap on one of the front shock mounts. Route it through the cable-

routing hole and connect the other end to the motorcycle frame (see Figure 112: Weather-

Resistant Enclosure Installation on page 118). WARNING: DO NOT connect the ground strap directly to the negative battery post. 5 The diagram of the shock mount is shown loosely assembled. After the hex screws are tightened, the rubber washers are compressed to fasten the weather-resistant enclosure securely to the universal mounting plate. 6 Figure 114: Installing the Transceiver on page 121 is an exploded view of the enclosure; it shows details that will help to understand how the enclosure is mounted. After the enclosure is completely mounted, check for proper ground connectioncontinuity between the antenna ground plane and the motorcycle frame. Figure 112: Weather-Resistant Enclosure Installation Description Universal Mounting Plate Machine Screw Lockwasher Flat Washer Flat Rubber Washer Shouldered Rubber Washer 7-1/2-inch Ground Strap Ground Strap To Motorcycle Chassis Ground 5.11 Transceiver and Cabling Installation After the weather-resistant enclosure has been installed, the radio chassis (transceiver) is installed in the enclosure and then appropriate cables are connected. Before the transceiver can be installed, the cabling must be properly positioned in the enclosure. No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 118 1977234856 MN005720A01-AB Chapter 5: Motorcycle Radio Installation 5.11.1 Installing Cabling in the Enclosure Follow the procedure to position the cabling in the weather-resistant enclosure. Procedure:

1 Run the speaker, power, control-head, and ignition sense cables into the enclosure. 2 Lay the excess cable length between the radio mounting bosses in an S configuration as shown in Figure 113: Installing Cables on page 119. Do not coil any excess cable. Use the supplied tie wraps to bundle cable as shown. NOTICE: If the extra cable length is not sufficient to match the illustrated cable routing, then match the illustration as closely as possible. 3 Connect the speaker cable to the accessory cable connector. NOTICE: The accessory-cable emergency connector is shipped with a shorting plug installed. The headset connector is also shipped with a shorting plug installed. If an emergency switch and/or headset is not used, the plugs must remain in. If an emergency switch and/or headset is used, remove the shorting plug and discard. 4 Install the mounting plate in position on top of the cables installed above. Take care not to damage or pinch the cables when securing the mounting plate in position. NOTICE: The control-head cable plug should be at the forward end of the enclosure, and the power-cable, speaker-cable, and accessory-cable plugs should be at the rear of the enclosure. Figure 113: Installing Cables No. Description 1 2 3 Transceiver Power Cable Accessory Cable Control Cable (CAN) 119 1234567891011 MN005720A01-AB Chapter 5: Motorcycle Radio Installation No. Description Control Head Power (Red) Control Head Power Fuse Control Head Ground (Black) Ignition Sense (ACC) Emergency Cable Shorting Plug Headset Sporting Plug Accessory Cable Headset Connector 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 Accessory Cable Emergency and External Alarm Connector 5.11.2 Installing the Transceiver Prerequisites:

Install the transceiver in the weather-resistant enclosure as follows (see Figure 114: Installing the Transceiver on page 121). Procedure:

1 Install the mounting trunnion and loose ends of the four ground straps to the radio-mounting plate, using four screws, flat washers, and external-tooth lock washers (see Figure 114:

Installing the Transceiver on page 121). The ground straps must be sandwiched between the flat washers and lock washers. The lock washer must be against the trunnion. The flat washer must be under the screw head. 2 Attach the transceiver to the mounting trunnion and secure with the two screws provided. 3 Connect the control cable to the front of the transceiver. Ensure the control cable connector screws are tightened. 4 Attach the accessory connector to the transceiver. Plug in the power connector. 5 Install the grommet around the cables and push the grommet into the cable-routing hole of the weather-resistant enclosure. 120 Figure 114: Installing the Transceiver MN005720A01-AB Chapter 5: Motorcycle Radio Installation Table 17: Transceiver Installation Parts List No. 1 2 3 Description Lock washer Flat washer (8 used) Screw 121 1532181741289675141116101312 MN005720A01-AB Chapter 5: Motorcycle Radio Installation No. Description 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 Screw Grommet Screw Lock catch Radio mounting plate Bottom housing Ground shield plane Top cover Gasket Hinge Transceiver Screw Trunnion Enclosure mounts External tooth lock washer (8 used) 5.12 Installing the Emergency Switch Option Use the two-conductor, green/black cable which has one end terminated with two contacts that is supplied with the HLN5131_ Emergency Push Button. Disconnect the emergency switch shorting plug from the accessory cable. Replace the shorting wire of the shorting plug with the terminated end of the green/black emergency cable. Reconnect the plug to the accessory cable. 5.13 Installing the External Alarm Relay Option The motorcycle radio is offered with only one optional relay connection. If both horn and lights are required, wire a second relay coil parallel to the first relay. Use the two-conductor green/black cable which has one end terminated with two contacts that is supplied with the W116 Emergency Push Button. Insert the contacts into positions 3 and 4 of the emergency shorting plug of the accessory cable. Refer to Figure 120: Horn/Lights Wiring Diagram on page 125. 5.14 Installing the Headset Accessory A six-position connector on the accessory cable has been made available for connecting a headset accessory. Headset manufacturers should be consulted for compatibility with the motorcycle radio prior to purchase and installation of the headset. To install, disconnect the headset shorting plug. Remove the headset shorting wire from the headset shorting plug. Terminate the contacts provided to the applicable wires of the headset cable. Insert the terminated wires into the headset shorting plug per the contact positions illustrated in the typical headset schematic found in this manual. Reconnect the terminated headset shorting plug to the accessory cable. 122 MN005720A01-AB Chapter 5: Motorcycle Radio Installation When upgrading from a mobile radio, the existing headset cable HLN6890 requires these two pins to be swapped. The other motorcycle headset cable with this pin change is 3080010R07. Figure 115: Motorcycle Wiring Harness Rework 5.15 Installing the O5 and E5 Control Head Sunshield Follow the procedure to install the sunshield (part number NNTN7279_) to the O5 and E5 control head. 1 Assemble the sunshield to the remote mount trunnion. The same process can be used for the Procedure:

motorcycle trunnion. Figure 116: Remote Mount Trunnion with Sunshield 2 Position the sunshield and remove the Velcro adhesive backing. 123 1 7 8 14 13 20 21 26 J2, BACK OF RADIO Insert into Pin 22(Monitor) Remove from Pin 1 (VIP OUT 1) (Female-Pins) 1 3 5 6 4 2 SPK - VIP OUT 1 AUX_MIC SPK + GND AUX_PTT MN005720A01-AB Chapter 5: Motorcycle Radio Installation Figure 117: Position the Sunshield No. 1 Description Velcro Adhesive Backing 3 Slide the control head onto the trunnion while aligning the edge of the control head with the edge of the sunshield. Make sure the Velcro properly adheres to the control head. Figure 118: Slide the Control Head onto Trunnion 4 Position control head as desired and install screws. 124 1 Figure 119: Position Control Head as Desired MN005720A01-AB Chapter 5: Motorcycle Radio Installation 5.16 Horn/Lights Wiring Figure 120: Horn/Lights Wiring Diagram 125 CONNECTACROSS HORNRING SWITCHOPTIONALSECOND RELAYCONNECTACROSS HEADLAMP SWITCHSPSTN.O.RELAYSPSTN.O.RELAYACCESSORY CABLEEMERGENCY ANDEXTERNAL ALARMSCONNECTOR12V COIL12V COILSWB+VIP OUT 2PIN 4HORN/LIGHTS WIRING DIAGRAMPIN 3SWB+HORN/LIGHTS43211234 MN005720A01-AB Chapter 5: Motorcycle Radio Installation 5.17 Emergency Switch Wiring Figure 121: Emergency Switch Wiring Diagram WARNING: Motorcycle products must have pins 1 and 2 connected together to allow the radio to power down. Opening this connection by removing the emergency shorting plug, or pressing the emergency switch, will turn on the radio. Failure to maintain a normally-closed path could drain the vehicle battery if left unchecked. Emergency-equipped radios are capable of transmitting without warning. 126 ACCESSORIESCONNECTORJ2 IN DASH MOUNTJ100 IN REMOTE MOUNTPIN 14PIN 15NOTE 1SPST NORMALLY CLOSEDEMERGENCY SWITCHNOTE 1: REMOVE BLACK JUMPER WIRE INSIDE ACCESSORY CONNECTOR HOUSING. INSERT WIRES FROM EMERGENCY SWITCHGNDEMER1781413202126 MN005720A01-AB Finishing the Installation Chapter 6 Finishing the Installation This chapter provides the cable connection and dust cover installation procedure. 6.1 Cable Connection The topic provides the procedure for control heads cable connection. 6.1.1 Connecting the Cables for O2 Control Head Procedure:

1 Remove the control head from its mounting trunnion. 2 Plug the radio CAN cable into the proper location on the back of the control head (see Figure 47: O5 Control Head Installation Exploded View (Also applicable for O2, O7 and E5 Control Heads) on page 54 and Figure 49: O5 Control Head Rear View (Also applicable for O2 and O7 Control Heads) on page 56). The connectors click when snapped into place. The control head model can have the microphone plugged into the lower left corner of the control head front panel. 3 Connect the plug from the speaker lead to the mating connector that comes out from the power cable. 4 Plug the VIP connector into the correct location an the back of the control head. 5 Connect the CAN cable to the proper location on the radio. NOTICE: Connector-protective covers are provided with the radio. They should be used for added environmental robustness. 6 Ensure that the control head and microphone PTT switches are turned off. 7 Install the 15 A fuse in the radio power cable fuseholder and the 3 A or 4 A fuse in the ignition sense cable fuseholder. 8 Turn on the radio at the control head and verify proper operation of all controls and indicators. Radio operation in some installations requires turning on the ignition sense. 9 Perform a complete operational check of the radio. 10 Dress the control and power cables out of the way to prevent damage (pull any excess cable into the trunk area), securing the cables with clamps and tie wraps where necessary. 6.1.2 Connecting the Cables for O3 Control Head Procedure:

1 Unplug the CAN coiled cable connector from the Transceiver Interface. 127 MN005720A01-AB Chapter 6: Finishing the Installation 2 Plug in the connector again. You hear a click sound. 3 Ensure that the location of the CAN connector is correct

(such as J800L or J800R) on the transceiver interface. 4 Connect the plug from the speaker lead to the mating connector of either J2 or J626

(refer to the cabling diagram for more information). 6.1.3 Connecting the Cables for O5, E5 and O7 Control Heads Procedure:

1 Remove the control head from its mounting trunnion. 2 Plug the radio CAN cable into the proper location on the back of the control head (see Figure 47: O5 Control Head Installation Exploded View (Also applicable for O2, O7 and E5 Control Heads) on page 54 and Figure 49: O5 Control Head Rear View (Also applicable for O2 and O7 Control Heads) on page 56). The connectors click when snapped into place. The control head model can have the microphone plugged into the lower left corner of the control head front panel. 3 Connect the plug from the speaker lead to the mating connector that comes out from the power cable. 4 Plug the VIP connector into the correct location at the back of the control head. 5 Connect the CAN cable to the proper location on the radio. 6.1.4 Connecting the Cables for O9 Control Head Perform the following if it has not been previously done:

Procedure:

1 Remove the control head from its mounting trunnion. 2 Plug the radio CAN cable into the proper location on the back of the control head (see Figure 48: O9 Control Head Installation Exploded View on page 55 and Figure 51: O9 Control Head Rear View on page 56). The connectors click when snapped into place. The control head model can have the microphone plugged into the GCAI connection on the control head back panel. 3 Connect the plug from the speaker lead to the mating connector that comes out from the power cable. 4 Plug the VIP connector into the correct location at the back of the control head. 5 Connect the CAN cable to the proper location on the radio. 6.2 Dust Cover Installation To help protect and ensure that debris does not affect or damage your unused connectors, use the provided dust covers. Refer to the following figure to determine the correct cover for your connector. 128 Figure 122: Dust Cover Installation Locations MN005720A01-AB Chapter 6: Finishing the Installation Description 1515047C01 1515048C01 1515049C01 1515327H02 1575693A01 7575262A01 SL000319A01 Control Head No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 Control Head (Rear) Mid Power Tanapa (Remote Front) Enhanced Single Band Mobile Radio Mid Power Tanapa NOTICE:

Using a coin as a tool, parts 2 and 4 require you to insert then turn the coin approximately 1/3 turn until snug. Install parts 3 and/or 6 onto DB25 accessory cable assembly when the corresponding cable assembly connections are not in use. 129 1123567226114345678910117 MN005720A01-AB Chapter 6: Finishing the Installation 6.3 Miscellaneous Information On the mid power radio, there are rubber port plugs which seals an opening that is used for future antenna connection. On the mid power radio, the port plug is at the bottom of the radio behind the control head or TIB. These plugs are critical to the sealing of the radio and should not be removed unless to replace it due to damage or to install the future antenna connector. Removal of the port plug in any other situation creates a leak path into the radio. 130 MN005720A01-AB Best Practices: Installation and Troubleshooting Chapter 7 Best Practices: Installation and Troubleshooting This chapter covers the Motorola Solutions recommended vehicle installation practices that can address or prevent many issues. Radio circuit damage due to overvoltage condition. Radio/Accessories "lock-up". Radio/Accessories change state/lock-up when radio PTT is depressed. Radio powers up in the FL 01/90 state (general communication error code). Radio intermittently resets. Radio loses secure key. Transmit audio distortion on motorcycle radio when engine is running. Keypad buttons become inoperative for motorcycle radios when engine is running. Alternator whines when transmitting with engine running. Radio/Accessories turn themselves on/off. 7.1 Checking the Wiring of Ignition and Radio Ignition Sensing If it is required to turn the radio on and off using the ignition sense switch, in addition to the control head on/off switch, connect the ignition sense lead to the accessory terminal from the ignition switch

(usually in the vehicle fuse panel under accessory or radio). NOTICE: Motorola Solutions recommends protecting or isolating the radio ignition sense input from voltage spikes more than +/- 40 VDC. Such spikes can be hundreds of volts in amplitude and are common in larger vehicles (for example utility trucks and buses), especially when the source is common to a solenoid coil. A triggerable oscilloscope is required to determine the existence of such spikes as most voltmeters cannot measure in short duration (< 1 ms). If the condition of the intended ignition sense source is unknown, Motorola Solutions recommends isolating the source from the radio with a relay or the use of a suppression diode wired between the source and ground. Any high current suppression diode (MR2535) with a breakdown voltage of between 18 V and 40 V would suffice. A suitable diode kit is available from Motorola Solutions parts, kit number HLN6325_. If it is required to have the radio power up only using the control head on/off switch, then connect the ignition sense lead directly to the positive terminal of the battery. The ignition sense will always be ignored and a re-wiring is necessary in the future if the operator chooses any ignition sense CPS setting. 131 MN005720A01-AB Chapter 7: Best Practices: Installation and Troubleshooting 7.2 Checking the Physical Installation of Radio Ground and Radio Accessory Wiring Dash and Remote Mount Configurations Scrape away paint on the chassis at the place where you are making the ground connection, and try to keep the ground lead as short as possible. Verify that the red A+ lead is connected directly to the positive terminal of the battery and the black ground lead is connected to the vehicle chassis using a wire with practical length. Ensure that the mobile radio antenna is the minimum required distance (three feet) from the mobile radio equipment to prevent radio frequency interference (RFI). For vehicles that have other types of electronic equipment installed such as lights, flashers, computers, siren/PA, and others, use a separate ground for the mobile radio equipment. Do not coil up any excess length of the red A+ lead. Doing this may produce a large transient voltage when there is a high current drain for example, during transmit. This could cause the radio to reset when the push-to-talk (PTT) is depressed. Motorcycle Configuration Ensure that the antenna ground connection is solid. An intermittent ground connection can distort the transmission when the motorcycle engine is running. Do not coil up any excessive length of antenna cable. It may affect the receive performance of the radio. If an extra length of cable is used to extend the microphone, ensure that the added capacitance does not interfere with the operation of the radio. 7.3 Improving the Electrical Quality of the Power and Ignition Lines Use a relay to isolate the vehicle ignition switch point (ACC) from the radio ignition sense point. Control this relay from the vehicle ignition switch point (ACC). Supply a cleaner voltage from the positive terminal of the battery into the relay, which will now be attached to the radio ignition sense point. Now the ACC line toggles the relay, instead of directly toggling the radios ignition sense line. Install a Power Line Filter between the A+ lead and the positive terminal of the battery. The Power Line Filter filters the battery power applied to the transmitter power amplifiers. Pay extra caution to this because the series filter introduces a negative spike when the radio transmits that may cause problems with radio operation. Lock-up issues have been seen with the dual control head MCS 2000 configuration. For vehicles that use electromechanical relays to control external devices (lights, motors, switch boxes, and others), isolate these relay circuits as best as possible from the mobile radio equipment. Also, use diode suppression across the relay coil to minimize the noise produced by the collapsing magnetic field. If the ignition sense switch is used, ensure that there is not a large voltage drop between the A+

point (usually the positive terminal of the battery) and the ignition sense point. In general, the voltage difference between these two points, should not be greater than 1.5 V when all accessories/

air-conditioner are turned on. Refer to the Basic Service Manual for specifications for minimum and maximum voltage levels. Typical battery voltage levels are 13.6 V +/- 20%. 132 MN005720A01-AB Chapter 7: Best Practices: Installation and Troubleshooting 7.4 Minimizing the Effect of Poorly Grounded Antennas For vehicles with high power radios that use glass mount antennas, keep the radio and antenna cable as far as possible from the radiating element of the antenna. If a sufficient distance is not maintained, the lack of a proper ground plane from the glass mount antenna may cause the radio transmit signal to interfere with itself and cause a reset. To minimize this effect, it may be necessary to install ferrite beads on the antenna cable to protect the radio from this interference. 7.5 Jump-Starting the Vehicle Prerequisites:

CAUTION: Do not jump-start vehicles with radio power or ignition sense cables connected. Damage to the radio and/or accessories may result. Jump-starting a vehicle can crank 300+ volts through the vehicle charging system and these transients can damage electrical equipment. The state of your radio before it needs a jump-start may be unknown, and the radio may attempt to return to its last state (radio ON), when doing a jump-start. Therefore, carry out the following procedure before jump-starting any vehicle containing a radio. Procedure:

1 Locate the ignition sense line (thin yellow wire or thin red wire, depending on dash mount or remote mount installation) and the main power leads (thick red wire) near the battery positive terminal. NOTICE:

These lines are fused. In the event these lines are not fused (add the appropriate fuse in line), use whatever tools necessary to physically disconnect the ignition sense and power lines from the battery terminal. Ensure that the disconnected lines are not in the way of moving motorcycle parts or interfering with the motorcycle operation in any way. 2 Open up the fuse holders and remove the fuses out of the kits. 3 Re-tighten the fuse holders but without the fuses to ensure that ignition sense and power lines do not interfere with moving motorcycle parts. 4 Proceed with the jump-start routine as described in the manual of your vehicle. 5 Once the jump-start process is complete, re-install the fuses into their holders. 7.6 Eliminating Noise/Howling from PA Speaker Refer to Installation Examples on page 33 for the recommended methods of installation available for the mobile two-way radio, with accessories placed to the vehicle as desired. Refer to Figure 38: Radio Installation of O9 Remote Mount with Transceiver (URC is optional) on page 40 and Figure 39: Radio Installation (O9 Remote Mount with Pinouts) on page 41 for the wiring diagrams for the recommended configurations. Refer to the Siren/PA User Manual for further details on lowering the wattage. 133 MN005720A01-AB Appendix A: Replacement Parts Ordering Appendix A Replacement Parts Ordering Basic Ordering Information Some replacement parts, spare parts, and/or product information can be ordered directly from the Motorola Solutions local distribution organization or through Motorola Online. While parts may be assigned with a Motorola Solutions part number, this does not guarantee that they are available from Motorola Solutions Radio Products and Solutions Organization (RPSO). Some parts may have become obsolete and are no longer available in the market due to cancellations by the supplier. If no Motorola Solutions part number is assigned, the part is normally not available from Motorola Solutions, or is not a user-serviceable part. Part numbers appended with an asterisk are serviceable by Motorola Solutions Depot only. Place orders for replacement parts, kits, and assemblies directly on Motorola Solutions local distribution organization or through Motorola Online. When ordering replacement parts or equipment information, include the complete identification number. This applies to all components, kits, and chassis. If the component part number is not known, the order should include the number of the chassis or kit of which it is a part of, and sufficient description of the desired component to identify it. To identify non-referenced spare parts, request for help from the Customer Care organization of a Motorola Solutions local area representative. Motorola Online The product catalog is available on the Motorola Online website. To register for login access:

For U.S. and Canada Service Centers only, call 1-800-422-4210. For APAC and ANZ regions, sign up at https://asiaonline.mot-solutions.com. For LACR region, sign up at https://businessonline.motorolasolutions.com. Types of Orders Mail Orders Telephone Orders and Parts Identification RPSO (United States and Canada) Contact Information Mail orders are only accepted by the U.S. Fed-

eral Government Markets Division (USFGMD). Motorola Solutions 7031 Columbia Gateway Drive 3rd Floor - Order Processing Columbia, MD 21046 U.S.A. 7:00 AM to 7:00 PM (Central Standard Time) Monday through Friday (Chicago, U.S.A.) 1-800-422-4210 USFGMD 1-847-538-8023 (United States and Canada) 1-800-826-1913 Federal Government Parts -

Credit Cards Only 134 Types of Orders Contact Information Fax Orders RPSO (United States and Canada) MN005720A01-AB Appendix A: Replacement Parts Ordering 8:30 AM to 5:00 PM (Eastern Standard Time) 1-800-622-6210 1-847-576-3023 (United States and Canada) USFGMD (Federal Government Orders) 1-800-526-8641 (For Parts and Equipment Pur-

chase Orders) Product Customer Service RPSO (United States and Canada) 1-800-927-2744 A.1 Service Information NOTICE: The Motorola Solutions RPSO was formerly known as the Radio Products Services Division (RPSD) and/or the Accessories and Aftermarket Division (AAD). EMEA Technical Support Operations (TSO) The EMEA Technical Support Operations (TSO) provides a remote Technical Support Service to help customers resolve technical issues and quickly restore networks and systems. This team of highly skilled professionals is available to customers with current service agreements in place that include the Technical Support Service. The TSO technical experts may be accessed through the Service Desk either electronically or using the listed telephone numbers. If you are unsure whether your current service agreement entitles you to benefit from this service, or if you would like more information about the Technical Support Service, contact your local customer support or account manager for further information. Contact Details Technical Requests: techsupport.emea@motorolasolutions.com Repair Support: repair.emea@motorolasolutions.com Contact Us: https://www.motorolasolutions.com/en_xu/support.html Parts Identification and Ordering If you need help in identifying non-referenced spare parts, direct a request to the Customer Care Organization of a local area Motorola Solutions representative. Orders for replacement parts, kits, and assemblies should be placed directly at the local distribution organization of Motorola Solutions or through the Extranet site Motorola Online at https://emeaonline.motorolasolutions.com. However, you cannot order export-controlled products or spare parts such as TEA-related boards through Motorola Online. Send an order form with actual end-customer details by e-mail to your customer care team. Your Input Send questions and comments regarding user documentation to documentation@motorolasolutions.com. 135 MN005720A01-AB Appendix A: Replacement Parts Ordering A.2 Service Information APAC This topic contains contact details to service centers in Asia and Pacific region. Technical Support Technical support is available to assist the dealer/distributor in resolving any malfunction which may be encountered. Initial contact should be by telephone wherever possible. When contacting Motorola Solutions Technical Support, be prepared to provide the product model number and the serial number. Further Assistance from Motorola Solutions You can also contact the Customer Help Desk through the website: http://www.motorolasolutions.com/

en_xp/products. If a unit requires further complete testing, knowledge and/or details of component level troubleshooting or service than is customarily performed at the basic level, send the radio to a Motorola Solutions Service Center as listed in the following table:

Table 18: Service Information Telephone Numbers and Addresses of the Asia and Pacific Motorola Solutions Centers Country Telephone Number Address Singapore

+65-6352-6383 Motorola Solutions Singapore Pte. Ltd, c/o Azure Engineering, 49 Jalan Pemimpin,

#03-11 APS Industrial Building, Singapore 577203 Contact: Mareen Phua E-mail: mareen@azure.com.sg Enquiry: Goe Engkiet E-mail: eng-kiet.goe@motorolasolutions.com Motorola Solutions Sdn. Bhd. Level 14, Persoft Tower, No. 68, Pesiaran Tropicana, 47410 Petaling Jaya, Selangor Darul Ehsan, Malaysia Contact: Koh Tiong Eng E-mail: A21001@motorolasolutions.com PT. Motorola Solutions Indonesia 30th Floor, Gedung BRI II, Suite 3001, Jl. Jend. Sudirman Kav. 44-46, Jakarta 10210, Indonesia Contact: Eko Haryanto E-mail: Eko.Haryanto@motorolasolutions.com Motorola Solutions (Thailand) Ltd. 142 Two Pacific Place Suite 2201, 3220 Sukhumvit Road, Klongtoey, Malaysia

+603-7809-0000 Indonesia

+62-21-3043-5239 Thailand Tel: +662-653-220 Fax: +668-254-5922 136 Country Telephone Number Address India

+91-9844218850 MN005720A01-AB Appendix A: Replacement Parts Ordering Bangkok 10110 Contact: Nitas Vatanasupapon E-mail: Nitas@motorolasolutions.com Motorola Solutions India Pvt. Ltd. C/o Communication Test Design India Private Limited,

#4, 5 Maruthi Industrial Estate, Rajapalya, Hoodi Village, Bangalore - 560048, India Contact: K. Umamaheswari E-mail: umamaheshwari@motorolasolutions.com China

+86-10-8473-5128 Hong Kong 852-2966-4823 Philippines Tel: +632 858-7500 Fax: +632 841-0681 Korea

+822-3497-3649 Taiwan

+886-2-8729 8000 Motorola Solutions (China) Co. Ltd. No. 1 Wang Jing East Road, Chao Yang District, Beijing, 100102, P.R. China Contact: Sophy Wang E-mail: C18170@motorolasolutions.com Motorola Solutions Asia Pacific Ltd. Unit 1807-1812, 18/F, Two Harbourfront, 22 Tak Fung Street, Hunghom, Kowloon, Hong Kong Contact: Judy Leung E-mail: Judy.Leung@motorolasolutions.com Motorola Communications Philippines, Inc. Unit 2102, One Global Place Building, 5th Ave., Bonifacio Global City, Taguig, Philippines 1634. Contact: Arthur Nieves E-mail: Arthur.Nieves@motorolasolutions.com Motorola Solutions Korea, Inc. 9th Floor, Hibrand Building, 215, Yangjae-Dong, Seocho-Gu, Seoul, 137-924, Korea. Contact: KS Kwak E-mail: r45321@motorolasolutions.com Motorola Solutions Taiwan, Ltd. 8F, No. 9, Songgao Rd., Taipei 110, Taiwan (R.O.C.) Contact: Michael Chou E-mail: ftpe239@motorolasolutions.com 137 MN005720A01-AB Appendix A: Replacement Parts Ordering Country Telephone Number Address Australia

+613-9847-7725 Motorola Solutions Australia Pty. Ltd. 10 Wesley Court, Tally Ho Business Park, East Burwood Victoria 3151, Australia. E-mail: servicecentre.au@motorolasolutions.com Piece Parts Some replacement parts, spare parts, and/or product information can be ordered directly. If a complete Motorola Solutions part number is assigned to the part, it is available from Motorola Solutions Service Organization. If no part number is assigned, the part is not normally available from Motorola Solutions. If a list of parts is not included, that means that no user-serviceable parts are available for that kit or assembly. Customer Programming Software has no capability to tune the radio. Tuning the radio can only be performed at the factory or at the appropriate Motorola Solutions Repair Center. Component replacement can affect the radio tuning and must only be performed by the appropriate Motorola Solutions Repair Center. All orders for parts/information should include the complete Motorola Solutions identification number. All part orders should be directed to your local Motorola Solutions Service Organization. See your latest price pages. Parts Identification and Ordering Request for help in identification of non-referenced spare parts should be directed to the Customer Care Organization of Motorola Solutions local area representation. Orders for replacement parts, kits, and assemblies should be placed directly on a Motorola Solutions local distribution organization or from the Motorola Solutions Online (Extranet). 138 MN005720A01-AB Glossary Glossary This glossary contains an alphabetical listing of terms and their definitions that are applicable to portable and mobile subscriber radio products. Analog Refers to a continuously variable signal or a circuit or device designed to handle such signals. band Frequencies allowed for a specific purpose. Customer Programming Software CPS-Software with a graphical user interface containing the feature set of an ASTRO radio. default A pre-defined set of parameters. DEK Direct Entry Keyboard digital Refers to data that is stored or transmitted as a sequence of discrete symbols from a finite set; most commonly this means binary data represented using electronic or electromagnetic signals. EEPROM Electrically Erasable Programmable Read-Only Memory Electrically Erasable Programmable Read-Only Memory EEPROM- A special type of PROM that can be erased by exposing it to an electrical charge. An EEPROM retains its contents even when the power is turned off. FCC Federal Communications Commission. Firmware Code executed by an embedded processor such as the Host or DSP in a subscriber radio. This type of code is typically resident in non-volatile memory and as such is more difficult to change than code executed from RAM. frequency Number of times a complete electromagnetic-wave cycle occurs in a fixed unit of time (usually one second). Kilohertz (kHz) One thousand cycles per second. Used especially as a radio-frequency unit. 139 MN005720A01-AB Glossary Megahertz (MHz) One million cycles per second. Used especially as a radio-frequency unit. Megahertz One million cycles per second. Used especially as a radio-frequency unit. Microcontroller Unit MCU-Also written as C. A microprocessor that contains RAM and ROM components, as well as communications and programming components and peripherals. PA Power amplifier. paging One-way communication that alerts the receiver to retrieve a message. Push-to-Talk PTT-The switch or button usually located on the left side of the radio which, when pressed, causes the radio to transmit. When the PTT is released, the unit returns to receive operation. Radio Frequency RF-The portion of the electromagnetic spectrum between audio sound and infrared light (approximately 10 kHz to 10 GHz). RAM Random Access Memory Random Access Memory RAM-A type of computer memory that can be accessed randomly; that is, any byte of memory can be accessed without touching the preceding bytes. receiver Electronic device that amplifies RF signals. A receiver separates the audio signal from the RF carrier, amplifies it, and converts it back to the original sound waves. Registers Short-term data-storage circuits within the microcontroller unit or programmable logic IC. RESET Reset line: an input to the microcontroller that restarts execution. signal An electrically transmitted electromagnetic wave. RX Receive software 140 MN005720A01-AB Glossary Computer programs, procedures, rules, documentation, and data pertaining to the operation of a system. Time-out Timer TOT-A timer that limits the length of a transmission. transceiver Transmitter-receiver. A device that both transmits and receives analog or digital signals. Also abbreviated as XCVR. transmitter Electronic equipment that generates and amplifies an RF carrier signal, modulates the signal, and then radiates it into space. TX Transmit. UHF Ultra-High Frequency. VHF Very-High Frequency. Universal Serial Bus USB-An external bus standard that supports data transfer rates of 480 Mbps. 141

 

 

APX TWO-WAY RADIOS APX 5500, APX 6500, APX 6500Li, APX 7500, APX 8500 APX MOBILE E5 CONTROL HEAD USER GUIDE SEPTEMBER 2021 2021 Motorola Solutions, Inc. All rights reserved

*MN006147A01*

MN006147A01-AE MN006147A01-AE Intellectual Property and Regulatory Notices Intellectual Property and Regulatory Notices Copyrights The Motorola Solutions products described in this document may include copyrighted Motorola Solutions computer programs. Laws in the United States and other countries preserve for Motorola Solutions certain exclusive rights for copyrighted computer programs. Accordingly, any copyrighted Motorola Solutions computer programs contained in the Motorola Solutions products described in this document may not be copied or reproduced in any manner without the express written permission of Motorola Solutions. No part of this document may be reproduced, transmitted, stored in a retrieval system, or translated into any language or computer language, in any form or by any means, without the prior written permission of Motorola Solutions, Inc. MOTOROLA, MOTO, MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS, and the Stylized M Logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Motorola Trademark Holdings, LLC and are used under license. All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners. Trademarks License Rights The purchase of Motorola Solutions products shall not be deemed to grant either directly or by implication, estoppel or otherwise, any license under the copyrights, patents or patent applications of Motorola Solutions, except for the normal non-exclusive, royalty-free license to use that arises by operation of law in the sale of a product. Open Source Content This product may contain Open Source software used under license. Refer to the product installation media for full Open Source Legal Notices and Attribution content. European Union (EU) Waste of Electrical and Electronic Equipment (WEEE) Directive The European Union's WEEE directive requires that products sold into EU countries must have the crossed out trash bin label on the product (or the package in some cases). As defined by the WEEE directive, this cross-out trash bin label means that customers and end-users in EU countries should not dispose of electronic and electrical equipment or accessories in household waste. Customers or end-users in EU countries should contact their local equipment supplier representative or service centre for information about the waste collection system in their country. Please note that certain features, facilities, and capabilities described in this document may not be applicable to or licensed for use on a specific system, or may be dependent upon the characteristics of a specific mobile subscriber unit or configuration of certain parameters. Please refer to your Motorola Solutions contact for further information. 2021 Motorola Solutions, Inc. All Rights Reserved Disclaimer 2 MN006147A01-AE Contents Contents Intellectual Property and Regulatory Notices.......................................................... 2 List of Figures............................................................................................................11 List of Tables............................................................................................................. 12 Software Version.......................................................................................................13 Chapter 1: Read Me First........................................................................................14 1.1 Notations Used in This Manual..............................................................................................14 1.2 Radio Care.............................................................................................................................14 1.2.1 Cleaning the External Surface of the Radio.............................................................15 1.3 Additional Performance Enhancement.................................................................................. 15 1.3.1 ASTRO 25 Enhanced Data......................................................................................15 1.3.2 Dynamic System Resilience.................................................................................... 15 1.3.3 CrossTalk Prevention...............................................................................................15 1.3.4 Encrypted Integrated Data....................................................................................... 15 1.3.5 SecureNet................................................................................................................ 16 1.3.6 Over-the-Air Rekeying............................................................................................. 16 1.3.7 P25 Digital Vehicular Repeater System...................................................................16 1.3.8 Conventional Talkgroup and Radio Scan Enhancements....................................... 16 1.4 What Your Dealer/System Administrator Can Tell You......................................................... 17 Chapter 2: Preparing Your Radio for Use............................................................. 18 2.1 Turning On the Radio ........................................................................................................... 18 2.2 Adjusting the Volume.............................................................................................................18 2.3 Validating Compatibility During Power Up............................................................................. 19 Chapter 3: Radio Controls......................................................................................20 3.1 E5 Control Head and Microphone......................................................................................... 20 3.2 Keypad...................................................................................................................................21 3.3 Programmable Features........................................................................................................ 23 3.3.1 Assignable Radio Functions.................................................................................... 23 3.3.2 Assignable Settings or Utility Functions...................................................................26 Chapter 4: Status Indicators.................................................................................. 27 4.1 LED Indications......................................................................................................................27 4.2 Status Icons........................................................................................................................... 27 4.3 TMS Status Icons.................................................................................................................. 30 4.4 Call Type Icons...................................................................................................................... 31 4.5 Intelligent Lighting Indicators................................................................................................. 31 4.6 Channel Color Backlight........................................................................................................ 32 3 MN006147A01-AE Contents 4.7 Alert Tones ........................................................................................................................... 33 Chapter 5: General Radio Operation..................................................................... 35 5.1 Selecting a Zone....................................................................................................................35 5.2 Selecting a Radio Channel.................................................................................................... 35 5.3 Selecting a Channel by using Channel Search Button.......................................................... 35 5.4 Mode Select Feature............................................................................................................. 36 5.4.1 Saving a Zone and a Channel to a Softkey............................................................. 36 5.4.2 Saving a Zone and a Channel to a Button............................................................... 36 5.5 Receiving and Responding to a Radio Call........................................................................... 37 5.5.1 Receiving and Responding to a Talkgroup Call.......................................................37 5.5.2 Receiving and Responding to a Private Call (Trunking Only)..................................37 5.5.3 Receiving and Responding to a Telephone Call (Trunking Only)............................ 38 5.6 Methods to Make a Radio Call...............................................................................................38 5.6.1 Making a Talkgroup Call ......................................................................................... 38 5.6.2 Making a Private Call (Trunking Only)..................................................................... 39 5.6.3 Making a Telephone Call (Trunking Only)............................................................... 39 5.7 Switching Between Repeater or Direct Operation Button......................................................40 5.8 Monitor Feature..................................................................................................................... 40 5.8.1 Monitoring a Channel...............................................................................................40 5.8.2 Monitoring Conventional Mode................................................................................ 41 Chapter 6: Advanced Features.............................................................................. 42 6.1 ViQi........................................................................................................................................ 42 6.1.1 Using ViQi Virtual Partner........................................................................................ 43 6.2 Advanced Call Features........................................................................................................ 43 6.2.1 Calling a Phone Not in the List.................................................................................43 6.2.2 Selective Call (ASTRO Conventional Only)............................................................. 44 6.2.2.1 Receiving a Selective Call..........................................................................44 6.2.2.2 Making a Selective Call..............................................................................44 6.2.3 Talkgroup Call Feature (Conventional Only)............................................................45 6.2.3.1 Selecting a Talkgroup................................................................................ 45 6.2.4 Sending a Status Call.............................................................................................. 45 6.2.5 Sending a Message................................................................................................. 46 6.2.6 Making a Priority Dispatch Calls.............................................................................. 46 6.2.7 Dynamic Regrouping (Trunking Only)......................................................................47 6.2.7.1 Classification of Regrouped Radios........................................................... 47 6.2.7.2 Requesting a Reprogram (Trunking Only)................................................. 47 6.2.8 Dynamic Zone Programming................................................................................... 48 6.2.8.1 Entering the Dynamic Zone to Select a Dynamic Channel........................ 48 6.2.8.2 Saving a Channel in the Dynamic Zone from List Selection...................... 48 4 MN006147A01-AE Contents 6.2.8.3 Deleting a Channel in the Dynamic Zone...................................................49 6.3 Multiple Control Head Features............................................................................................. 49 6.3.1 Setting the ID of the Initial Control Head..................................................................49 6.3.2 All Active Mode........................................................................................................ 50 6.3.3 Activating and Deactivating Intercom in All Active Mode......................................... 50 6.3.4 One Active Mode..................................................................................................... 50 6.4 Remote Monitor..................................................................................................................... 51 6.5 Contacts.................................................................................................................................51 6.5.1 Making a Private Call from Contacts........................................................................52 6.5.2 Adding a New Contact Entry....................................................................................52 6.5.3 Deleting a Contact Entry.......................................................................................... 53 6.5.4 Adding a Contact to a Call List.................................................................................53 6.5.5 Methods of Contact Editing in a Call List................................................................. 54 6.5.5.1 Editing an Entry Alias................................................................................. 54 6.5.5.2 Editing as Entry ID..................................................................................... 54 6.5.5.3 Editing a Call Type..................................................................................... 55 6.6 Scan Lists.............................................................................................................................. 55 6.6.1 Intelligent Priority Scan............................................................................................ 55 6.6.2 Viewing a Scan List..................................................................................................55 6.6.3 Editing the Scan List................................................................................................ 56 6.6.4 Changing the Scan List Status.................................................................................56 6.6.5 Viewing and Changing the Priority Status................................................................56 6.7 Scan.......................................................................................................................................57 6.7.1 Turning Scan On or Off............................................................................................57 6.7.2 Turning Scan On While Disregarding the Squelch Code (Conventional Channels Only)............................................................................................................ 57 6.7.3 Deleting a Nuisance Channel.................................................................................. 58 6.7.4 Restoring a Nuisance Channel................................................................................ 58 6.7.5 Changing Priorities Status While Scan is On...........................................................58 6.7.6 Restoring Priorities in a Scan List............................................................................ 58 6.7.7 Using the Hang Up Box (HUB)................................................................................ 59 6.8 Call Alert Paging.................................................................................................................... 59 6.8.1 Receiving a Call Alert Page..................................................................................... 59 6.8.2 Sending a Call Alert Page........................................................................................59 6.9 Recent Calls.......................................................................................................................... 60 6.9.1 Viewing Recent Calls............................................................................................... 61 6.9.2 Instant Recall........................................................................................................... 61 6.9.2.1 Saving and Playback Calls.........................................................................61 6.10 In-Call User Alert................................................................................................................. 62 6.10.1 Enabling and Disabling In-Call User Alert..............................................................63 5 MN006147A01-AE Contents 6.11 Quick Call II......................................................................................................................... 63 6.11.1 Initiating Quick Call II Transmissions..................................................................... 63 6.12 Emergency Operation..........................................................................................................64 6.12.1 Special Considerations for Emergency Operation................................................. 64 6.12.2 Emergency Keep-Alive.......................................................................................... 64 6.12.3 Exiting Emergency Operation................................................................................ 65 6.12.4 Exiting Emergency as Supervisor (Trunking Only)................................................ 65 6.12.5 Sending an Emergency Alarm............................................................................... 65 6.12.6 Sending an Emergency Call (Trunking Only).........................................................66 6.12.7 Sending An Emergency Call With Hot Mic (Trunking Only)...................................66 6.12.8 Sending an Emergency Alarm with Emergency Call............................................. 67 6.12.9 Sending An Emergency Alarm and Call with Hot Mic............................................ 67 6.12.10 Sending a Silent Emergency Alarm..................................................................... 68 6.12.11 Impact Detection.................................................................................................. 68 6.12.11.1 Detecting Impact.................................................................................... 68 6.12.11.2 Exiting Impact Detected Condition......................................................... 69 6.13 Sending Evacuation Tone....................................................................................................69 6.14 Automatic Registration Service............................................................................................69 6.14.1 Selecting or Changing the ARS Mode................................................................... 70 6.14.2 User Login Feature................................................................................................ 71 6.14.2.1 Logging In as a User................................................................................ 71 6.14.2.2 Logging Out..............................................................................................72 6.15 Text Messaging Service...................................................................................................... 72 6.15.1 Accessing the Messaging Features....................................................................... 72 6.15.2 Composing and Sending a New Text Message.....................................................73 6.15.3 Sending a Quick Text Message............................................................................. 74 6.15.4 Priority Status and Request Reply of a New Text Message.................................. 75 6.15.4.1 Appending a Priority Status to a Text Message....................................... 75 6.15.4.2 Removing a Priority Status from a Text Message....................................75 6.15.4.3 Appending a Request Reply to a Text Message......................................75 6.15.4.4 Removing a Request Reply from a Text Message...................................75 6.15.4.5 Appending a Priority Status and a Reply Request to a Text Message.... 76 6.15.4.6 Removing a Priority Status and a Reply Request from a Text Message............................................................................................................76 6.15.4.7 Receiving a Text Message.......................................................................76 6.15.4.8 Viewing a Text Message from the Inbox.................................................. 77 6.15.4.9 Replying to a Received Text Message.....................................................77 6.15.4.10 Accessing the Drafts Folder................................................................... 78 6.15.4.11 Sent Text Messages.............................................................................. 78 6.15.4.12 Deleting a Text Message....................................................................... 80 6 MN006147A01-AE Contents 6.15.4.13 Deleting All Text Messages....................................................................80 6.16 Secure Operations...............................................................................................................80 6.16.1 Enabling Secure Transmission.............................................................................. 80 6.16.2 Accessing the Secure Feature...............................................................................81 6.16.3 Managing Encryption............................................................................................. 81 6.16.3.1 Loading Encryption Keys......................................................................... 81 6.16.3.2 Multikey Feature.......................................................................................81 6.16.3.3 Selecting Encryption Keys....................................................................... 82 6.16.3.4 Selecting Keysets.....................................................................................82 6.16.3.5 Erasing Encryption Keys.......................................................................... 83 6.16.3.6 Requesting an Over-the-Air Rekey.......................................................... 83 6.16.3.7 MDC OTAR (Conventional Only)............................................................. 84 6.16.3.8 Infinite UKEK Retention........................................................................... 84 6.16.3.9 Hear Clear................................................................................................84 6.17 Radio Lock...........................................................................................................................85 6.17.1 Enabling or Disabling Radio Lock (Secure Radios Only).......................................85 6.17.2 Changing the Radio Lock Password......................................................................85 6.17.3 Changing the Tactical Inhibit Password.................................................................86 6.18 Radio Stun and Kill.............................................................................................................. 86 6.18.1 Radio Stun............................................................................................................. 86 6.18.1.1 Using Radio Stun..................................................................................... 87 6.18.2 Radio Kill................................................................................................................87 6.18.2.1 Using Remote Kill to Kill Another Radio...................................................87 6.18.2.2 Using Direct Kill to Kill Your Own Radio...................................................88 6.19 Radio Inhibit.........................................................................................................................88 6.20 Global Positioning System/Global Navigation Satellite System...........................................88 6.20.1 GPS Performance Enhancement...........................................................................89 6.20.2 The Outdoor Location Feature (Using GPS)..........................................................89 6.20.3 Location Format..................................................................................................... 89 6.20.4 Accessing the Outdoor Location Feature...............................................................90 6.20.5 Selecting Location Format..................................................................................... 90 6.20.6 Turning Off GPS.................................................................................................... 90 6.20.7 Saving a Waypoint................................................................................................. 91 6.20.8 Viewing a Saved Waypoint.................................................................................... 91 6.20.9 Editing the Alias of a Waypoint.............................................................................. 92 6.20.10 Editing the Coordinates of a Waypoint.................................................................92 6.20.11 Deleting a Single Saved Waypoint.......................................................................93 6.20.12 Deleting All Saved Waypoints..............................................................................94 6.20.13 Measuring the Distance and Bearing from a Saved Waypoint............................ 94 7 MN006147A01-AE Contents 6.20.14 Location Feature in Emergency Mode................................................................. 94 6.20.15 Peer-Location on the Display (ASTRO Conventional)......................................... 95 6.21 Mission Critical Geofence (ASTRO 25 Trunking)................................................................ 95 6.21.1 Entering the Geofence Area.................................................................................. 95 6.21.2 Mission Critical Geofence...................................................................................... 96 6.21.3 Entering Mission Critical Geofence........................................................................96 6.21.4 Exiting Mission Critical Geofence.......................................................................... 97 6.22 Trunking System Controls................................................................................................... 97 6.22.1 Operating in Failsoft System..................................................................................97 6.22.2 Out-of-Range Radio...............................................................................................97 6.22.3 SmartConnect........................................................................................................ 98 6.22.4 SmartZone............................................................................................................. 98 6.22.5 Site Trunking Feature............................................................................................ 98 6.22.6 Locking and Unlocking a Site.................................................................................98 6.22.7 Viewing the Current Site........................................................................................ 99 6.22.8 Changing the Current Site..................................................................................... 99 6.22.9 Trunked Announcement.........................................................................................99 6.22.9.1 Initiating an Announcement....................................................................100 6.23 Ignition Switch Options...................................................................................................... 100 6.23.1 Using Emergency Power Up................................................................................101 6.24 Mission Critical Wireless Bluetooth Wireless Technology............................................... 101 6.24.1 Turning On Bluetooth ..........................................................................................101 6.24.2 Turning Off the Bluetooth.....................................................................................102 6.24.3 Pairing with Low Frequency-Motorola Proximity Pairing (LF-MPP) Feature........102 6.24.4 Standard Pairing Feature.....................................................................................103 6.24.4.1 Searching and Pairing the Bluetooth Device..........................................104 6.24.4.2 Turning On Bluetooth Visibility............................................................... 104 6.24.4.3 Receiving Pairing Request from other Devices......................................105 6.24.4.4 Turning Off Bluetooth Visibility............................................................... 105 6.24.5 PIN Authentication in Pairing............................................................................... 106 6.24.5.1 Pairing the Authentication PIN when Receiving a Pairing Request....... 106 6.24.5.2 Pairing the Authentication PIN with the Generated Numeric PIN.......... 107 6.24.6 Turning On the Bluetooth Audio...........................................................................107 6.24.7 Turning Off the Bluetooth Audio...........................................................................108 6.24.8 Adjusting the Volume of the Radio from Bluetooth Audio Device........................ 108 6.24.9 Viewing and Clearing the Bluetooth Device Information......................................109 6.24.10 Clearing All Bluetooth Devices Information........................................................110 6.24.11 Editing the Bluetooth Friendly Name................................................................. 110 6.25 ASTRO 25 (P25) Programming Over Project 25 (POP25)................................................ 111 8 MN006147A01-AE Contents 6.25.1 Responding to the Notification of Upgrade.......................................................... 111 6.26 Voice Announcement ........................................................................................................111 6.27 Site Selectable Alerts (ASTRO 25 Trunking).....................................................................112 6.27.1 Sending SSA Notification to Single Site...............................................................112 6.27.2 Sending SSA Notification to Single Site by Manual Entry....................................113 6.27.3 Sending SSA Notification to All Sites...................................................................113 6.27.4 Sending SSA Notification to All Available Sites................................................... 114 6.27.5 Stopping SSA Notification of a Single Site...........................................................114 6.27.6 Stopping SSA Notification of a Single Site by Manual Entry................................115 6.27.7 Stopping SSA Notification of All Sites..................................................................116 6.27.8 Stopping SSA Notification of All Available Sites.................................................. 116 6.28 Channel Change on Off-Hook........................................................................................... 116 6.29 Low Voltage Threshold Warning........................................................................................117 6.30 Wi-Fi.................................................................................................................................. 117 6.30.1 Turning Wi-Fi On or Off........................................................................................117 6.30.2 Selecting WiFi Network........................................................................................118 6.30.3 Checking the Wi-Fi Configuration and Status of the Radio..................................118 6.31 Utilities............................................................................................................................... 119 6.31.1 Selecting the Power Level................................................................................... 119 6.31.2 Selecting a Radio Profile......................................................................................119 6.31.3 Controlling the Display Backlight......................................................................... 120 6.31.4 Turning the Keypad Tones On or Off...................................................................120 6.31.5 Turning Voice Mute On or Off.............................................................................. 121 6.31.6 Using the Time-Out Timer....................................................................................121 6.31.7 Conventional Squelch Operation......................................................................... 121 6.31.7.1 Using Conventional Squelch Operation Features.................................. 122 6.31.8 Using the PL Defeat Feature............................................................................... 122 6.31.9 Digital PTT ID Support......................................................................................... 123 6.31.10 Smart PTT (Conventional Only).........................................................................123 6.31.11 Transmit Inhibit.................................................................................................. 123 6.31.11.1 Enabling Transmit Inhibition.................................................................123 6.31.11.2 Disabling Transmit Inhibition................................................................ 124 6.31.12 Universal Relay Controller................................................................................. 124 6.31.13 External Alarms (Horn and Lights).....................................................................124 6.31.13.1 Using Non-Permanent Horn and Lights............................................... 125 6.31.13.2 Using Permanent Horn and Lights....................................................... 125 6.31.13.3 Changing the Selected Alarms.............................................................125 6.31.13.4 Receiving a Call While Alarms are Turned On.....................................125 6.31.13.5 Turning Off Non-Rearmable External Alarms...................................... 126 9 MN006147A01-AE Contents 6.31.13.6 Turning Off Rearmable External Alarms.............................................. 126 6.31.14 Programmable Button Configurations for Gun Lock.......................................... 126 6.31.14.1 Unlocking All Gun Locks...................................................................... 126 6.31.15 Action Consolidation Mode................................................................................ 127 6.31.15.1 Activating the Action Consolidation Activities.......................................127 6.31.15.2 Deactivating the Action Consolidation Activities.................................. 128 6.31.16 Front Panel Programming..................................................................................128 6.31.16.1 Initiating the FPP Feature.................................................................... 128 6.31.16.2 Changing Password (Optional)............................................................ 129 6.31.16.3 Selecting a Channel within a Zone.......................................................129 6.31.16.4 Changing a Channel Parameter...........................................................130 6.31.16.5 Editing Parameters...............................................................................130 Chapter 7: Accessories........................................................................................ 132 Legal and Compliance Statements........................................................................133 Disclaimer.................................................................................................................................. 133 Declaration of Conformity.......................................................................................................... 133 Important Safety Information..................................................................................................... 134 Notice to Users (FCC) .............................................................................................................. 134 FCC Licensing Information............................................................................................. 135 Applying for Canadian License.................................................................................................. 135 Maritime Radio Use in the VHF Frequency Range............................................... 137 Special Channel Assignments................................................................................................... 137 Emergency Channel....................................................................................................... 137 Non-Commercial Call Channel....................................................................................... 137 Operating Frequency Requirements..........................................................................................137 Declaration of Compliance for the Use of Distress and Safety Frequencies............................. 140 Technical Parameters for Interfacing External Data Sources....................................................140 Limited Warranty.....................................................................................................141 MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS COMMUNICATION PRODUCTS................................................... 141 I. WHAT THIS WARRANTY COVERS AND FOR HOW LONG:............................................... 141 II. GENERAL PROVISIONS:..................................................................................................... 142 III. STATE LAW RIGHTS:..........................................................................................................142 IV. HOW TO GET WARRANTY SERVICE:...............................................................................142 V. WHAT THIS WARRANTY DOES NOT COVER:.................................................................. 142 VI. PATENT AND SOFTWARE PROVISIONS:.........................................................................143 VII. GOVERNING LAW:.............................................................................................................143 VIII. For Australia Only...............................................................................................................144 SERVICE................................................................................................................................... 144 Glossary...................................................................................................................145 10 MN006147A01-AE List of Figures List of Figures Figure 1: APX E5 Control Head Home Screen with Channel Color Backlight Feature ......................... 32 11 MN006147A01-AE List of Tables List of Tables Table 1: Text Entry Modes .................................................................................................................... 22 Table 2: Keypad Characters ..................................................................................................................22 Table 3: LED Indications ....................................................................................................................... 27 Table 4: TMS Status Icons .................................................................................................................... 30 Table 5: Call Type Icons ........................................................................................................................31 Table 6: ViQi Virtual Partner Queries .................................................................................................... 42 Table 7: Emergency Operation Scenarios .............................................................................................64 Table 8: Parameter Editing Keys .........................................................................................................130 Table 9: VHF Marine Channel List ...................................................................................................... 138 12 MN006147A01-AE Software Version Software Version All the features described in the following sections are supported by the software version R25.00.00 or later. See Accessing the Radio Information to determine the software version of your radio. Contact your system administrator for more details of all the supported features. 13 MN006147A01-AE Chapter 1: Read Me First Chapter 1 Read Me First This User Guide covers the basic operation of the radio. However, your dealer or system administrator may have customized your radio for your specific needs. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. 1.1 Notations Used in This Manual Notations such as Warning, Caution, and Notice are used throughout the text in this publication. These notations are used to emphasize that safety hazards exist, and the care that must be taken or observed. WARNING: An operational procedure, practice, or condition and so on, which may result in injury or death if not carefully observed. CAUTION: An operational procedure, practice, or condition and so on, which may result in damage to the equipment if not carefully observed. NOTE: An operational procedure, practice, or condition and so on, which is essential to emphasize. The following special notations identify certain items. Example Description Buttons and keys are shown in bold print or as an icon. Menu entries are shown similar to the way they appear on the display of the radio. This means Press the right side of the 4-Way Navigation Button. Home button or Phone 1.2 Radio Care Proper radio usage and care ensure efficient operation and long life of the product. The following are suggestions to assist you in troubleshooting possible operating problems. CAUTION: The cables that connect to the rear of the radio could have live voltage on some of their pins. Do not remove or reconnect these cables. Only a qualified radio technician should perform this task. Service performed by unauthorized personnel may cause the radio to transmit an emergency alarm even if the unit is turned off. If your radio is locked up or the display shows FAIL 01/09, power cycle the radio. If this does not correct the condition, take the radio to a qualified radio technician for service. If radio operation is intermittent, check with other persons using the system for similar problems before taking the radio in for service. Similar problems indicate a system malfunction rather than a radio failure. If symptoms persist or if your unit exhibits other problems, contact a qualified radio technician. 14 MN006147A01-AE Chapter 1: Read Me First 1.2.1 Cleaning the External Surface of the Radio Prerequisites:

Procedure:

CAUTION: Do not use solvents to clean your radio. Spirits may permanently damage the radio housing. Do not submerge the radio in detergent solution. 1 Combine 1 teaspoon of mild dishwashing detergent to 1 gallon of water (0.5% solution). 2 Apply the solution sparingly with a stiff, non-metallic, short-bristled brush, ensuring that excess detergent does not get entrapped near the connectors, controls, or crevices. 3 Dry the radio thoroughly with a soft, absorbent, lint-free cloth. 4 Ensure that no water remains entrapped near the connectors, cracks, or crevices. 1.3 Additional Performance Enhancement The following performance enhancements are some of the latest creations designed to enhance the security, quality, and efficiency of the radios. 1.3.1 ASTRO 25 Enhanced Data ASTRO 25 Enhanced Data is optimized to handle different message sizes and variable update rates from different applications of the radio. To improve data channel efficiency and enable denser network traffic, add Enhanced Data to the Integrated Data system with a software installation. 1.3.2 Dynamic System Resilience Dynamic System Resilience (DSR) ensures that the radio system is seamlessly switched to a backup master site dynamically during a system failure. DSR also provides indications such as failure detection, fault recovery, and redundancy within the system. DSR also supports mechanisms related to the Integrated Voice and Data (IV&D) or data centric. CrossTalk Prevention feature prevents crosstalk scenarios and allows the adjustment of the internal SSI clock rate of the radio. This reduces the possibility of radio frequency interfering spurs. 1.3.3 CrossTalk Prevention 1.3.4 Encrypted Integrated Data Encrypted Integrated Data (EID) provides security encryption and authentication of Integrated Voice and Data (IV&D) bearer service. This bridges the communication between the radio and the Customer Enterprise Network. 15 MN006147A01-AE Chapter 1: Read Me First 1.3.5 SecureNet SecureNet allows you to perform secured communications on an Analog or Motorola Data Communication (MDC) channel. The MDC Over-the-Air Rekeying (OTAR) feature allows you to perform OTAR activities on an MDC channel. 1.3.6 Over-the-Air Rekeying The Over-the-Air Rekeying (OTAR) feature allows the dispatcher to remotely reprogram encryption keys in the radio after a rekey request. Single-system OTAR Multi-system OTAR This feature allows a radio to be rekeyed by only one Key Management Facility (KMF) or Key Management Controller (KMC). This feature allows a radio to be rekeyed by multiple KMFs. After an initial programming, the radio is able to seamlessly move to different secure systems associated to a newly selected channel. NOTE: This feature must be preprogrammed by a qualified radio technician. Contact your system administrator for more information. 1.3.7 P25 Digital Vehicular Repeater System Motorola Solutions offers an MSI Certified APX compatible, third party, P25 Digital Vehicular Repeater System (DVRS). This provides low-cost portable radio coverage in areas where only mobile radio coverage is available. The system sends DVRS firmware and configuration updates over-the-air. The following scenarios occur during the update:

If the update is accepted, the display shows UPDATING DVRS. If the update fails, the display shows DVRS UPDT FAILED. Contact your system administrator for more information. NOTE: Portable subscriber units enabled in the system for Radio Authentication shall be able to authenticate regardless of whether they are communicating directly on the system or by using a DVRS. DVRS can also work with SmartConnect to use broadband coverage for the in-vehicle mobile. Portable radios communicate through the in-vehicle mobile to the system through the LTE, Satellite or Wi-Fi connection. This extends the system coverage when you are away from the vehicle. 1.3.8 Conventional Talkgroup and Radio Scan Enhancements Enhancements have been made to the Conventional Talkgroup at the system to improve the Scan feature operation significantly when multiple agencies are using a single conventional radio frequency channel. These enhancements allow you to use Selective Squelch to operate on only the subset of talkgroups that are relevant to the users rather than all talkgroups on the channel. The enhancements support the following Scan mode:

Mixed Vote Scan. Standard Conventional Scan. 16 MN006147A01-AE Chapter 1: Read Me First Priority Operation. Up to 30 different talkgroups can be supported using conventional channels. A maximum of four talkgroups can be supported when Vote Scan channels are being used. Smart PTT is supported with this enhancement as Smart PTT prevents you from transmitting while other users are on the channel. NOTE: User Selectable Talkgroups are not compatible with this Conventional Talkgroup Enhancement. 1.4 What Your Dealer/System Administrator Can Tell You If the radio is to be operated in extreme temperatures (less than -30 C or more than +60 C), check with your system administrator for the correct radio settings. You can consult your dealer or system administrator about the following:

Is your radio programmed with any preset conventional channels?

Which buttons have been programmed to access other features?

What optional accessories may suit your needs?

NOTE: Specifications may vary for different radio models. Contact your system administrator for more information. 17 MN006147A01-AE Chapter 2: Preparing Your Radio for Use Chapter 2 Preparing Your Radio for Use This section provides simple instructions to prepare your radio for use. 2.1 Turning On the Radio Procedure:

1 Press and hold the Power Button to power on the radio. After a short time, the red, yellow, and green LEDs light up. The display shows the following:

Current zone and channel text Codeplug Alias Menu items on the home screen The backlight turns on to the last selected dim level. NOTE:

If Fail ##/## appears on the display, the radio is unable to function until the condition is corrected. If Error ##/## appears, some non-critical data has been changed. If the display goes blank, or if the unit appears to be locked up, see Radio Care on page 14 for more information. If Ch mismatch appears, it means that:

The Control Head has been connected to an incompatible transceiver, or vice versa. The wrong mixture of control heads (for example, O5 control head and E5 control head) is connected to the transceiver. If SW/HW MISMATCH appears, it means that the control head has been connected to the transceiver with an incompatible software version. To resolve this, update the transceiver software with a version that supports the connected control heads. If your radio does not power up, contact your system administrator. 2 To turn off the radio, press the Power button after the LEDs light up. 2.2 Adjusting the Volume Procedure:

1 To increase the volume, rotate the Volume Knob clockwise. 2 To decrease the volume, rotate the knob counterclockwise. 18 MN006147A01-AE Chapter 2: Preparing Your Radio for Use 2.3 Validating Compatibility During Power Up The radio validates and updates the software and hardware of your control head(s) during power-up. During validation, the display shows Maintenance Mode Remote Device promptly followed by other maintenance statuses. Procedure:

Press the Power On/Off Button to reset when the display shows Update done Please reset upon completion, or when the display shows Update failed Please reset when it fails to update. If the updates are incomplete, the radio runs the Maintenance Mode and the display shows Maintenance Mode Remote Device; promptly followed by other maintenance statuses again. 19 MN006147A01-AE Chapter 3: Radio Controls Chapter 3 Radio Controls This chapter explains the buttons and functions to control the radio. 3.1 E5 Control Head and Microphone NOTE: The microphone is not part of the radio. It is an optional accessory. Number Description Press and hold to turn on/off your radio. Power Button LED Indicators Volume Knob Screen Display Mode Knob Rotate clockwise to increase the volume. Rotate counterclockwise to decrease the volume. Rotate this knob to scroll through the channel list. Bluetooth Pairing Location Indicator Orange Button Home Button Press to return to the Home screen. This button is usually programmed as the Emergency button. 1 2 3 4 5 6*

7 8 20

* Depending on the version, your mobile radio could support either Bluetooth technology or Wire-

less Pair. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more details of all the features supported. These radio controls/buttons are programmable. 34576211312111098PZone 1Channel 1CallRSSIZoneChanScan18192220212315141617 MN006147A01-AE Chapter 3: Radio Controls Number Description 4-Way Navigation Buttons Use these buttons for list scrolling and navigating around the menu hierarchy. Menu Select Buttons Press to enter the menu corresponding to the button. P Button Use this programmable button to access a preprogrammed function or enable or disable a feature. 12 Dimmer Button Press to adjust the display brightness. Press and hold to toggle between day and night mode. Accessory Port (Microphone) Accessory No-Dot Button (Purple) Use this programmable button to access a preprogrammed function or enable or disable a feature. Press and hold to talk in simplex calls or to initiate a group call, release it to listen. Push-to-Talk (PTT) Button Accessory 1-Dot Button Use this programmable button to access a preprogrammed function or enable or disable a feature. Accessory 2-Dot Button Use this programmable button to access a preprogrammed function or enable or disable a feature. Data Feature Button Press to enter the Text Messaging Service feature screen. Press and hold to enter the Inbox menu. Home Button (Microphone) Press to return to the Home screen. Navigation Button (Microphone) Use these buttons for list scrolling and navigating around the menu hierarchy. Press to cancel the current operation and return to the previous screen. Press to select the option that appears on the screen. Cancel Button Okay/Select Button Keypad Buttons Use the keypad to enter alphanumeric characters for dialing, contact entries, and text messages. 9 10 11 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 3.2 Keypad Use the keypad to enter alphanumeric text on your radio. 21 Your radio uses icons to indicate the selected text entry mode. Refer to the following table for the supported modes. MN006147A01-AE Chapter 3: Radio Controls Table 1: Text Entry Modes Icon Description Text entry is in hexadecimal mode. Text entry is in numeric mode. The first character of the text entry is capitalized. Text entry is in normal text mode. Text entry is in uppercase mode. Text entry is in lowercase mode. Text entry is in lowercase with predicted words shown at the bottom of the screen. Text entry is in mixed case and with predicted words shown at the bottom of the screen. Text entry is in uppercase with predicted words shown at the bottom of the screen. Depending on the selected mode, each key press generates a different character of the alphabet. The following table shows the characters generated by each key in their supported modes. Table 2: Keypad Characters Mode Output Numeric/Uppercase/Lowercase 1 . , ? ! ; @ _ - * # & $ / + = \ ( ) Hexadecimal Mode Key 1 key 2 key 3 key 4 key 5 key 22 Numeric Uppercase Lowercase Hexadecimal Numeric Uppercase Lowercase Hexadecimal Numeric Uppercase Lowercase Numeric Uppercase Lowercase 1 2 3 4 5 A B C a b c 2 A B C D E F d e f 3 D E F G H I g h i J K L j k l MN006147A01-AE Chapter 3: Radio Controls Mode Numeric Uppercase Lowercase Numeric Uppercase Lowercase Numeric Uppercase Lowercase Numeric Uppercase Lowercase Key 6 key 7 key 8 key 9 key

* key

# key Output M N O m n o P Q R S p q r s T U V t u v W X Y Z w x y z 6 7 8 9 0 0 key Numeric/Hexadecimal Uppercase/Lowercase Toggle between mixed case mode, upper-

case mode, and lowercase mode. Numeric/Uppercase/Lowercase Space Numeric/Uppercase/Lowercase Toggle between numeric and letter mode. 3.3 Programmable Features Your system administrator can program the programmable buttons as shortcuts to radio functions or preset channels/groups depending on the duration of a button press. Some functions can also be programmed to the radio switches. 3.3.1 Assignable Radio Functions Action Consolidation Allows the radio to execute a specific sequence of actions that combine audio, visual, and location data. For example, Mode Change, Lightbar, Siren, Direct Status, and Location Data. Allows your radio to function like a pager, or to verify if a radio is active on the system. Allows you to answer a private call or phone call. Call Alert Call Response Channel Contacts Selects a channel. Allows you to access the Contacts menu. 23 MN006147A01-AE Chapter 3: Radio Controls Dynamic ID (Conventional Only) Allows you to edit the ASTRO Individual ID and/or MDC Primary ID of the radio. NOTE:

If the Dynamic ID menu key is not pre-programmed in the radio, use dongle to display the menu key. Press the menu key and enter the password to view or edit the ASTRO Individual ID and/or MDC Primary ID of the radio. If the password is not pre-programmed, press the menu key to directly view or edit the ASTRO Individual ID and/or MDC Primary ID of the radio. Dynamic Priority (Conventional Only) Allows any channel in a Scan List (except for a Priority-One channel) to temporarily replace the Priority-Two channel. Depending on the programming, initiates or cancels an emergency alarm or call. Emergency Gun Lock Triggers the Gun Lock to open. In-Call User Alert Allows the radio to remain muted to affiliated talkgroup calls while operating on the current Trunking Personality or conventional channel. Enables users of multiple control heads to talk to each other using the control heads in a multi-

control head setup. Internet Protocol Address Displays the Internet Protocol (IP) address, device name, and status of the radio. Displays the current location (latitude, longitude, time, and date), and also the distance and bearing to another location, or toggles GPS/Location between on and off. Intercom Location Message Allows you to access the message list. Monitor (Conventional Only) Monitors a selected channel for all radio traffic until the function is disabled. Multiple Private Line (Conventional Only) Allows you to access the Multiple Private Line lists. Temporarily removes an unwanted channel, except for priority channels and the designated transmit channel from the scan list. Nuisance Delete Phone Call Priority Dispatch Radio Profiles Recent Calls Rekey Request 24 Allows you to make and receive calls similar to standard phone calls. Private Call (Trunking Only) Allows a call from one individual radio to another. Allows you to call the dispatcher on a different talkgroup. Allows you to access a set of preprogrammed visual and audio settings of the radio. Allows you to view the recent call history of your radio. Notifies the dispatcher that a new encryption key is needed. MN006147A01-AE Chapter 3: Radio Controls Remote Monitor Enables the system administrator to remotely command a targeted radio. Repeater Access Button (RAB) (Conventional Only) Allows you to manually send a repeater access codeword. Reprogram Request (Trunking Only) Notifies the dispatcher that a new dynamic regrouping assignment is needed. Request-To-Talk (Conventional Only) Notifies the dispatcher that you want to send a voice call. Scan Short press Toggles the scan function between on and off. Long press Enables Scan List Programming and selects the scan list for editing. Secure/Clear Toggles secure transmission between on and off. Selective Call (Conventional Only) Calls an assigned radio. Siren Turns different Siren Tones on or off. Site Display/Search (Trunking Only) Short press Displays the current site ID and Received Signal Strength Indicator (RSSI) value. Long press Performs site search for Automatic Multiple Site Select (AMSS) or SmartZone operation (long press). Site Lock/Unlock (Trunking Only) Allows your radio to lock onto a specific site. Status (Trunking Only) Sends data calls to the dispatcher about a predefined status. Status Selects operational status. Talkaround/Direct (Conventional Only) Talkgroup (Conventional Only) Initiates a call to a preprogrammed group of radios. Text Messaging Service (TMS) Allows you to access the Text Messaging Service (TMS) menu. TMS Quick Text Selects a predefined message. Toggles between using a repeater or communicating directly with another radio. Allows you to log on to the server with a personally identifiable user name. Enables the Virtual Partner feature and allows you to perform queries using ViQi. User Virtual Partner Zone Down Zone Select Zone Up Toggles downward through the zones in the radio. Selects a zone from the switch. Toggles upward through the zones in the radio. 25 MN006147A01-AE Chapter 3: Radio Controls 3.3.2 Assignable Settings or Utility Functions Dim Front/Rear Horns/Lights Low Power Toggles between one of the two control heads. Toggles the horns and lights feature on and off. Short Press changes the display brightness, while Long Press toggle between day/night mode. Toggles the transmit power level between high and low. Voice Announcement Audibly indicates the current feature mode, zone, or channel that you have been assigned to. 26 MN006147A01-AE Status Indicators Chapter 4 Status Indicators This section explains the status indicators of the radio. 4.1 LED Indications The Status LED shows the operational status of your radio. Table 3: LED Indications Indication Solid red Status Radio is transmitting. Double blinking red Radio is transmitting an emergency alarm or call. Rapid blinking red Radio has failed the self-test upon powering up or encountered a fatal error. Solid yellow Channel is busy in conventional mode. Blinking yellow Radio is receiving a secured transmission. Solid green Blinking green Radio is powering up or is on a non-priority channel while in the Scan List Programming mode. Radio is receiving an individual or telephone call or is on a Priority-Two channel while in the Scan List Programming mode. Rapid blinking green Radio is on a Priority-One channel while in the Scan List Programming mode. 4.2 Status Icons The liquid crystal display (LCD) of your radio shows the radio status, text entries, and menu entries. The following are the icons that appear on the display of the radio. Icon Description Radio is receiving a call or data. Radio is transmitting a call or data. Radio has received an Individual Call. 27 MN006147A01-AE Chapter 4: Status Indicators Icon Description The number of bars displayed represents the received signal strength for the current site (trunking only). The more stripes in the icon, the stronger the signal. The radio has roamed to and is currently registered to a foreign system. Direct On Off Radio is configured for direct radio-to-radio communication

(during conventional operation only). Radio is connected with other radios through a repeater. Selected channel is being monitored (during conventional opera-

tion only). In-Call User Alert feature is enabled. Voice muting of the affili-

ated trunking talkgroup or selected conventional channel is acti-

vated. When the radio displays L, the radio is set at Low power. When the radio displays H, the radio is set at High power. Radio detects activity on channel designated as Priority-One. Radio detects activity on channel designated as Priority-Two. Radio is in the view or program mode. Radio is scanning a scan list. Blinking dot Steady dot On steady View mode Blinking Program mode The vote scan feature is enabled. On Off Secure operation. Clear operation. Blinking Receiving an encrypted voice call. or 28 Icon Description MN006147A01-AE Chapter 4: Status Indicators On Off On On Blinking Inverted AES secure operation. Clear operation. Blinking Receiving an encrypted voice call. Feature is enabled and GPS signal is available. Blinking Feature is enabled, but no GPS signal is available. User Login Indicator (IP Packet Data) User is associated with the radio. Device registration or user registration with the server failed due to an invalid username or pin. User successfully logged in to the secured IP Packet Data. Data activity is present. Bluetooth is on and ready for Bluetooth connection. The Wireless-Pair device is on. The Wireless-Pair device is connected. Steady LTE system is available and connected. Blinking ARS user login failed while in LTE system. The radio is receiving LTE signal. The radio is transmitting LTE signal. The radio is receiving and transmitting LTE signal. 29 MN006147A01-AE Chapter 4: Status Indicators Icon Description Indicating ARS user logged in successfully with LTE system. The radio is receiving LTE signal with ARS user logged in. The radio is transmitting LTE signal with ARS user logged in. The radio is receiving and transmitting LTE signal with ARS user logged in. The radio Wi-Fi network is connected. The number of bars dis-

played represents the signal strength of the Wi-Fi signal. The current channel supports SmartConnect. On Inverted The current channel is connected through the SmartConnect feature. Description The Inbox is full. The text message is sent. The text message cannot be sent. The selected text message in the Inbox is not read. The selected text message in the Inbox is read. Compose a message with normal priority and without a re-

quest for a reply. Toggle on the Request Reply feature before sending the message. The following icons appear on the radio display when you send and receive text messages. 4.3 TMS Status Icons Table 4: TMS Status Icons Icon 30 Icon Description MN006147A01-AE Chapter 4: Status Indicators Toggle on the Priority feature before sending the message. Compose a message with a priority status and a request for a reply. Indicates the index of the current message that you are view-

ing. When you make or receive a call, or view selected call lists, call icons appear on the radio main display to indicate the different call types associated with an alias or ID. 4.4 Call Type Icons Table 5: Call Type Icons Icon Description Radio number. Radio number added to a Call List. Mobile number. Mobile number added to a Call List. Landline phone number. Landline phone number added to a Call List. Incoming call or data. Outgoing call or data. 4.5 Intelligent Lighting Indicators This feature temporarily changes the keypad backlight color and the display background color (except the radio status and menu entries region) of the radio to help signal that a radio event has occurred. Backlight and Bar Color Notification When Orange Emergency Alerts The radio initiates an emergency alarm or call. The radio receives an emergency alarm or call. Red Critical Alerts The radio is out of range. 31 MN006147A01-AE Chapter 4: Status Indicators Backlight and Bar Color Notification When Green Call Alerts The radio receives a private call. The radio enters Failsoft mode. The radio is unable to establish a full connection with the system. The radio is unable to authenticate or register with the system. The radio receives a phone call. The radio receives a call alert. The radio receives a selective call. The radio enters Geofence. 4.6 Channel Color Backlight The Channel Color Backlight feature allows you to identify your selected channel based on the color of the channel text and the menu options on the home screen. This color is also reflected on the control head buttons, knobs, keypad microphone depending on the Customer Programming Software (CPS) configuration of your radio. NOTE: Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. Figure 1: APX E5 Control Head Home Screen with Channel Color Backlight Feature Description Channel text Menu options No. 1 2 32 Zone 1Channel 1CallRSSIZoneChanScan12 MN006147A01-AE Chapter 4: Status Indicators 4.7 Alert Tones Your radio uses alert tones to inform you of the condition of your radio. The following table lists these tones and when they occur. You Hear Tone Name When Private Conversation When a Private Call is received. Call Alert When a Call Alert page is received. Two high-

pitched tones Four high-

pitched tones every five sec-

onds Single, high-pitch-

ed tone Four high-

pitched tones Sound simi-

lar to a tele-

phone busy signal A series of two short, high-pitch-

ed tones A series of low-pitched tones fol-

lowed by a series of high-pitch-

ed tones A series of high-pitch-

ed tones followed by a series of low-pitched tones Continu-

ous, low-

pitched tone Central Acknowledge When the central controller of the system receives the Mobile Unit Acknowl-

edge System Busy Call Alert, emergency alarm, reprogram request, or sta-

tus/message transmission. When a Call Alert page is received by the intended unit, or the emergency alarm, reprogram request, or status/message transmission is acknowledged by the intended dispatcher. When the PTT button is pressed, indicates transmission fail because all system radio channels are in use. Re-

lease the PTT button and wait for callback. Automatic Call Back When a channel is now available for your previously requested transmission. Talk Permit (Optional) When the PTT button is pressed, this tone indicates that the system is accepting your transmission. Scan Alert On When Scan feature is activated through the preprog-

rammed button. Scan Alert Off When Scan feature is deactivated through the preprog-

rammed button. Talk-Prohibit Smart PTT Inhibit When the PTT button is pressed, this tone indicates that the the system is out of service. When the PTT button is pressed, this tone indicates that the channel is busy with the Smart PTT feature enabled. 33 MN006147A01-AE Chapter 4: Status Indicators You Hear Tone Name When Out-of-Range Illegal Mode Auto Power Off Failsoft Time-Out Timer Warn-

ing or Menu Inactive Exit Valid Key Invalid Key Single, high-pitch-

ed tone ev-

ery nine seconds Brief low-

pitched tone Single, short, high-

pitched tone Single, low-

pitched tone When the PTT button is pressed, this tone indicates that the radio is not in the range of the trunked radio system. Illegal Mode When you have entered When you have entered a mode where normal system traffic will be missed, or you are attempting something which is not permitted. Examples include: forgetting to exit the telephone interconnect mode after a call ends

(fleet and subfleet calls cannot be received), attempt-

ing to transmit on a receive-only conventional mode, attempting to select a dynamic mode where no dynamic ID assignment has been made. Powers off the radio when no user actions occur during a preprogrammed length of time. When a trunked system central controller failure in an unmuted receive condition. The radio reverts from trunked operation to a system similar to conventional radio repeater operation. Other system users can be heard sharing the channel. When your present transmission will soon be disabled. When you press a valid key, or you enter a feature con-

figuration state, or you are receiving or transmitting in the clear mode on secure models (with TX Clear Alert Tones enabled). When you tried to make an invalid key press, or that an emergency alarm, reprogram request, or status/mes-

sage was not acknowledged. 34 MN006147A01-AE General Radio Operation Chapter 5 General Radio Operation This chapter explains the general operations of your radio. 5.1 Selecting a Zone When and where to use:A zone is a group of channels. Do one of the following to select a radio channel. You can use these options interchangeably depending on your preference and the programmed functions. Procedure:

Select a zone using the radio menu Zone:

a. b. or to Zone and press the Menu Select button directly below Zone. or to the required zone, or use the keypad to enter the zone number. c. Press the Menu Select button directly below Sel to confirm the displayed zone. 5.2 Selecting a Radio Channel When and where to use:A channel is a group of radio characteristics, such as transmit/receive frequency pairs. Do one of the following to select a radio channel. You can use the options interchangeably depending on your preference and the programmed functions. Procedure:

Select a channel using the Mode knob:

a. Rotate the Mode knob until the display shows the desired channel. Select a channel using the radio menu Chan :

a. or to Chan . b. Press the Menu Select button directly below Chan . c. or to the required channel. d. Press the Menu Select button directly below Sel to confirm the selected channel. 5.3 Selecting a Channel by using Channel Search Button This feature allows you to do a quick search for a specific channel in your radio by keying in the alias of the channel. Procedure:

1 Perform one of the following actions:

Press the preprogrammed Channel Search button. 35 MN006147A01-AE Chapter 5: General Radio Operation or to ChSr and press the Menu Select button directly below ChSr. A blinking cursor appears on the Channel Search screen. 2 Use the keypad to type or edit your channel name. 3 To initiate searching, press the Menu Select button directly below ChSr once the entry is done. To exit this procedure, press the Menu Select button directly below Cncl . One of the following scenarios occurs:

The display shows Searching. Once found, the display shows the matched channel name and the radio changes its transmission to the selected channel. If the radio is triggered to search for an empty entry, the display shows Invalid entry. Repeat step 2 to search again. If the entry does not match, the display shows Channel name not found.Repeat step 2 to search again; or press or the Menu Select button directly below Exit to exit. 5.4 Mode Select Feature Mode Select allows a long press to save the current zone and channel of your radio to a programmable button, keypad button, or a softkey. Once programmed, the short-press of that button or softkey changes the transmission to the saved zone and channel. NOTE: Your radio must be preprogrammed for you to use this feature. 5.4.1 Saving a Zone and a Channel to a Softkey When and where to use:Five softkeys are available for you to save the frequently used zone and channel. Procedure:

2 or to MS1, MS2 ... or MS5. 1 Toggle from your current zone and channel to the required zone and channel. 3 Press and hold the Menu Select button directly below one of the softkeys (MS1MS5). You hear a short, medium-pitched tone when the zone and channel is saved. NOTE: To change the programmed zone and channel, repeat this procedure. Short press of the programmed softkey changes your current transmission to the zone and channel programmed in this softkey. 5.4.2 Saving a Zone and a Channel to a Button When and where to use:You can save the frequently used zone and channel to the programmable buttons and keypad digit 0 to 9 buttons. 1 Toggle from your current zone and channel to the required zone and channel. Procedure:

36 MN006147A01-AE Chapter 5: General Radio Operation 2 Press and hold the button you desire to program. You hear a short, medium-pitched tone when the zone and channel is saved. NOTE:

Short press of the programmed button changes your current transmission to the zone and channel programmed in this button. 5.5 Receiving and Responding to a Radio Call Once you have selected the required channel and/or zone, you can proceed to receive and respond to calls. The radio shows different indicators based on the system the radio is configured. The LED lights up solid red while the radio is transmitting. In conventional mode, the LED lights up solid yellow when the radio is receiving a transmission. In trunking mode, there is no LED indication when the radio receives a transmission. If the radio is receiving a secure transmission, the LED blinks yellow. 5.5.1 Receiving and Responding to a Talkgroup Call When and where to use:When you receive a talkgroup call (while on the Home screen) the radio displays the following depending on the system your radio is configured to:

For ASTRO Conventional system, the LED lights up solid yellow. The display shows the talkgroup alias or ID, and the caller alias or ID. For Trunking system, the display shows the caller alias or ID. Procedure:

1 Hold the microphone vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth. 2 Press the PTT button to respond to the call. The LED lights up solid red. 3 Release the PTT button to listen. 5.5.2 Receiving and Responding to a Private Call (Trunking Only) A Private Call is a call from one individual radio to another. Other users in the current talkgroup cannot hear the one-to-one call between the two radios. The calling radio automatically verifies that the receiving radio is active on the system and can display the caller ID. When and where to use:

When you receive a Private Call, you hear two alert tones and the LED blinks green. The display shows CALL RECEIVED and the caller alias or ID. Procedure:

begin. 1 Press the Menu Select button directly below Resp within 20 seconds after the call indicators If the caller alias is in the call list, the display shows the caller alias during the call. If the caller name is not in the call list, the display shows the caller ID. 37 MN006147A01-AE Chapter 5: General Radio Operation 2 Press and hold the PTT button to talk. Release the PTT button to listen. 3 Press to hang up and return to the Home screen. NOTE: If you press the PTT button before pressing the Menu Select button directly below Resp, your conversation is broadcasted to all members of the talkgroup. If 20 seconds pass before you press the Menu Select button directly below Resp, you are not responding privately to the call. Instead, you initiate a Private Call. 5.5.3 Receiving and Responding to a Telephone Call (Trunking Only) This feature allows you to receive calls similar to standard phone calls from a landline phone. When and where to use:

When you receive a Telephone Call, you hear a telephone-type ringing and the LED blinks green. The backlight of the screen turns green.The display shows PHONE CALL and the call received icon blinks. Procedure:

3 Press screen. 1 Press the Menu Select button directly below Resp. 2 Press and hold the PTT button to talk. Release the PTT button to listen. or the Menu Select button directly below Exit to hang up and return to the Home 5.6 Methods to Make a Radio Call You can select a zone, channel, subscriber ID, or talkgroup by using:

The preprogrammed Zone menu. The Mode Knob . A preprogrammed button. The Contacts list (see Contacts on page 51). 5.6.1 Making a Talkgroup Call Procedure:

1 Perform one of the following actions:

or to Tgrp and press the Menu Select button directly below Tgrp. The display shows the last-selected talkgroup. Press the Menu Select button directly below Sel . Use the Mode Knob to select the channel with the desired talkgroup. 2 Hold the microphone vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth. 3 Press the PTT button to make the call. The radio shows different indicators based on the system the radio is configured. For ASTRO Conventional system, the LED lights up solid red. The display shows the talkgroup alias or ID. 38 MN006147A01-AE Chapter 5: General Radio Operation For Trunking system, the LED lights up solid red. 4 Speak clearly into the microphone. 5 Release the PTT button to listen. 5.6.2 Making a Private Call (Trunking Only) When and where to use:This feature allows you to send an individual Call Alert or page if there is no answer from the target radio. See Sending a Call Alert Page on page 59 for more information. Procedure:

1 Perform one of the following actions:

To access this feature using a preprogrammed button, press the preprogrammed Private Call button to dial the preprogrammed ID (number) and initiate the Private Call. Proceed to step 4. or to Call , and press the Menu Select button directly below Call . The display shows the last transmitted or received ID. 2 To select the required ID, perform one of the following actions:

Press the Menu Select button directly below Cnts to scroll through and select the required ID. Press the Menu Select button directly below List to go to the first number of the call list. or to the required ID. Use the keypad to enter the required ID. 3 Press the PTT button to initiate the Private Call. If the receiving unit is in service, a telephone-type ringing sounds. The display shows Calling... <Number> or Calling... <Alias>. 4 Hold the microphone vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth. When you are connected, the display shows the ID of the target radio. If no acknowledgment is received, the display shows No acknowledge. If the target radio does not respond before the time-out, the display shows No answer. 5 Press and hold the PTT button to talk. Release the PTT button to listen. 6 Press to return to the Home screen. 5.6.3 Making a Telephone Call (Trunking Only) This feature allows you to make calls similar to standard phone calls to a mobile or landline phone. Procedure:

1 Perform one of the following actions:

To access this feature using a preprogrammed button, press the preprogrammed Phone Call button to dial the preprogrammed phone number. Proceed to step 4. or to Phon, and press the Menu Select button directly below Phon. The display shows the last transmitted or received ID. 39 MN006147A01-AE Chapter 5: General Radio Operation 2 To select the required ID, perform one of the following actions:

Press the Menu Select button directly below Cnts to scroll through and select the required Press the Menu Select button directly below List to go to the first number of the call list. or to the required phone number. Use the keypad to enter the required phone number. 3 Press the PTT button to dial the phone number. 4 Hold the microphone vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth. 5 When your call is answered, press and hold the PTT button to talk. Release the PTT button to ID. listen. 6 Press to return to the Home screen. See Alert Tones on page 33 for more information if your call is not answered. 5.7 Switching Between Repeater or Direct Operation Button The Repeater Operation increases the radio coverage area by connecting with other radios through a repeater. The transmit and receive frequencies are different. The Direct or talkaround operation allows you to bypass the repeater and connect directly to another radio. The transmit and receive frequencies are the same. Procedure:

Perform one of the following actions:

Press the preprogrammed Repeater/Direct switch to toggle between talkaround and repeater mode. or to Dir and press the Menu Select button directly below Dir. 5.8 Monitor Feature The monitor feature ensures that a channel is clear before transmitting. The lack of static on a digital channel when the users switch from analog to digital radios is not an indication that the radio is malfunctioning. Digital technology quiets the transmission by removing the noise from the signal and allows only the clear voice or data information to be heard. 5.8.1 Monitoring a Channel Procedure:

Monitoring a Channel in Conventional Modes:

a. Lift the microphone off the hook. b. Listen for activity on that channel. c. Adjust the Volume Knob if necessary. Monitoring a Channel in Trunked Modes:

a. Lift the microphone off the hook. 40 d. If you hear no activity, press and hold the PTT button to start your conversation. MN006147A01-AE Chapter 5: General Radio Operation b. Press the PTT button. c. If you hear two, short, high-pitched tones, or if you hear no tone and the steadily, then proceed with your message. indicator lights d. Release the PTT button to receive transmission. If you are not in the range of the system, you may hear a continuous low-pitched tone and the display shows OUT OF RANGE. 5.8.2 Monitoring Conventional Mode This feature allows you to monitor channel traffic on conventional channels by defeating the coded squelch. Thus, you can listen to another active user on the channel. This way, you may be prevented from taking over the conversation of another user. When and where to use:Your radio may be preprogrammed to receive Private-Line (PL) calls. Procedure:

1 To activate monitoring, perform one of the following actions:

At Home mode where the default zone and channel are being displayed, or to Mon and press the Menu Select button directly below Mon momentarily. Take the control head off the hook. The display shows Monitor On. You hear all channel traffic. 2 Press the Menu Select button again to deactivate the monitoring. The display shows Monitor off. Pressing the Menu Select button again turns monitor off and you do not hear all channel traffic. If you try to transmit on a receive-only channel, you hear an invalid tone until you release the PTT button. 41 MN006147A01-AE Chapter 6: Advanced Features Chapter 6 6.1 ViQi Advanced Features This chapter explains the operations of the features available in your radio. ViQi is a virtual assistant that helps you manage your radio and perform information lookups using voice commands. This feature is purpose-built for public safety and is active when you press the assigned ViQi button on the radio, Remote Speaker Microphone (RSM), or compatible mobile microphone. NOTE: This feature is a selling feature. ViQi Virtual Partner ViQi Virtual Partner helps you to look up information such as license plate, driver's license, and Vehicle ID Number (VIN), and she responds with a result to your query. Table 6: ViQi Virtual Partner Queries The following table shows the queries supported by the ViQi Virtual Partner feature and their respective commands. Use the following commands followed by the supported query instructions to initiate ViQi Virtual Partner:

"Look up..."

"Check..."

"Run a..."

Query Examples License plate

"Run a <State> license plate <Alphanumeric String>"

"Check a <State> license plate"

"Look up <State> license plate <Alphanumeric String>"

Driver's license

"Run a <State> driver's license <Alphanumeric String>"

Vehicle Identification Number

"Check the state of <State> driver's license <Alphanumeric String>"

"Look up <State> driver's license <Alphanumeric String>"

"Check Vehicle Identification Number <Alphanumeric String>"

"VIN check <Alphanumeric String>"

"Run a VIN"

NOTE: You can use variations such as <Vehicle Identification Number>, <VIN>, and <Vehicle Number>. Own Location

"Where am I?"

42 MN006147A01-AE Chapter 6: Advanced Features Query Examples

"Can I get my exact location?"

"Am I still at the <Location>?"

NOTE: ViQi will ask for more information to complete the query. Target Location

"Where is <Unit Name>?

"Tell me where <Unit Name> is. NOTE: ViQi will ask for more information to complete the query. 6.1.1 Using ViQi Virtual Partner Prerequisites:See ViQi on page 42 for the queries supported by this feature. To perform queries you are required to log in to CommandCentral. See Logging In to CommandCentral (Subsequent Login). Procedure:

1 Press and hold the assigned ViQi button. 2 After you hear a tone, speak your request into the microphone. 3 Release the assigned programmable button and wait for ViQi to respond. 4 Throughout your session, repeat steps step 1 through step 3 when responding to ViQi. Depending on your query, you can also say the following requests:

To play the available results, say "Play results". To request for more details, say "More details". To complete the Virtual Partner session, say "Complete". 6.2 Advanced Call Features This chapter explains the operations of the call features available in your radio. 6.2.1 Calling a Phone Not in the List Procedure:

1 or to Phon. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below Phon. 3 Enter the desired phone number on the keypad. The display updates as the numbers are entered. 4 Press the button or the PTT button on the keypad microphone to make the call. 5 Press and hold the PTT button to talk. Release the PTT button to listen. 6 Press or Menu Select button directly below Phon to exit. 43 MN006147A01-AE Chapter 6: Advanced Features 6.2.2 Selective Call (ASTRO Conventional Only) A Selective Call is a call from an individual radio to another individual radio with privacy. 6.2.2.1 Receiving a Selective Call When and where to use:When you receive a Selective Call, you hear two alert tones and the yellow LED illuminates while the green LED blinks. The speaker unmutes. Procedure:

1 Hold the microphone vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth. 2 Press and hold the PTT button to talk. Release the PTT button to listen. NOTE: If you press PTT button before pressing the Menu Select button directly below Call, your conversation is broadcasted to all members of the talkgroup. If 20 seconds pass before you press the Menu Select button directly below the Call, you are not responding privately to the call. Instead, you initiate a Selective Call. See Making a Selective Call on page 44. Prerequisites:Your radio must be preprogrammed for you to use this feature. 6.2.2.2 Making a Selective Call Procedure:

1 Perform one of the following actions:

To access this feature by using a preprogrammed button, press the preprogrammed Selective Call button to dial the preprogrammed ID. Proceed to step 3. or to Call, and press the Menu Select button directly below Call. The display shows the last transmitted or received ID. 2 To select the required ID, perform one of the following actions:

Press the Menu Select button directly below Cnts to scroll through and select the required ID. or to the required ID. Use the keypad to enter the required ID. 3 Hold the microphone vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth. 4 Press and hold the PTT button to start the Selective Call. The display shows the ID of the target radio. 5 Release the PTT button to listen. 6 Press to return to the Home screen. If you do not press other unit. You will miss all subfleet traffic and incoming phone calls. button to hang up, your radio remains in Selective Call state with the 44 MN006147A01-AE Chapter 6: Advanced Features 6.2.3 Talkgroup Call Feature (Conventional Only) This feature allows you to define a group of conventional system users so that they can share the use of a conventional channel. NOTE: Encryption keys are associated to talkgroups. When talkgroups are associated, encryption keys are changed by changing the active talkgroup. See Secure Operations on page 80 for more information. 6.2.3.1 Selecting a Talkgroup Procedure:

1 or to Tgrp and press the Menu Select button directly below Tgrp. The display shows the last talkgroup that was selected and stored. 2 Perform one of the following actions:

or to Pset for the preset preprogrammed talkgroup. or to the required talkgroup. 3 Press the Menu Select button directly below Sel to save the currently selected talkgroup and return to the Home screen. 4 Press to return to the Home screen. 6.2.4 Sending a Status Call Procedure:

1 Perform one of the following actions:

Press the preprogrammed Status button. This feature allows you to send data calls to the dispatcher about a predefined status. Each status can have up to a 14-character name. For trunking, a maximum of eight status conditions is possible. For conventional, a maximum of 16 status conditions is possible. or to Sts and press the Menu Select button directly below Sts. The display shows the last acknowledged status call, or the first status in the list. 2 Perform one of the following actions:

or to the required status. Use the keypad to enter a number corresponding to the location in the status list. 3 Press the PTT button to send the status. When the dispatcher acknowledges, you hear four tones and the display shows Ack received. The radio returns to normal dispatch operation. NOTE: If the Display Last Acknowledged User Status/Message is enabled, the display shows the last acknowledged status. 45 If no acknowledgment is received, you hear a low-pitched tone and the display shows No acknowledge. 4 Press to return to the Home screen. No traffic is heard on trunked channels while Status Call is selected. If the radio detects no Status Call activity for 6 seconds, an alert tone sounds until you press or the PTT button. MN006147A01-AE Chapter 6: Advanced Features 6.2.5 Sending a Message Procedure:

1 Perform one of the following actions:

Press the preprogrammed Message button. or to Msg and press the Menu Select button directly below Msg. 2 Perform one of the following actions:

or to the required message. Use the keypad to enter a number corresponding to the location in the message list. 3 Press the PTT button to send the message. When the dispatcher acknowledges, you hear four tones and the display shows Ack received. NOTE: If the Display Last Acknowledged User Status/Message is enabled, the display shows the last acknowledged message. If no acknowledgment is received, you hear a low-pitched tone and the display shows No acknowledge. 4 Press to return to the Home screen. No traffic is heard on trunked channels while Message is selected. If the radio detects no message activity for six seconds, an alert tone sounds until you press or the PTT button. 6.2.6 Making a Priority Dispatch Calls If a talkgroup is congested, the Priority Dispatch feature allows you to call the dispatcher on a different talkgroup. This talkgroup is called the Priority Talkgroup. Each trunking talkgroup can have its own assigned Priority Talkgroup.Priority Dispatch is not available during Emergency operations. Scan feature is suspended when Priority Dispatch is initiated. Prerequisites:Dispatch console that supports this feature must be preprogrammed to use this feature. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information on dispatch console supporting this feature. Procedure:

1 Press the preprogrammed Priority Dispatch button. A tone sounds and the radio enters Priority Dispatch mode. The radio exits this mode when the Priority Dispatch Time Out Timer expires. 46 MN006147A01-AE Chapter 6: Advanced Features 2 Before the Priority Dispatch Time Out Timer expires, press and hold the PTT button to transmit. The display shows the Priority Talkgroup alias. 3 Release the PTT button to listen. The radio exits Priority Dispatch mode, returns to its original talkgroup, and displays the home channel alias. 6.2.7 Dynamic Regrouping (Trunking Only) This feature allows the dispatcher to temporarily reassign selected radios to a particular channel to communicate with each other. When your radio is dynamically regrouped, it receives a dynamic regrouping command and automatically switches to the dynamically regrouped channel. You hear a tone and the display shows the name of the dynamically regrouped channel. When the dispatcher cancels dynamic regrouping, the radio automatically returns to the previous zone and channel. If you access a zone or channel that has been reserved as a dynamically regrouped mode for other users, you hear an invalid tone. 6.2.7.1 Classification of Regrouped Radios The dispatcher can classify regrouped radios into Select Enabled or Select Disabled categories. Select Enabled Select Disabled Select-enabled radios are free to change to any available channel, including the dynamic-

regrouping channel, once you have selected the dynamic-regrouping position. Select-disabled radios cannot change channels while dynamically regrouped. The radio is forced to remain on the dynamic-regrouping channel. The Scan and Private Call features are unavailable when your radio is Select Disabled. 6.2.7.2 Requesting a Reprogram (Trunking Only) This feature allows you to notify the dispatcher when you want a new dynamic regrouping assignment. Procedure:

Perform one of the following actions:

Press the preprogrammed Reprogram Request button to send a reprogram request to the dispatcher. or to Rpgm then press the Menu Select button directly below Rpgm to send reprogram request to the dispatcher. The display shows Reprogram Rqst and Please wait. If you hear five beeps, the dispatcher has acknowledged the reprogram request. The display shows Ack received and the radio returns to the Home screen. 47 MN006147A01-AE Chapter 6: Advanced Features If the dispatcher does not acknowledge the reprogram request within six seconds, you hear a low-

pitched alert tone and the display shows No acknowledge. Try again or press to cancel and return to the Home screen. 6.2.8 Dynamic Zone Programming Dynamic Zone Programming (DZP) provides one or more Dynamic Zones to store frequently used channels for conventional or trunking. NOTE: Your radio must be preprogrammed for you to use this feature. At least one zone in the radio must be a non-dynamic zone. 6.2.8.1 Entering the Dynamic Zone to Select a Dynamic Channel Procedure:

1 or to Zone then press the Menu Select button directly below Zone. The display shows the Zone screen. 2 or to <# Dynamic Zone Channels>. 3 Perform one of the following actions:

Press the Menu Select button below Sel to select. Press the Menu Select button below Exit to exit. If you have selected one of the Dynamic Zone Channels list, the display returns to Home screen with the selected <# Dynamic Zone Channels> shown on the screen. If you have selected Exit without selecting any Dynamic Zone Channels list, the display returns to Home screen without any changes. 6.2.8.2 Saving a Channel in the Dynamic Zone from List Selection Prerequisites:To perform this operation, the radio must be in the Dynamic Zone. Procedure:

1 or to ZnPr. Press the Menu Select button directly below ZnPr to enter the Program Zone screen. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below Edit. The display shows Search Options screen. or to List Selection. Press the Menu Select button directly below Sel . The display shows Select Zone screen. or to the required zone. Press the Menu Select button directly below Sel . The display shows Select Chan screen. 3 4 48 MN006147A01-AE Chapter 6: Advanced Features 5 or to the required channel. Press the Menu Select button directly below Sel . The display shows Channel updated. 6 Press the Menu Select button directly below Exit to return to Home screen. 6.2.8.3 Deleting a Channel in the Dynamic Zone Prerequisites:To perform this operation, the radio must be in the Dynamic Zone. or to ZnPr then press the Menu Select button directly below ZnPr to enter Program Zone screen. Procedure:

1 2 The display shows the dynamic channels list. The display shows Channel deleted screen. 3 Press the Menu Select button below Exit to return to Home screen. The Home screen shows <Dynamic Zone Channels>. If the channel deleted is the Home channel, the Home screen shows <Zone Name>Blank. 6.3 Multiple Control Head Features This feature allows your transceiver to control the combinations of control heads on APX Mobile. You can use the Controller Area Network (CAN) cables to connect in any configuration that does not exceed 131 feet. For further information, refer to the following Installation Manuals:

6878215A01 APX Mobile Radios and Control Heads Installation Manual MN003109A01 APX 8500 Mobile Radio Installation Manual MN005720A01 Enhanced Single Band Mobile Radio Installation Manual The Multiple Control Head (MCH) feature consists of two modes that can be programmed through Customer Programming Software (CPS):

All Active mode One Active mode 6.3.1 Setting the ID of the Initial Control Head When and where to use:This feature allows you to set up the control head in the Front Panel Programming (FPP) mode. During the setup, the control heads are defined as Control Head Number 1, Control Head Number 2, Control Head Number 3, and Control Head Number 4. Procedure:

1 Power off the radio by pressing the Power button. 2 Press and hold the left-most Menu Select button and the emergency button simultaneously. 49 MN006147A01-AE Chapter 6: Advanced Features 3 While continuing to depress these two buttons, press the Power button to power on the radio and the control head. The radio and the control head powers on into FPP mode. The display shows the ID number of the control head. 4 Turn the Mode knob to change the ID number of the control head. 5 Press the Power button to power off the radio and exit FPP mode. 6 Repeat step 1 to step 5 to set the ID number for the rest of the attached control heads. 6.3.2 All Active Mode The All Active mode enables all connected control heads attached to the radio to operate concurrently with each other. When you activate a feature on one control head, the rest of the control heads have the same activated features and indicators on their respective display. 6.3.3 Activating and Deactivating Intercom in All Active Mode Prerequisites:This feature only applies to control heads in the All Active mode. When and where to use:The intercom feature allows one control head user to talk to another control head user in a MCH configuration. At any given time, when a control head being operated has priority for the intercom call, all other control heads are blocked until the active control head releases PTT button. Procedure:

control heads. 1 Press the Menu Select button directly below Intc to activate the intercom feature of any of the 2 Press the PTT button to initiate an intercom transmission. All control heads that are attached will receive the same intercom call. The display of the control heads receiving the intercom call shows the alias/ID number of the transmitting control head. 3 Press or the Menu Select button directly below Exit to deactivate the intercom feature. The intercom feature also deactivates when you initiate a mode change. If the radio is on an emergency channel, pressing of the Emergency button or the emergency footswitch button on any control head also deactivates the intercom feature. 6.3.4 One Active Mode One Active mode enables only one control head to be visibly active at a time in a two control head system. The Volume knob, DIM button, Front/Rear (F/R) softkey, Emergency, the Emergency footswitch, and VIP inputs remain active on the inactive control head, while all other controls are disabled. The VIP input control head is configurable in the CPS and VIP should be attached to the control head selected in the CPS. 50 MN006147A01-AE Chapter 6: Advanced Features Item A B C Description Transceiver Active Radio Non-Active Radio You can change the command between the two control heads by pressing the Menu Select button directly below F/R, or the Menu Select button on the keypad microphone. 6.4 Remote Monitor This feature allows the system administrator to turn on the microphone of a targeted radio with a subscriber alias or ID. When remote monitor feature is activated, the audio transmission can be configured in CPS to route the audio to the radio internal microphone, wired RSM microphone, or Bluetooth wireless microphone. In life-threatening or critical situations, the system administrator can remotely monitor any audible activity surrounding the targeted radio. This feature provides address-book capabilities on your radio. Each entry corresponds to an alias

(name) and ID (number) that you use to initiate a call. Contact entries are alphabetically sorted according to the entry alias. Also, each entry, depending on context (conventional, trunking, or phone), associates with one or up to five IDs according to the following types of calls:

Each entry within Contacts contains the following information:

6.5 Contacts Phone Call Private Call Selective Call Call Alert Call Alias (Name) Call ID (Number) Call Type (Icon) 51 Z1ZONECHANPWRSQLREMOTEF/RABC MN006147A01-AE Chapter 6: Advanced Features WACN ID (ASTRO 25 Trunking IDs only) System ID NOTE: Your radio must be preprogrammed to allow you to add, edit, or delete the contact entries. Your radio also supports a maximum of 50 call lists. Each list can store up to 100 IDs. NOTE: Your radio is preprogrammed with a few contacts per Call Lists. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. 6.5.1 Making a Private Call from Contacts Prerequisites:Your radio must be preprogrammed to allow you to use this feature. Procedure:

or to Cnts and press the Menu Select button directly below Cnts. The entries are alphabetically sorted. or to the required subscriber alias. 3 Press the Menu Select button directly below Optn and proceed to the next step. or to Call and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel. or to select the call type. 6 Hold the microphone vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth. 7 Press the PTT button to initiate the call. During the call, the display shows the subscriber alias. 8 Press and hold the PTT button to talk. Release the PTT button to listen. The LED lights up solid red when the PTT button is pressed. If there is no voice activity for a preprogrammed period, the call ends. If the call reaches the maximum ring time, the call ends. 6.5.2 Adding a New Contact Entry Procedure:

or to Cnts and press the Menu Select button directly below Cnts . The entries are alphabetically sorted. or to [New Contact] and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel . The display shows Name. 3 Press the Menu Select button directly below Edit. 4 Use the keypad to enter the name and press the Menu Select button directly below OK once you have entered the name. To cancel this operation, press the Menu Select button directly below Cncl to return to the previous screen. 1 2 4 5 1 2 52 MN006147A01-AE Chapter 6: Advanced Features 5 or to [Add Number] and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel . The display shows Type 1 <Default Type>. 6 Press the Menu Select button directly below Edit . 7 8 or or to the required channel and press the Menu Select button directly below OK. to Number 1 and press the Menu Select button directly below Edit . The display shows Number 1 and a blinking cursor appears. 9 Use the keypad to enter the number and press the Menu Select button directly below OK once you have entered the number. To cancel this operation, press the Menu Select button directly below Cncl to return to the previous screen. 10 Press the Menu Select button directly below Done once you have finished. The display shows <Entry> Stored, confirming that the contact entry has been added. The radio returns to the main Contacts screen. 6.5.3 Deleting a Contact Entry Procedure:

1 2 3 1 2 3 or to Cnts and press the Menu Select button directly below Cnts . The entries are alphabetically sorted. to the entry you want to delete and press the Menu Select button directly below Optn . or or to Del and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel . The display shows <Entry> confirm del?. 4 Select the Menu Select button directly below Yes to delete the entry, or No to cancel and return to the main screen of Contacts. The display shows <Entry> deleted and the radio returns to the main screen of Contacts. 6.5.4 Adding a Contact to a Call List Procedure:

or to Cnts and press the Menu Select button directly below Cnts . The entries are alphabetically sorted. to the entry you want to add and press the Menu Select button directly below Optn . to Add to CallLst or Add to PhonLst and press the Menu Select button directly or or below Sel . 4 Perform one of the following actions:

or until the display shows [Available] and press the Menu Select button directly below Add to add as a new entry. 53 MN006147A01-AE Chapter 6: Advanced Features or until the display shows <Entry> and its associated number and press the Menu Select button directly below Rplc to replace the existing entry. The display shows <Entry> added, confirming the addition of the contact to the list. The radio returns to the main display of Contacts. 6.5.5 Methods of Contact Editing in a Call List This feature allows you to edit contacts in a call list. 6.5.5.1 Editing an Entry Alias Procedure:

or to Cnts and press the Menu Select button directly below Cnts . The entries are alphabetically sorted. to the entry you want to edit and press the Menu Select button directly below Optn . to Edit and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel . to the entry alias you wish to change and press the Menu Select button directly below or or or Edit . A blinking cursor appears. 5 Use the keypad to edit the name and press the Menu Select button directly below OK once you have finished. The display returns to the Edit Contact screen. 6 Press the Menu Select button directly below Done to save your changes and return to the main screen of Contacts. 6.5.5.2 Editing as Entry ID Procedure:

or to Cnts and press the Menu Select button directly below Cnts . The entries are alphabetically sorted. to the entry you want to edit and press the Menu Select button directly below Optn . to Edit and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel . to the entry ID you wish to change and press the Menu Select button directly below or or or Edit . A blinking cursor appears. 5 Use the keypad to edit the number and press the Menu Select button directly below OK once you have finished. The display returns to the Edit Contact screen. 6 Press the Menu Select button directly below Done to save your changes and return to the main screen of Contacts. 54 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 MN006147A01-AE Chapter 6: Advanced Features 6.5.5.3 Editing a Call Type Procedure:

1 2 3 4 5 or or or or below OK . screen of Contacts. 6.6 Scan Lists or to Cnts and press the Menu Select button directly below Cnts . The entries are alphabetically sorted. to the entry you want to edit and press the Menu Select button directly below Optn . to Edit and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel . to Type and press the Menu Select button directly below Edit . to choose from the list of call types given and press the Menu Select button directly The display returns to the Edit Contact screen. 6 Press the Menu Select button directly below Done to save your changes and return to the main Scan lists are created and assigned to individual channels/groups. Your radio scans for voice activity by cycling through the channel/group sequence specified in the scan list for the current channel/group. Your radio supports different types of Scan Lists:

Conventional Scan List Multi-System Talkgroup Scan Trunking Priority Monitor Scan List Voting Scan List A maximum of 200 Scan Lists can be programmed in your radio. These lists must be preprogrammed by a qualified radio technician. 6.6.1 Intelligent Priority Scan Intelligent Priority Scan feature allows you to add or delete conventional channels and trunking talkgroups from multiple systems into the priority scan lists. When the radio locks onto a channel in the Intelligent Priority Scan list, the radio scans for higher priority member within the same Trunking or Conventional system. 6.6.2 Viewing a Scan List Procedure:

1 2 or to ScnL and press the Menu Select button directly below ScnL . or to view the members on the list. 3 Press to exit the current display and return to the Home screen. 55 MN006147A01-AE Chapter 6: Advanced Features 6.6.3 Editing the Scan List Procedure:

When and where to use:This feature allows you to change scan list members and priorities. 1 or to ScnL and press the Menu Select button directly below ScnL . The display shows the lists that can be changed. 2 or to the entry you want to edit. 3 Perform one of the following actions:

Press the Menu Select button directly below Sel to add and/or change the priority of the currently displayed channel in the scan list. Press the Menu Select button directly below Del to delete the currently displayed channel from the scan list. Press the Menu Select button directly below Rcl to view the next member of the scan list. 4 Perform one of the following actions to select another channel that you want to add or delete then repeat step 3. Otherwise, proceed to the next step. or to the desired channel. Use the keypad to enter the desired channel name. Use the Mode Knob to select the channel. 5 Press to exit scan list programming and return to the Home screen. See Viewing and Changing the Priority Status on page 56 for more information on how to add and/or change the priority of the currently displayed channel in the scan list. 6.6.4 Changing the Scan List Status Procedure:

1 Long press the preprogrammed Scan side button. 2 or to the member you want to edit. 3 Perform one of the following actions:

Press the Select button once to add the currently displayed channel to the scan list. Press the Select button one or more times to change the scan list status icon of the currently displayed channel. 4 Perform one of the following actions:

or to select more list members whose scan status you want to change. Use the Mode Knob to select another scan list member. 5 Press to exit scan list programming and return to the Home screen. 6.6.5 Viewing and Changing the Priority Status Perform one of the following actions:

Procedure:

56 MN006147A01-AE Chapter 6: Advanced Features Press the Menu Select button directly below Sel one or more times to change the priority status of the current displayed channel. Press the Select button one or more times to toggle between different status of the Scan List status icon of the current displayed channel. The radio shows one of following priority status icons and scenarios:

A Scan icon indicates that the current channel is in the scan list as a non-priority channel. The LED lights up solid green. A Priority-One Channel Scan icon indicates that the current channel is in the scan list as the Priority-One channel. The LED rapidly blinks green. You hear all traffic on the Priority-

One channel, regardless of traffic on non-priority channels. A Priority-Two Channel Scan icon indicates that the current channel is in the scan list as the Priority-Two channel. The LED blinks green. No icon indicates that the current channel is deleted from the scan list. This feature allows you to monitor traffic on different channels by scanning a preprogrammed list of channels. Scanning is halted if you initiate a call and resumes when the call has ended. 6.7 Scan 6.7.1 Turning Scan On or Off Procedure:

Perform one of the following actions:

Press the preprogrammed Scan button to initiate or stop scan. or to Scan and press the Menu Select button directly below Scan. If the scan is enabled, the display shows Scan on and the scan status icon. If the scan is disabled, the display shows Scan Off. The radio returns to the Home screen. 6.7.2 Turning Scan On While Disregarding the Squelch Code

(Conventional Channels Only) When and where to use:You can still receive fleetwide, system-wide, dynamic regrouping, incoming telephone interconnect, and Private Conversation/Call Alert calls while scanning for activity. You may respond to these types of calls as you would normally on the selected channel. However, when scanning different channels while in talkgroup scan, incoming Private Conversation/Call Alert calls may be missed. Procedure:

or to Mon and press the Menu Select button directly below Mon. The brief Monitor on display indicates that the radio is disregarding the squelch code. 57 MN006147A01-AE Chapter 6: Advanced Features 6.7.3 Deleting a Nuisance Channel When and where to use:

If a channel continually generates unwanted calls or noise (termed nuisance channel), you can temporarily remove the unwanted channel from the scan list. This capability does not apply to priority channels or the designated transmit channel. Procedure:

When the radio is locked onto the channel to be deleted, or to Nuis and press the Menu Select button directly below Nuis. The radio continues scanning the remaining channels in the list. 6.7.4 Restoring a Nuisance Channel Procedure:

To restore the deleted nuisance channel, perform one of the following actions:

Stop and restart a scan. Mode change to another channel and back to the original channel. Turn off the radio and then turn it on again. 6.7.5 Changing Priorities Status While Scan is On When and where to use:

While the radio is scanning, the dynamic priority change feature allows you to temporarily change any channel in a scan list (except for the Priority-One channel) to the Priority-Two channel. This change remains in effect until scan is turned off. Scan then reverts to the preprogrammed

(original) setting. Procedure:

1 Press the Menu Select button directly below DYNP to change the priority of a non-priority channel in the scan list to Priority-Two. 2 Press momentarily to exit the scan list and resume scanning. 6.7.6 Restoring Priorities in a Scan List Procedure:

Turn scan off, and then on. Change channels. Turn off the radio, and then turn it back on. To restore the original channel priorities in a scan list, perform one of the following actions:

58 MN006147A01-AE Chapter 6: Advanced Features 6.7.7 Using the Hang Up Box (HUB) Procedure:

(HUB). 1 To temporarily suspend Scan Mode operation, remove the microphone from the Hang Up Box You are allowed to use the control head while scan is suspended. However, Priority Member scanning is not suspended. This feature applies to all Scan Lists and Scan Types. Scan is resumed once the control head is returned to the holding clip and the preprogrammed hangtime has elapsed. NOTE: Priority Scan List members are continuously scanned only when the Scan List, Designated Tx Member field is set to Talkback in the radio programming. Otherwise, all scan mode operation is suspended. 6.8 Call Alert Paging This feature allows your radio to work like a pager. If other users are away from their radios or if they are unable to hear their radios, you can send them an individual call alert page. You can also verify if a radio is active on the system. Depending on how your radio is programmed, if there is no answer after the maximum ring time or when you press the PTT button for an Enhanced Private Call, the radio automatically sends a call alert page. NOTE: This feature must be preprogrammed by a qualified radio technician. 6.8.1 Receiving a Call Alert Page When and where to use:When you receive a Call Alert page, you hear four repeating alert tones and the LED blinks green. If Call Alert Tone Auto Reset is enabled, you hear one alert tone and the LED blinks green. The call received icons blinks and the display shows PAGE RECEIVED. Procedure:

Press the PTT button to answer or press any button to clear the Call Alert page. See Making a Talkgroup Call on page 38 or Making a Private Call (Trunking Only) on page 39 for more information on returning the call. 6.8.2 Sending a Call Alert Page When and where to use:

Do one of the following to send a call alert page:

NOTE: If the feature inactivity timer is enabled, your radio automatically exits the feature when your radio is left idle long enough for the time to expire. You hear the Menu Inactive Exit Tone upon feature exit. Procedure:

Sending a call alert page using the preprogrammed Call Alert Paging button:

59 MN006147A01-AE Chapter 6: Advanced Features a. Press the preprogrammed Call Alert Paging button to send a page to the preprogrammed ID. The display shows Paging...<Number> or <Alias>. If the call alert page is sent successfully, you hear four high-pitched tones and the display shows Ack received. The radio returns to the Home screen. If the call alert page is not acknowledged, you hear a low tone and the display shows No acknowledge. Press the Menu Select button directly below OK to return to the main screen for Contacts. Sending a call alert page using the radio menu Page :

a. or to Page . b. Press the Menu Select button directly below Page . c. or to select the required ID. d. Press the PTT button to send the page. The display shows Paging...<Number> or <Alias>. If the call alert page is sent successfully, you hear four high-pitched tones and the display shows Ack received. The radio returns to the Home screen. If the call alert page is not acknowledged, you hear a low tone and the display shows No acknowledge. Press the Menu Select button directly below OK to return to the main screen of Contacts. Sending a call alert page using the radio menu Call :

a. or to Call . b. Press the Menu Select button directly below Call . c. or to select the alias or ID, and press the PTT button to initiate the call. If the target radio does not respond after a preprogrammed period, the display shows Send page?. d. To send the call alert page, press the Menu Select button directly below Yes . To exit the screen without sending the call alert page, press the Menu Select button directly below No . The display shows Paging...<Alias>. If the call alert page is sent successfully, you hear four high-pitched tones and the display shows Ack received. The radio returns to the Home screen. If the call alert page is not acknowledged, you hear a low tone and the display shows No acknowledge. Press the Menu Select button directly below OK to return to the main screen of Contacts. Recent call menu allows you to view the recent incoming and outgoing call information. You can view the information of the following type of calls:

6.9 Recent Calls Call Alert 60 MN006147A01-AE Chapter 6: Advanced Features NOTE: The Log Dispatch Calls Enable field need to be enabled in CPS for your radio to log the dispatch call. Selective Call Private Call Phone Call (Outgoing Only) Emergency Call (Incoming Only) 6.9.1 Viewing Recent Calls Procedure:

Viewing recent calls using the radio menu:

a. or to Rcnt. screen. c. or to scroll through the list. PTT button. 6.9.2 Instant Recall b. Press the Menu Select button directly below Rcnt to access the Recent Calls feature d. To view the recent Emergency calls, press the Menu Select button directly below Emer. Press the Menu Select button directly below All to view back all recent calls. e. To return to the Home screen, press the Menu Select button directly below Back,

, or the This feature allows you to save and playback the recent received calls. All saved calls are removed upon radio power cycle. 6.9.2.1 Saving and Playback Calls When and where to use:

Perform one of the following to save and play back the recorded calls. You can use the options interchangeably depending on your preference and the programmed functions. Procedure:

Playback and saving the recorded calls using the radio menu:

a. Press the Menu Select button directly below Rcnt. b. c. recent conversations. or to Recent Convs and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel to view the or to the required call and press the Menu Select button directly below Play. Radio playback the selected call and auto playback the recorded calls in chronological order. d. Press the Menu Select button directly below Stop to stop the radio playback. e. or to the required call and press the Menu Select button directly below Save. Radio displays Audio Saved momentarily. f. To return to the previous screen, press the Menu Select button directly below Back. 61 MN006147A01-AE Chapter 6: Advanced Features g. To return to the Home screen, press the Menu Select button directly below Exit. Recent calls are lost after radio power cycle if the calls are not saved. Playback the saved calls using the radio menu:

a. Press the Menu Select button directly below Rcnt. or to Saved Convs and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel to view the b. c. recent conversations. or to the required call and press the Menu Select button directly below Play. Radio playback the selected call and auto playback the saved calls in chronological order. d. Press the Menu Select button directly below Stop to stop the radio playback. e. To return to the previous screen, press the Menu Select button directly below Back. f. To return to the Home screen, press the Menu Select button directly below Exit. Saving the recorded calls using the preprogrammed Record Playback button:

a. Long press the preprogrammed Record Playback button to save the recorded calls. Radio displays momentarily. Radio plays the saved call automatically if call saving is successful. A tone sounds if call saving is not successful. Playback the saved calls using the preprogrammed Record Playback button:

a. Short press the preprogrammed Record Playback button to playback the saved calls. b. Short press the preprogrammed Record Playback button again to skip to the next saved call. If there is only a single saved call, the playback skips to the end of the call. Radio auto playback the most recent incoming call followed by saved calls in chronological order. Radio displays the playback status. NOTE:

Received call overwrites the ongoing record playback. User can short press the programmable button within three seconds to continue the playback and ignore the receiving call. User can short press the programmable button to trigger playback when the radio is receiving call to overwrite the receiving call. Playback can be halted by any tone and button press except for specific buttons. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. 6.10 In-Call User Alert This feature allows the radio to remain muted to affiliated talkgroup calls or dispatch calls while operating on the current Trunking Personality or conventional channel respectively. Group and individual Pages unmute the radio for the alert tone to sound. The radio also unmutes to individual radio-to-radio calls. This feature is very useful when a radio-user prefers to not hear affiliated talkgroup or dispatch calls traffic, but needs-to remain in radio contact. For an In-Call User Alert 62 MN006147A01-AE Chapter 6: Advanced Features enabled channel, the Voice Mute button-press or the Voice Mute menu-selection allows the radio-user to toggle on and off Voice Mute functionality. 6.10.1 Enabling and Disabling In-Call User Alert This feature allows you to mute the voice transmission of the current zone and channel. Prerequisites:Make sure you are in Home mode where the default zone and mode are being displayed. Procedure:

Voice transmission is muted. preprogrammed button again. 1 or to scroll to the VMut and press the Menu Select button directly below VMut. 2 To turn off the feature, press the Menu Select button directly below VMut or the VMut Pressing the Menu Select button directly below VMut or the VMut programmed button momentarily toggles between Voice mute on and Voice mute off. Voice mute on shown on the display indicates that the radio is muted to all conventional dispatch calls and affiliated trunking group calls. 6.11 Quick Call II This feature allows you to broadcast a series of distinct, recognizable tones before a voice transmission from the dispatcher or a radio. The broadcasting dispatcher or radio user can select this pre-programmed Quick Call II tone transmission to be sent to an individual talkgroup or over the entire system. Each tone is distinctive to indicate different situation or different broadcaster. NOTE: The receiving radio must be configured with the matching Quick Call II tone from the transmitting radio, in order for the receiving radio to sound the selected tone followed by the pre-configured alert tone. 6.11.1 Initiating Quick Call II Transmissions Prerequisites:Tone must be preprogrammed into the Tone Signaling List on the broadcasting or transmitting radio. Procedure:

1 2 or to QCII, and press the Menu Select button directly below QCII. or to select the tone to broadcast. 3 Press the PTT to broadcast the selected tone, or press and hold the PTT to broadcast the selected tone and transmit with your vocal transmission. You hear the radio sounds the selected tone. You can begin your call after the tone ends. 4 Release PTT to listen. 63 The Emergency feature is used to indicate a critical situation. An emergency signal overrides any other communication over the selected channel. MN006147A01-AE Chapter 6: Advanced Features 6.12 Emergency Operation Your radio supports the following Emergency modes:

Emergency Alarm Emergency Call Emergency Alarm with Emergency Call Silent Emergency Alarm Only one of the Emergency modes can be assigned to the Emergency button or the Emergency footswitch. Your radio is also programmed to operate in one of the following conditions:

Tactical/Non-Revert The radio sends an emergency alarm and/or makes an emergency call on the current channel. Non-Tactical/Revert for Conventional System The radio reverts to the preprogrammed emergency channel to send an alarm and/or make an emergency call. Contact your system administrator for more information. 6.12.1 Special Considerations for Emergency Operation The following scenarios apply during Emergency operation:

Table 7: Emergency Operation Scenarios If... If you press the Emergency button while in a channel that has no Emergency capability, Then... a low-pitched tone sounds. If you change to a channel/mode with no Emer-

gency capability while in Emergency operation, the following occurs:

The display shows NO EMERGENCY. A continuous low-pitched tone sounds until you select a valid Emergency channel/mode or until you disable the Emergency opera-

tion. If you change to a channel/mode with Emergen-

cy capability while in Emergency operation, the Emergency Alarm and/or Emergency Call continues on the new channel/mode. If the radio is out-of-range of the system or the emergency alarm is not acknowledged, a tone sounds and the display shows No ac-

knowledge. 6.12.2 Emergency Keep-Alive This feature prevents the radio from being turned off when it is in Emergency mode. If this feature is enabled, you are required to exit Emergency mode before turning off your radio. 64 MN006147A01-AE Chapter 6: Advanced Features 6.12.3 Exiting Emergency Operation If an Emergency operation is triggered on your radio, the dispatch console or radios configured as Supervisor can exit the Emergency operation. Procedure:

To exit Emergency operation, press and hold the programmed Emergency button. 6.12.4 Exiting Emergency as Supervisor (Trunking Only) Radios configured as Supervisor are able to cancel emergency mode of other radios. The dispatch console must be preprogrammed to use this feature. Contact your system administrator for more information. Procedure:

1 Perform one of the following actions:

If Then If the emergency mode is initiated by other radios, press and hold the Accy No-Dot Button (Purple) button and press the Emergency button. If the emergency mode is initiated by the Supervisor, Perform one of the following actions:

Press and hold the Emergency button. Press and hold the Accy No-Dot Button (Purple), and press the Emergency button. Wait for console to clear emergency. NOTE: The combinations of the following buttons are supported in your radio:

Radio Accy No-Dot Button (Purple) and Emergency button. Radio Accy No-Dot Button (Purple) and accessory Orange button. Accessory 1-Dot Button and radio Emergency button. Accessory 1-Dot Button and accessory Orange button. 6.12.5 Sending an Emergency Alarm When and where to use:This feature allows you to send a data transmission, which identifies the radio sending the emergency, to the dispatcher. Procedure:

1 Press the preprogrammed Emergency button. A tone sounds, the LED blinks red momentarily, and the radio displays EMERGENCY. A dispatcher acknowledgment Ack received display follows. For trunking system, the radio also sounds a high-pitched tone that indicates the alarm is received by the central controller of the trunked system. 2 Press and hold the Emergency button or the PTT button to return to normal operation. 65 MN006147A01-AE Chapter 6: Advanced Features 6.12.6 Sending an Emergency Call (Trunking Only) When and where to use:This feature gives your radio priority access to a talkgroup. Procedure:

1 Press the preprogrammed Emergency button. One of the following scenarios occurs:

The display shows EMERGENCY and the current zone or channel. You hear a short medium-

pitched tone and the LED blinks red momentarily. You hear a short low-pitched tone to indicate that the selected channel does not support emergency and rejects to launch emergency mode. 2 Hold the microphone vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.0 to 2.5 cm) from your mouth. 3 Press and hold the PTT button. Speak clearly into the microphone. 4 Release the PTT button to end the transmission and wait for a response from the dispatcher. 5 To exit Emergency Call, press and hold the preprogrammed Emergency button for about a second. 6.12.7 Sending An Emergency Call With Hot Mic (Trunking Only) This feature allows you to send an Emergency Call with hot mic to a group of radios. When and where to use:

Your radio must be programmed for this type of operation. Your radio microphone is automatically activated, allowing you to communicate with the group of radios without pressing the PTT button. This activated microphone state is also known as hot mic. The hot mic applies to the first voice transmission from your radio during the Emergency call. For subsequent transmissions in the same Emergency call, you must press the PTT button. When indirect PTT such as Hot Mic is activated, the audio transmission can be configured in CPS to route the audio to the radio internal microphone, wired RSM microphone, or Bluetooth wireless microphone. Follow the procedure to send Emergency Call with hot mic on your radio. Procedure:

1 Press the preprogrammed Emergency button. One of the following scenarios occurs:

The display shows EMERGENCY on the current zone and channel. A tone sounds and the LED blinks red momentarily. to launch emergency mode. A tone sounds to indicate that the selected channel does not support emergency and rejects 2 The microphone remains active for the hot mic time specified in the radio's codeplug programming. 3 To exit Emergency Call, press and hold the preprogrammed Emergency button. 66 MN006147A01-AE Chapter 6: Advanced Features 6.12.8 Sending an Emergency Alarm with Emergency Call When and where to use:

This feature gives your radio priority access on a channel for conventional system, and to a talkgroup for trunking system. If the radio has both emergency call and alarm features enabled, it automatically proceeds to the call mode after the alarm is acknowledged. Procedure:

1 Press the preprogrammed Emergency button. A tone sounds, the LED blinks red momentarily, and the radio displays EMERGENCY. For trunking system, the radio also sounds a high-pitched tone that indicates the alarm is received by the central controller of the trunked system. A dispatcher acknowledgment (four high-pitched tones) follows, accompanied by an Ack received display. 2 Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth. 3 Press and hold the PTT button. Speak clearly into the microphone. 4 Release the PTT button to end the transmission and wait for a response from the dispatcher. 5 To exit Emergency Call, press and hold the preprogrammed Emergency button for about a second. Turning off the radio also cancels the emergency state. 6.12.9 Sending An Emergency Alarm and Call with Hot Mic This feature allows you to send an Emergency Alarm and Call with hot mic to a group of radios. When and where to use:Your radio must be programmed for this type of operation. When indirect PTT such as Hot Mic is activated, the audio transmission can be configured in CPS to route the audio to the radio internal microphone, wired RSM microphone, or Bluetooth wireless microphone. Follow the procedure to send Emergency Alarms and Call with hot mic on your radio. Procedure:

1 Press the preprogrammed Emergency button. If successful, the display shows EMERGENCY on the current zone and channel. A tone sounds and the LED blinks red momentarily. The radio exits Emergency Alarm and enters the Emergency Call state when one of the following scenarios occur:

You receive the dispatcher acknowledgment. The display shows Ack received. You receive no acknowledgment. The display shows No acknowledge. If unsuccessful, a tone sounds to indicate that the selected channel does not support emergency and rejects to launch emergency mode. 2 The microphone remains active for the hot mic time specified in your radio's codeplug programming. 3 To exit Emergency Call, press and hold the preprogrammed Emergency button. 67 MN006147A01-AE Chapter 6: Advanced Features Turning off the radio also cancels the emergency state. 6.12.10 Sending a Silent Emergency Alarm When and where to use:This feature allows you to send an Emergency Alarm to the system without triggering any audio or visual indicators. This activated microphone state is also known as hot mic. NOTE: If you press the PTT button during hot mic, and continue to press it after the hot mic duration expires, the radio continues to transmit until you release the PTT button. Procedure:

1 Press the preprogrammed Emergency button. The display shows no changes, the LED does not light up, and you hear no tones. The silent emergency state continues until you perform the next step. 2 Press and hold the emergency button until a tone sounds to exit the silent alarm mode. If silent emergency alarm is used with emergency call, pressing the PTT button exits the silent mode and initiates the emergency call. 6.12.11 Impact Detection This feature activates Emergency mode when the radio detects a force of gravity impact or orientation changes on the vehicle in the event of a vehicle crash or rollover. The radio automatically activates Impact Detected condition when the impact event meets or exceeds a predefined threshold. The radio must stay in this condition for a preprogrammed amount of time before the Emergency Alarm or Call is activated. This feature also sends out the location-based information if the GPS feature is enabled. In the event of hardware failure or malfunction, the radio alternatively displays Impact HW and Error and a tone sounds when the radio power-up. Any button press of the radio or accessory except the programmed button for volume and backlighting functionality ceases the error message and sound. The following scenarios affect the Emergency feature activation:

Pressing a preprogrammed Emergency button cancels the Impact Detection sequence and enters the Emergency mode. Pressing the PTT button does not suspend the Impact Detection sequence. Pressing the PTT button, the Clr menu button, or the preprogrammed Clear button when the radio displays the Impact Detected display alert, exits the Impact Detected condition. 6.12.11.1 Detecting Impact Procedure:

threshold. 68 1 Radio detects the impact on the vehicle and the impact event meets or exceeds the predefined One of the following scenarios occur:

Radio enters Impact Detected condition. Radio sounds alert tone and displays IMPACT on the screen, and Post-Alert Timer is initiated. MN006147A01-AE Chapter 6: Advanced Features Impact Detected condition continues for the time duration defined in the Post-Alert Timer field. When the timer expires, radio enters into Emergency mode. Radio displays EMERGENCY on the screen. Radio enters Emergency mode immediately and displays EMERGENCY on the screen. NOTE:

If the radio is programmed with Silent Emergency, the radio inhibits the alert tone and visual alert associated with the emergency feature. If the radio is programmed in Surveillance Mode, the radio inhibits all tones and lights on the radio. 2 Press the preprogrammed Clr menu button or the preprogrammed Clear button to exit the Impact Detected condition. 6.12.11.2 Exiting Impact Detected Condition When and where to use:If there is a false alarm or you do not want to enter into Emergency mode, you can exit the Impact Detected condition and prevent emergency from going off. Returning to normal operations resets the Impact Detected condition. Procedure:

Perform one of the following actions:

Press the preprogrammed Clear button to exit. Press the Menu Select button below Clr to exit. 6.13 Sending Evacuation Tone This feature enables the evacuation tone to be heard on the transmitting radio and on any radio that is able to receive the tone instruction. Procedure:

Press and hold the PTT button on the radio keypad mic and short press the Orange button on the radio control head. Once the tone begins to sound, if the orange button is released the tone continues to alarm on all radios within the talkgroup, until the PTT button is released. NOTE: Radio does not transmit evacuation tone if the radio is in secure mode. 6.14 Automatic Registration Service Automatic Registration Service (ARS) provides an automated data application registration for your radio. When you turn on the radio, the device automatically registers with the server. Data applications within the fixed network determine the presence of a device on the system and send data to the device. The ARS is consists of the following mode:

ARS Server Mode (Default mode) ARS Non-server Mode 69 MN006147A01-AE Chapter 6: Advanced Features 6.14.1 Selecting or Changing the ARS Mode When and where to use:

The following methods are options on how to select or change the ARS Mode. The result of all the methods is the same. You can use the options interchangeably depending on your preference and the programmed functions. Procedure:

Selecting or Changing the ARS mode using the radio menu:

a. Press and hold or to Chan . b. Press the Menu Select button directly below Chan . The display shows the current channel name. c. or or rotate the Mode Knob to the desired channel. d. Press Sel to confirm the displayed channel. One of the following scenarios occur:

In ARS Server Mode, the display shows the User Login Indicator icon, the zone, and ARS server channel. In ARS Non-Server Mode, the display shows the User Login Indicator icon, the zone, and ARS non-server channel. If the channel or mode selected is unprogrammed, the display shows Unprogrammed. Selecting the ARS mode using the Mode Knob :

a. After the zone you want is displayed, toggle until the display shows the required channel. The display shows that the current zone is not blinking, and the channel is blinking. b. or or rotate the Mode Knob to the desired channel. One of the following scenarios occur:

In ARS Server Mode, the display shows the User Login Indicator icon, the zone, and ARS server channel. In ARS Non-Server Mode, the display shows the User Login Indicator icon, the zone, and ARS non-server channel. If the channel or mode selected is unprogrammed, the display shows Unprogrammed. c. Press to confirm the displayed zone and channel. Selecting the ARS mode using the Mode Knob:

a. Rotate the Mode Knob to the desired channel. One of the following scenarios occur:

In ARS Server Mode, the display shows the User Login Indicator icon, the zone, and ARS server channel. In ARS Non-Server Mode, the display shows the User Login Indicator icon, the zone, and ARS non-server channel. b. Press Sel to confirm the displayed zone and channel. 70 MN006147A01-AE Chapter 6: Advanced Features 6.14.2 User Login Feature This feature allows you to take on a friendly username for (Example: Text Messaging Service). You can still send text messages without logging in as a user. The user login feature only enables the recipient of your message to identify you as the sender by assigning a username to your message. This feature is only applicable for LMR Messaging. NOTE: Valid characters for a username entry are capital letters (AZ), small letters (az), numbers (09), symbols (*, #, -, /), and the space character. The maximum length for a username is eight characters. Usernames are not case-sensitive in server mode but are case-sensitive in non-server mode. A predefined username may sometimes be invalid because the programming software that is used to set predefined usernames allows you to set usernames comprising of eight characters or more. 6.14.2.1 Logging In as a User Procedure:

1 or to User and press the Menu Select button directly below User. The display shows the User Login screen. 2 Perform one of the following actions:

or to [ID Entry] and press the Menu Select button directly below Edit to enter ID. A blinking cursor appears on the screen. Use the keypad to type or edit a user name. Press the Menu Select button directly below Ok to submit. or to scroll through the list of predefined user names. Press the Menu Select button directly below Sel to select the predefined user name. Press and hold or to scroll through the list of predefined user names at a fast scroll rate. Press the Menu Select button directly below Logn to select the predefined user name. If the selected predefined username has more than eight (8) characters, or an invalid character in it, the display momentary shows Invalid ID. 3 Press the Menu Select button directly below PIN. A blinking cursor appears beside PIN. 4 Enter your Personal Identification Number (PIN) number. The maximum PIN length is four digits. The PIN number appears as asterisks. 5 Press the Menu Select button directly below Logn. One of the following scenarios occurs:

In ARS Server Mode, the display shows the User Login Indicator icon, the ID, and In progress, with Cncl . In ARS Non-Server Mode, the display shows the User Login Indicator icon, the ID, and Logged in, with Logt and Exit. In non-ARS enabled mode, the display shows Offline, with Logt and Exit. One of the following scenarios occurs:

71 MN006147A01-AE Chapter 6: Advanced Features If the user name is invalid, login fails and the user login failure indicator (IP indicator) icon blinks. The display also shows Login failed. If the PIN is invalid, login fails and the user login failure indicator (IP indicator) icon blinks. The display also shows Login failed. Wait for the logged in confirmation screen. If the login process is successful, the display shows the successful user login indicator (IP indicator) icon and Logged in, with Logt and Exit. NOTE: To cancel the login process and return to the initial user login screen, press the Menu Select button directly below Cncl. 6.14.2.2 Logging Out When and where to use:

Prerequisites:Once the data application registration is completed, you can log out. NOTE: Private data refers to all messages in the text messaging Inbox, Draft, and Sent folder. The next user is able to access the Inbox, Draft, and Sent messages if private data is not deleted. Procedure:

1 or to Logt and press the Menu Select button directly below Logt. The display shows the User Login Indicator icon and Clear private data?. Select Yes to clear all your private data. The display shows Private data cleared. 2 Perform one of the following actions:

Select No to keep your private data. 6.15 Text Messaging Service Text Messaging Service (TMS) allows you to send and receive messages and run database queries directly from your radios. The maximum number of characters allowed for a text message is 200 characters. NOTE: Query is only supported in the ASTRO 25 Advanced Messaging Solution. For more information, see ASTRO 25 Advanced Messaging Solution and Two-Factor Authentication. The types of text messages available are:

A new text message (free form message). A predefined message (quick text message). An edited quick text message. A query (ASTRO 25 Advanced Messaging Solution). 6.15.1 Accessing the Messaging Features Procedure:

1 Perform one of the following actions:

72 MN006147A01-AE Chapter 6: Advanced Features Press the Data Feature button or the preprogrammed TMS Feature button to access the TMS feature screen. access the Inbox. 2 or to TMS. Press and hold the Data Feature button or the preprogrammed TMS Feature button to Follow the procedure described next to access this feature using the radio menu. 3 Press the Menu Select button directly below TMS to access the TMS feature screen. 4 or to scroll through the main menu options. 6.15.2 Composing and Sending a New Text Message Procedure:

1 or to TMS. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below TMS to access the TMS feature screen. 3 Perform one of the following actions:

or to Compose and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel. Press the Menu Select button directly below Exit to return to the Home screen. 4 or to Text Message and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel to compose a new message. A blinking cursor appears on the Compose screen. 5 Use the keypad to type or edit your message. 6 Press the Menu Select button directly below Optn once the message is composed. 7 or to Send and press the Menu Select button directly below Send . 8 Perform one of the following actions:

to scroll through the address list and select the required address. to [Other Recpnt] and press the Menu Select button below Edit. When a blinking cursor appears in the Enter Address screen, use the keypad to type the address entry. 9 Press the Menu Select button directly below Send or press the PTT button to send the or or message. The display shows the Send Message screen and Sending msg. If the message is sent, you hear a tone and the display shows Msg sent. If the message is not sent, you hear a low tone, the display shows Send failed and returns to the main TMS screen. NOTE: You can append a priority status and/or a request reply to your message. See Priority Status and Request Reply of a New Text Message on page 75 for more information. You can also select the Drft option to save your message in the Drafts folder to send it later. See Accessing the Drafts Folder on page 78 for more information. 73 MN006147A01-AE Chapter 6: Advanced Features 6.15.3 Sending a Quick Text Message When and where to use:

Quick Text messages are messages that are predefined and usually consist of messages that are used most frequently. Each Quick Text message has a maximum length of 50 characters. Procedure:

1 Perform one of the following actions:

To access this feature using the preprogrammed button, press the preprogrammed Quick Text button and proceed to step 4. To access this feature using the menu, proceed to the next step. 2 or to TMS and press the Menu Select button directly below TMS to access the TMS feature screen. 3 Perform one of the following actions:

or to Compose and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel . or to Comp and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel. Press the Menu Select button directly below Exit to return to the Home screen. to Quick Text and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel for a predefined or to scroll through the list of messages and press the Menu Select button directly below or message. or to List. 4 5 Sel to select the required message. The message appears on the Compose screen, with a blinking cursor at the end of it. Use the keypad to edit the message, if required. 6 Press the Menu Select button directly below Optn . 7 or to Send Message and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel . to Send and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel . 8 Perform one of the following actions to send the message:

or to scroll through the address list and select the required address. The message is sent after the address is selected. or to [Other Recpnt] and press the Menu Select button below Edit. When a blinking cursor appears on the Enter Address screen. Use the keypad to type the address entry. Proceed to step 9 to send the message. 9 Press the Menu Select button directly below Send or press the PTT button to send the message. The display shows the Send Message screen and Sending msg. If the message is sent, you hear a tone and the display shows Msg sent. If the message is not sent, you hear a low tone, the display shows Send failed and returns to the main TMS screen. NOTE: You can append a priority status and/or a request reply to your message. See Priority Status and Request Reply of a New Text Message on page 75 for more information. 74 MN006147A01-AE Chapter 6: Advanced Features 6.15.4 Priority Status and Request Reply of a New Text Message Before sending your message, you can add a priority status or a request reply to your message. 6.15.4.1 Appending a Priority Status to a Text Message Prerequisites:Ensure that an outgoing message is composed to allow you to perform this procedure. See Composing and Sending a New Text Message on page 73 for more information. When and where to use:

NOTE: The Priority Status icon on a message does not imply that the message gets higher priority over the other messages when it is being transmitted. It is just an indication that can be embedded into a message to let the receiver know that the message is important. Procedure:

1 Press the Menu Select button directly below Optn . 2 or to Mark Important and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel to indicate that the message is important. The priority status icon appears beside the normal message icon on the label bar. 6.15.4.2 Removing a Priority Status from a Text Message Prerequisites:Ensure there is an outgoing message composed to allow you to perform this procedure. See Composing and Sending a New Text Message on page 73 for more information. 2 or to Mark as Normal and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel to remove Procedure:

1 Press the Menu Select button directly below Optn . the priority status from the message. The display shows the normal message icon on the label bar. 6.15.4.3 Appending a Request Reply to a Text Message Prerequisites:Ensure that an outgoing message is composed to allow you to perform this procedure. See Composing and Sending a New Text Message on page 73 for more information Procedure:

2 or reply. 1 Press the Menu Select button directly below Optn . to Req Reply and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel to request for a The request reply icon appears beside the normal message icon on the label bar. 6.15.4.4 Removing a Request Reply from a Text Message Prerequisites:Ensure that an outgoing message is composed to allow you to perform this procedure. See Composing and Sending a New Text Message on page 73 for more information. 75 MN006147A01-AE Chapter 6: Advanced Features Procedure:

1 Press the Menu Select button directly below Optn . 2 or to No Req Reply and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel to remove the priority status from the message. The display shows the normal message icon on the label bar. 6.15.4.5 Appending a Priority Status and a Reply Request to a Text Message Prerequisites:Ensure that an outgoing message is composed to allow you to perform this procedure. See Composing and Sending a New Text Message on page 73 for more information. Procedure:

1 Press the Menu Select button directly below Optn . or to Mark Important and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel to indicate that the message is important. or reply. to Req Reply and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel to request for a The priority status and request reply icons appear beside the normal message icon on the label bar. 6.15.4.6 Removing a Priority Status and a Reply Request from a Text Message Prerequisites:Ensure that an outgoing message is composed to allow you to perform this procedure. See Composing and Sending a New Text Message on page 73 for more information. Procedure:

1 Press the Menu Select button directly below Optn . or to Mark Important and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel to remove or to No Req Reply and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel to remove the the priority status icon. reply status icon. The display shows the normal message icon on the label bar. 2 3 2 3 6.15.4.7 Receiving a Text Message When and where to use:

NOTE: When you receive a message that is flagged with the Request Reply icon, you must manually respond to the sender that you have received the message. The system does not automatically send a notification to acknowledge that the message was received. Do one of the following to receive a text message. You can use the options interchangeably depending on your preference and the programmed functions. Receiving a text message using the Data Feature button or the TMS Feature button:

When you receive a message, press and hold the preprogrammed Data Feature button or the TMS Feature button to access the Inbox. Receiving a text message using the radio menu:

Procedure:

76 MN006147A01-AE Chapter 6: Advanced Features When the new message icon appears and the display shows momentary New msg, press the Menu Select button directly below TMS to access the Inbox. The display shows a list of aliases or IDs, with the sender of the latest received message on top. 6.15.4.8 Viewing a Text Message from the Inbox When and where to use:The Inbox can hold up to 30 messages. NOTE:

or to read the message if the content fills more than one screen. Procedure:

1 Perform one of the following actions:

Press the preprogrammed Data Feature button or the TMS Feature button to access the TMS feature screen. or to Inbx and press the Menu Select button below Sel . Press and hold the preprogrammed Data Feature button or the TMS Feature button to access the Inbox. or to TMS and press the Menu Select button directly below TMS to access the TMS feature screen. to Inbx and press the Menu Select button below Sel . or The display shows a list of aliases or IDs, with the sender of the latest received message on top. 2 or message. to the required aliases or ID and press the Menu Select button below Sel to view the While on the view message screen, press the Menu Select button directly below Rply , Del , or Back to access the option. Select Rply to reply the message. Select Del to delete the message. Select Back to return to the previous screen. NOTE: The icon at the top right corner of the screen indicates the status of the message. See Status Indicators on page 27 for more information. 6.15.4.9 Replying to a Received Text Message When and where to use:

NOTE: The original date and time stamp, address, and message content is automatically appended to the reply message. Procedure:

1 or message. to the required aliases or ID and press the Menu Select button below Sel to view the 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below Rply to reply to a message. 3 Perform one of the following actions:

or to Text Message and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel . or to New and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel . 77 MN006147A01-AE Chapter 6: Advanced Features or to Quick Text and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel for a to List and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel predefined message. for a predefined message. or or to scroll through the list of predefined messages and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel to select the required message. One of the following scenarios occurs:

A blinking cursor appears on the Compose screen. The predefined message appears on the Compose screen, with a blinking cursor at the end of it. 6 or message. 4 Use the keypad to type or edit your message. 5 Press the Menu Select button directly below Optn once you have completed the message. to Send Message and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel to send the The display shows the Send Message screen and Sending msg. NOTE:

Press the Menu Select button directly below Back at any time to return to the previous screen. You can append a priority status and/or a request reply to your message. See Priority Status and Request Reply of a New Text Message on page 75 for more information. 6.15.4.10 Accessing the Drafts Folder When and where to use:This folder stores the messages that were saved previously. The Drafts folder can hold up to 10 messages. The oldest draft in the folder is deleted when the 11th message comes in. Procedure:

1 or to TMS. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below TMS to access the TMS feature screen. 3 or to Drafts and press the Menu Select button below Sel . The display shows a list of drafts, with the latest text message drafted on top. 4 or message. to the required text message and press the Menu Select button below Sel to view the Select Edit to edit the message before sending it. Select Del to delete the message. Select Back to return to the previous screen. 6.15.4.11 Sent Text Messages Sent messages is saved in the Sent folder. The Sent folder stores a maximum of 10 messages. The oldest message in the folder is deleted when the 11th message comes in. 78 MN006147A01-AE Chapter 6: Advanced Features 6.15.4.11.1 Viewing a Sent Text Message Procedure:

1 Perform one of the following actions:

TMS feature screen. feature screen. Press the preprogrammed Data Feature button or the TMS Feature button to access the or to TMS and press the Menu Select button directly below TMS to access the TMS 2 or to Sent and press the Menu Select button below Sent. The display shows a list of aliases or IDs, with the recipient of latest sent message on top. 3 to the required aliases or ID and press the Menu Select button below Sel to view the message. While on the view message screen, press the Menu Select button directly below Optn , Del , or Back to access the option. Select Optn to configure the message settings. Select Del to delete the message. Select Back to return to the previous screen. NOTE: The icon at the top right corner of the screen indicates the status of the message. See Status Icons on page 27 for more information. 6.15.4.11.2 Sending a Sent Text Message Procedure:

1 Press the Menu Select button directly below Optn while viewing the message. 2 or to Send Message and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel . or to Send and press the Menu Select button directly below Send . 3 Perform one of the following actions:

or or to scroll through the address list and select the required address. to [Other Recpnt] and press the Menu Select button below Edit. When a blinking cursor appears in the Enter Address screen, use the keypad to type the address entry. 4 Press the Menu Select button below Send or the PTT button to send the message. The display shows the Send Message screen and Sending msg. NOTE: Press the Menu Select button directly below Back at any time to return to the previous screen. You can append a priority status and/or a request reply to your message. See Priority Status and Request Reply of a New Text Message on page 75 for more information. 79 MN006147A01-AE Chapter 6: Advanced Features 6.15.4.12 Deleting a Text Message Procedure:

6.15.4.13 Deleting All Text Messages Procedure:

1 Perform one of the following actions:

1 From the Inbox, Draft, or Sent screen, or to scroll through the messages. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below Del to delete the current message. Press the Data Feature button or the preprogrammed TMS Feature button to access the Messaging feature screen. or to TMS and press the Menu Select button directly below TMS to access the TMS feature screen. 2 or to Inbox or Sent then press the Menu Select button below Clr to select all messages in the selected folder. The display shows Del all?. 3 Perform one of the following actions:

Press the Menu Select button directly below Yes to delete all the messages in the selected folder. Press the Menu Select button directly below No to return to the main TMS feature screen. 6.16 Secure Operations Secure radio operation provides the highest commercially available level of voice security on both trunked and conventional channels. By default, the radio automatically enters the encrypted environment without having to manually select or clear the secure transmission. This extended feature can only be enabled through CPS configuration. 6.16.1 Enabling Secure Transmission Procedure:

1 or to Sec and press the Menu Select button directly below Sec. The display shows and the current key if multi-key has been enabled. 2 Monitor the mode to ensure that it is not in use. 80 MN006147A01-AE Chapter 6: Advanced Features 3 Press PTT button to transmit. NOTE: If the selected channel is preprogrammed for clear-only operation when you press the PTT button, an invalid mode tone sounds and the display shows Clear TX only. The radio does not transmit until you disable the secure mode. The radio can be configured to ignore the clear voice or unsecured transmission when the radio is in secured transmission. Check with your agent for details. 2 Press and hold the Menu Select button directly below Sec to display Secure feature screen. 6.16.2 Accessing the Secure Feature Procedure:

1 or to Sec. The display shows the Secure screen. 6.16.3 Managing Encryption This chapter explains the encryption feature on your radio. 6.16.3.1 Loading Encryption Keys Prerequisites:

Procedure:

1 Attach the KVL to your radio. 2 Press TargetLoad. 3 Perform one of the following actions:

For single key, select Key. For multikey, select Group. 4 Select the required keys and press Load on the KVL. The KVL indicates that keyload is successful. 6.16.3.2 Multikey Feature Refer to the Key Variable Loader (KVL) manual for equipment connections and setup. The display shows Keyloading and all other radio functions, except for power down, backlight, and volume, are locked out. NOTE:

If the Multi-system Over-the-Air Rekeying feature is in use, the ASTRO profile name is displayed below Keyloading. This feature allows the radio to be equipped with different encryption keys and supports the DES-OFB algorithm. 81 MN006147A01-AE Chapter 6: Advanced Features There are two types of encryption keys:

Conventional Multikey The encryption keys are strapped on a one-per-channel basis, through CPS. In addition, you can have operator-selectable keys, operator-selectable keysets, and operator-selectable key erasure. If talkgroups are enabled in conventional, then the encryption keys are strapped to the talkgroups. Trunked Multikey If both conventional and trunked applications are applied, strap the encryption keys for trunking on a per-talkgroup, or announcement-group basis. Also, a different key can be strapped to other features such as dynamic regrouping, failsoft, or emergency talkgroup. You can have operator-

selectable key erasure. 6.16.3.3 Selecting Encryption Keys Procedure:

1 or to Key. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below Key. The display shows the last user-selected and stored encryption key, and the available menu selections. If the Multi-system Over-the-Air Rekeying feature is in use, the list of keys displayed is only for the current secure profile of the selected channel. 3 or to scroll through the encryption keys or use the keypad to enter the number of the desired key. 4 Perform one of the following actions:

Press the Menu Select button directly below Sel to save the newly selected key and return to the Home screen. Press

, the PTT button, or the Menu Select button directly below Exit. NOTE: When the selected key is erased, you hear a momentary keyfail tone and the display shows Key fail. When the selected key is not allowed, you hear a momentary illegal key tone and the display shows Illegal key. 6.16.3.4 Selecting Keysets When and where to use:This feature allows you to select one or more groups of several encryption keys from among the available keys stored in the radio. For example, you could have a group of three keys structured to one keyset, and another group of three different keys structured to another keyset; by changing keysets, you would automatically switch from one set of keys to the other. Every channel to which one of the original keys was tied now has the equivalent new key instead. 1 or to KSet and press the Menu Select button directly below KSet. The display shows the last user-selected and stored keyset, and the available keyset menu selections. If the Multi-system Over-the-Air Rekeying feature is in use, the displayed keysets are only for the current secure profile of the selected channel. to scroll through the keysets or use the keypad to enter the number of the desired Procedure:

2 or keyset. 82 MN006147A01-AE Chapter 6: Advanced Features 3 Press the Menu Select button directly below Sel to save the newly selected keyset. The radio exits keyset selection and returns to the Home screen. NOTE: Press time without changing the keyset selection.

, the PTT button, or the Exit menu selection to exit this menu at any 6.16.3.5 Erasing Encryption Keys Do one of the following to erase the selected encryption keys. You can use the options interchangeably depending on your preference and the programmed functions. If the Multi-system Over-the-Air Rekeying feature is in use, the keys erased are only for the current secure profile of the selected channel. The erase all option operates as configured by the dealer or system administrator. Erasing all keys using the Top (Orange) button and the Top Side (Select) button erases all keys in all keylists in the radio. Procedure:

Erasing the selected encryption keys using the radio menu:

a. or to Eras and press the Menu Select button directly below Eras. The display shows the last user-selected and stored encryption key, and the available menu selections. b. or to the desired encryption key or use the keypad to enter the number of the desired key. c. Press the Menu Select button directly below Optn . The display shows the available key erase options. d. or to the required option and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel . e. Select Erase all keys? or Erase single key? by pressing the Menu Select button below Yes to erase the encryption key(s) in the radio. You can return to the previous screen by pressing the Menu Select button below No. f. Press the Menu Select button directly below All to delete all keys, or press the Menu Select button directly below Sngl to delete the current shown key. You can abort this screen and return to the Home screen by pressing the Menu Select button directly below Abrt. 6.16.3.6 Requesting an Over-the-Air Rekey If the Multi-system Over-the-Air Rekeying feature is in use, the rekey request is only for the current selected secure profile. Prerequisites:Ensure that the Unique Key Encryption Key (UKEK) or Unique Shadow Key (USK) is loaded into the radio with the Key Variable Loader (KVL) before the rekey request can be sent. Refer to your local key management supervisor for more information. Procedure:

1 or to Reky. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below Reky. 83 MN006147A01-AE Chapter 6: Advanced Features 3 Perform one of the following actions:

Press the PTT button to send the rekey request. Press the PTT button again, or the or Emergency button, to exit the feature and transmit in normal mode. If the rekey operation fails, you hear a bad-key tone and the display shows Rekey fail. NOTE: The rekey operation failure indicates that your radio does not contain the UKEK or USK. 6.16.3.7 MDC OTAR (Conventional Only) This feature allows you to view or define the Motorola Data Communications (MDC) Over-the-

Air Rekeying (OTAR) features. It is applied only when operating in secure encrypted mode. In addition to Rekey Requests, OTAR transmissions include Delayed Acknowledgments, and Power-up Acknowledgments. Some of the selected options require configuration at the Key Management Controller (KMC) site to work properly. NOTE: This feature must be preprogrammed by a qualified radio technician. Contact your system administrator for more information. 6.16.3.8 Infinite UKEK Retention This feature enables Unique Key Encryption Key (UKEK) to be permanently stored in the radio even when all the encryption keys are erased. Without this UKEK key, the radio cannot be rekeyed over the air. The Infinite UKEK Retention settings can be different for each secure profile. NOTE: This feature must be preprogrammed by a qualified radio technician. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. 6.16.3.9 Hear Clear Companding Hear-Clear is a noise reduction system which composed of Companding and Random FM Noise Canceller. Reduces the channel noise, such as OTA transmission that is predominantly present in UHF2 and 900 MHz channel with the following features. Compressor Reduces the background noise flow and the speech signal at transmitting radio. Expander Expands the speech while the noise flow remains the same at receiving radio. Random FM Noise Canceller (Flutter Fighter) Reduces the unwanted effects of random FM noise pulses caused by channel fading under high Signal-to-Noise (S/N) conditions such as in a moving transportation. The fading effects, heard as audio pops and clicks, are canceled without affecting the desired audio signal. The Random FM Noise Canceller operates only in receive mode. NOTE: This feature must be preprogrammed by a qualified radio technician. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. 84 MN006147A01-AE Chapter 6: Advanced Features 6.17 Radio Lock This feature requires you to enter a password to unlock the radio when it powers on. The default password is 0123456789. Your service provider determines the following requirements:

Number of characters for a password (maximum 10 characters) Number of attempts for password entry If you are prompted to change the password, enter a new password as reusing the default password is not allowed. If you exhaust all attempts at entering the correct password, the radio is deadlocked. Restart the radio to start over. NOTE:

Depending on the configuration, the radio might carry over the number of attempts remaining even after a power cycle. If you exhaust all attempts in this configuration, the following occurs:

The radio remains inhibited All encryptions and secure keys are erased 6.17.1 Enabling or Disabling Radio Lock (Secure Radios Only) Procedure:

1 or to LogF. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below LogF. One of the following results occur:

The display shows Pswd enabled, indicating that the radio lock feature is enabled. The display shows Pswd disabled, indicating that the radio lock feature is disabled. 6.17.2 Changing the Radio Lock Password Procedure:

1 or to Pswd. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below Pswd. The display shows Change Password screen. 3 or to Unlock Pswd. 4 Press the Menu Select button directly below Sel . 5 Enter the old password. 6 Press the Menu Select button directly below OK . 7 Enter the new password. 8 Press the Menu Select button directly below OK . 9 Re-enter the new password. 85 MN006147A01-AE Chapter 6: Advanced Features 10 Press the Menu Select button directly below OK . The password is updated. If the two passwords do not match, repeat step 5 through step 10. NOTE: If you enter three incorrect old passwords, the radio exits the password feature. You cannot access this feature again until you turn the radio off and on. 6.17.3 Changing the Tactical Inhibit Password The Tactical Inhibit Password is required for the Radio Stun and Radio Kill features. You can set up to eight characters for this password. Procedure:

1 or to Pswd. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below Pswd. The display shows Change Password screen. 3 or to Tactical Inh Encode Pswd. 4 Press the Menu Select button directly below Sel . 5 Enter the old password. 6 Press the Menu Select button directly below OK . 7 Enter the new password. 8 Press the Menu Select button directly below OK . 9 Re-enter the new password. 10 Press the Menu Select button directly below OK . The password is updated. If the two passwords do not match, repeat step 5 through step 10. NOTE: If you enter three incorrect passwords, the radio exits the password feature. You cannot access this feature again until you turn the radio off and on. 6.18 Radio Stun and Kill This chapter explains the radio stun and kill features. 6.18.1 Radio Stun This feature allows you to stun another radio by sending an over-the-air command using the menu on your radio. This feature prevents an unauthorized user from using the radio. Once the radio is stunned, a password is required to re-activate the stunned radio. 86 MN006147A01-AE Chapter 6: Advanced Features 6.18.1.1 Using Radio Stun Procedure:

1 or to Stun. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below . The display shows Enter Password. 3 Use the keypad to enter your Tactical Inhibit Encode Password. 4 Press the Menu Select button directly below OK . The display shows radio Contact IDs. 5 Perform one of the following actions:

or to the required ID. Press the Menu Select button directly below to go to the last number dialed. Use the keypad to enter the required ID. Press the Menu Select button directly below Send to initiate command. If the receiving radio received the command, your radio display shows Ack received. If the receiving radio does not have encryption key to decrypt the received encrypted command, your radio display shows . If the receiving radio is powered off or already killed, your radio display shows No Ack. Once the receiving radio received the command, its screen locked and request for password. 6.18.2 Radio Kill This feature allows you to render your radio or another radio inoperable if the radio is misplaced or lost. When a radio is killed, the display turns blank and all functions of the radio are not usable. The killed radio can only be recovered with a special device. Consult an authorized and qualified technician for details. 6.18.2.1 Using Remote Kill to Kill Another Radio When and where to use:Remote Kill allows you to render another radio inoperable by sending an over-the-air command using the menu on your radio. Procedure:

1 or to Kill. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below Kill. The display shows Enter Password. 3 Use the keypad to enter your Tactical Inhibit Encode Password. 87 MN006147A01-AE Chapter 6: Advanced Features 4 Press the Menu Select button directly below OK . The display shows the radio Contact IDs. 5 Perform one of the following actions:

or to the required ID. Press the Menu Select button directly below LNum to go to the last number dialed. Use the keypad to enter the required ID. Press the Menu Select button directly below Send to initiate command. If the receiving radio received the command, your radio display shows Ack received. If the receiving radio does not have encryption key to decrypt the received encrypted command, your radio display shows . If the receiving radio is powered off or already killed, your radio display shows No Ack. Once the receiving radio received the command, its screen turns blank, the killed radio is inoperable. 6.18.2.2 Using Direct Kill to Kill Your Own Radio When and where to use:Direct Kill allows you to make your own radio inoperable. Press and hold the programmable button (2-dot) on the keypad microphone then press the Orange button until the display turns blank and becomes inoperable. Procedure:

6.19 Radio Inhibit This feature allows the system administrator to put a radio into a nonfunctional state when the radio is missing or in an unknown hand. The radio stays in this state regardless of its power changes. NOTE:

If the radio has Intersystem roaming capability, the system administrator is able to put the radio into a nonfunctional state when the missing radio roams to another system. The radio can only be uninhibited by receiving an uninhibited command from the system administrator. 6.20 Global Positioning System/Global Navigation Satellite System NOTE: This feature is addressed as GPS across the manual as the naming convention of the buttons and strings remain the same as the legacy feature of GPS. The availability and accuracy of this location information (and the amount of time that it takes to calculate it) varies depending on the environment in which you are using the GPS feature. For example, GPS location fixes are difficult to obtain indoors, in covered locations, between high buildings, or in situations where you have not established a clear broad view of the sky. If adequate signals from multiple satellites are available, your GPS feature only provides an approximate location, usually within 10 meters from your actual location, but sometimes farther away. 88 MN006147A01-AE Chapter 6: Advanced Features 6.20.1 GPS Performance Enhancement Sometimes, the GPS feature may be unable to complete a location calculation successfully. You then see a message indicating that your radio cannot connect to enough visible satellites. To maximize the ability of your radio to determine a fix, take note of the following guidelines:

For your initial fix, hold the radio in the face position. Stay in the open. The GPS feature works best where there is nothing between your radio and the open sky. 6.20.2 The Outdoor Location Feature (Using GPS) This feature allows you to determine your current location using a location menu, and your current distance and bearing in relation to another location. Radio location may be requested and reported over-the-air. Your radio stores up to a maximum of 60 programmable location coordinates, also known as waypoints. When the memory is full, the next waypoint automatically replaces the oldest waypoints in the radio. The radio also stores four preprogrammed waypoints. These coordinates cannot be deleted. The following table shows the differences between programmable waypoints and preprogrammed waypoints. Programmable Waypoints Preprogrammed Waypoints User-configurable location coordinates. Fixed location coordinates:

Home Emergency Last Known Location Destination Only the alias is editable, not the coordinates. The Home and Destination coordinates are ed-

itable. Coordinates can be deleted one at a time, or all at once. Coordinates cannot be deleted. This feature allows you to select different display formats of GPS location. The following GPS location formats are available:

6.20.3 Location Format Lat/Long(DD) Lat/Long(DDM) Lat/Long(DMS) UTM/UCS SLD99 89 MN006147A01-AE Chapter 6: Advanced Features MGRS NOTE: When you send your location to another radio, the receiving radio displays the location in its selected format. NOTE: An ON radio menu may be present on the Location menu screen if it is preprogrammed by the dealer or system administrator. 6.20.4 Accessing the Outdoor Location Feature When and where to use:

Procedure:

1 or to Loc. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below Loc. The display shows Location off <Latitude>.. 3 or to check the longitude, time and date of the last successful location fix. 4 To obtain a new location fix, press the Menu Select button directly below Rfsh. The top line temporarily displays Please wait while the new location is being determined. While the new location is being determined, the location signal can be a solid or blinking icon. The location coordinates are updated automatically every 5 seconds while the location signal is present. 5 To return to the Home screen, press

, the PTT button, or the Menu Select button directly below Exit. 6.20.5 Selecting Location Format Procedure:

1 or to Loc. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below Loc. 3 Press the Menu Select button directly below Optn. 4 5 or or to Loc Format and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel. to the preferred location format and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel. The front display shows the location with the selected format. NOTE: If the SLD99 format is selected and the range is invalid, the display shows

- on the location. This situation occurs if you are using the radio outside of Sri Lanka and using the SLD99 format. To correct this situation, switch the location display format to other GPS options such as DDM, DMS, UTM/UCS, or MGRS. 6.20.6 Turning Off GPS Procedure:

1 or to Loc. 90 MN006147A01-AE Chapter 6: Advanced Features 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below Loc. The display shows Previous loc <Latitude>. 3 or to check the time and date of the last successful location fix. 4 Press the Menu Select button directly below Optn . 5 or to Turn Off GPS (if preprogrammed). 6 Press the Menu Select button directly below Sel to turn off the GPS. The display shows Location off. 7 To return to the Home screen, press

, the PTT button, or the Menu Select button directly below Exit. 6.20.7 Saving a Waypoint Prerequisites:Ensure that your radio shows the current location on the screen. Procedure:

1 Press the Menu Select button directly below Optn. 2 Perform one of the following actions:

to Save as Waypt and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel. to Save as Home and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel and or to Save as Dest. and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel and or or proceed to step 5. proceed to step 5. A blinking cursor appears on the screen. 3 Use the keypad to edit the auto-generated waypoint, if required, or press the Menu Select button directly below Cncl to return to the Location main screen. 4 Press the Menu Select button directly below OK once you are done. One of the following scenarios occur:

The display shows Saved as <Waypoint name>. The display shows Saved as Home. The display shows Saved as Dest.. 5 To return to the Home screen, press

, the PTT button, the preprogrammed GPS button, or the Menu Select button directly below Exit. 6.20.8 Viewing a Saved Waypoint Prerequisites:Ensure your radio shows the current location on the screen. Procedure:

1 Press the Menu Select button directly below Optn. 91 MN006147A01-AE Chapter 6: Advanced Features 2 or to Waypoints and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel. The display shows a list of waypoints. 3 Perform one of the following actions:

to scroll through the list. or or to select a waypoint to view the location information in full. 4 Press the Menu Select button directly below Optn. 5 To view the longitude, time and date of the selected waypoint, or to View and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel. 6 To return to the previous screen, press the Menu Select button directly below Back, or to return to the Home screen, press or the PTT button. 6.20.9 Editing the Alias of a Waypoint Prerequisites:Ensure your radio shows the current location on the screen. Procedure:

2 3 4 or or 1 Press the Menu Select button directly below Optn. or to Waypoints and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel . The display shows a list of waypoints. to the required saved waypoint, and press the Menu Select button directly below Optn. to Edit name and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel . A blinking cursor appears in the Edit Name screen. 5 Use the keypad to edit the alias. 6 Perform one of the following actions:

Press the Menu Select button directly below OK once you are done. Press the Menu Select button directly below Cncl to return to the Waypoints main screen. 7 The display shows <Waypoint name> Updated and the radio returns to the Waypoints main screen. 8 Perform one of the following actions:

Press the Menu Select button directly below Back to return to the previous screen. Press or the PTT button to return to the Home screen. 6.20.10 Editing the Coordinates of a Waypoint When and where to use:

NOTE: You can only edit preprogrammed coordinates of Home and Destination. Ensure that your radio shows the current location on the screen. 1 Press the Menu Select button directly below Optn. Procedure:

92 MN006147A01-AE Chapter 6: Advanced Features 2 or to Waypoints and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel. The display shows a list of waypoints. 3 Perform one of the following actions:

or or to [Home] and press the Menu Select button directly below Optn. to [Destination] and press the Menu Select button directly below Optn. 4 or to Edit location and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel. The first number blinks. 5 Utilize the following control buttons to select the number/coordinates if required, then press the Menu Select button directly below Edit to change the number/coordinates. Press to move to the previous number/coordinates. Press to move to the next number/coordinates. Press to change the North (N), South (S), East (E), or West (W) direction. A blinking cursor appears in the Edit Location screen. 6 Utilize the following control buttons or menu to change the number/coordinates if required then press the Menu Select button directly below OK once. Press to move one space to the left. Press to move one space to the right. Press the Menu Select button directly below Del to delete any unwanted characters. Press the Menu Select button directly below Cncl to return to the previous screen 7 Press the Menu Select button directly below OK once complete setting up the new Home or Destination. One of the following scenarios occurs:

The display shows [Home] Updated and the radio returns to the Waypoints main screen. The display shows [Destination] Updated and the radio returns to the Waypoints main screen. 6.20.11 Deleting a Single Saved Waypoint Prerequisites:Ensure your radio shows the current location on the screen. Procedure:

1 Press the Menu Select button directly below Optn. 2 or to Waypoints and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel . The display shows a list of waypoints. 3 Perform one of the following actions:

or to the required saved waypoint, and press the Menu Select button directly below Optn. or to Edit name and press the Menu Select button directly below Del. Press the Menu Select button directly below Del. 93 MN006147A01-AE Chapter 6: Advanced Features 4 The display shows <Waypoint name> Confirm del?. 5 Press the Menu Select button directly below Yes to delete the waypoint or press the Menu Select button directly below No to return to the Waypoints main screen. The display shows <Waypoint name>deleted . 6.20.12 Deleting All Saved Waypoints Prerequisites:Ensure your radio shows the current location on the screen. When and where to use:

NOTE: You cannot delete any of the preprogrammed waypoints. Procedure:

1 Press the Menu Select button directly below Optn. or to Waypoints and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel . The display shows a list of waypoints. or or to the required saved waypoint, and press the Menu Select button directly below Optn. to Delete All and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel . The display shows All saved wayp confirm del?. 5 Press the Menu Select button directly below Yes to delete all waypoints or press the Menu Select button directly below No to return to the Waypoints main screen. The display shows All saved waypnts deleted. 6.20.13 Measuring the Distance and Bearing from a Saved Waypoint Prerequisites:Ensure your radio shows the current location on the screen. Procedure:

1 Press the Menu Select button directly below Optn. or to Dist frm here and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel . The display shows a list of waypoints. or to the required waypoint and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel . The display shows the distance and bearing from the current to the selected coordinates. 6.20.14 Location Feature in Emergency Mode When the Emergency feature is activated, the radio exits the Location menu and returns to the Home screen. In addition, you can view the channel that triggers the emergency signal. You may re-enter the Location menu while still in Emergency mode as long as Silent Emergency is not activated. If you have disabled the Location feature on your radio, it automatically turns back on when Emergency mode is activated. 2 3 4 2 3 94 MN006147A01-AE Chapter 6: Advanced Features If there is a solid location signal during Emergency operation, the current location and the location information received is saved as Emergency and Last Known Location respectively. 6.20.15 Peer-Location on the Display (ASTRO Conventional) This feature is only available for radio-to-radio voice transmissions, dispatch call and selective call. Both the transmitting radio and receiving radio must be configured to enable them to send and receive the GPS coordinates. NOTE: If the receiving radio is operating in a Mixed Mode channel, only if its voice transmission is through conventional ASTRO system then the radio can receive the location coordinates of the peers. This feature is also operable in a Scan Active channel or Scan Talkback channel. After receiving a voice transmission with GPS coordinates enabled on the receiving radio, the display shows the coordinates available in full or in short coordinates. Full location coordinates PTT ID (optional) Longitude and latitude Relative distance or direction Short location coordinates PTT ID (optional) Longitude and latitude NOTE:

If the transmitting radio is stale at the location after a period, the receiving radio display shows the last known location. If the transmitting radio does not have GPS or the receiving radio could not decode the GPS signal of the received signal, the receiving radio display shows the location as unknown. 6.21 Mission Critical Geofence (ASTRO 25 Trunking) This feature allows the radio to use the GPS receiver to determine its location at frequent intervals and evaluate if the radio is within the Geofence area in real time. Geofence is a virtual perimeter based on the GPS to define a geographical area on earth. When the radio enters the predefined Geofence area, your radio receives the Dynamic Regroup command from the system and immediately connects to a Dynamic Regroup talkgroup. The radio display shows the new selected Dynamic Regrouped talkgroup with green intelligent light for your attention. Voice Announcement is also available to support this feature. Any new text messages received at Geofence is displayed immediately on the radio display. NOTE:

If the radio is set up in DVRS, only mobile radio is supported for this feature. 6.21.1 Entering the Geofence Area Prerequisites:The Voice Announcement and TMS display in this feature are optional. They must be configured to enable you to hear and see these indicators. 95 MN006147A01-AE Chapter 6: Advanced Features When and where to use:When the radio enters a Geofence area, the radio immediately sends a message ACK back to the system. The radio searches the current zone for the channel with same talkgroup assigned as the Dynamic Talkgroup and also with same system ID of current trunk system. Once matched, the radio display shows the first matched and connected channel alias. If there is no channel with matching Talkgroup ID and trunk system ID, the radio display shows the channel alias of <DYNAMIC talkgroup>. Once the radio is connected, you hear a dynamic regroup tone, the radio display shows <DYNAMIC channel> with the temporary green color intelligent backlight and you hear a Voice Announcement. NOTE:

When the radio loses the GPS signal, the GPS icon blinks and the radio sounds two high-

pitched tones repetitively to indicate that the GPS has failed to operate. The radio display shows the red intelligent light. If the first matched channel is not configured with Voice Announcement, no Voice Announcement is played. The system sends a message to your radio. The radio display shows a direct text message content without any user operation. This message indicates that you are currently present in a Geofence area. This TMS remains open on the display until user presses exit/home to exit this screen. NOTE: If there is another incoming text message before you exit the previous message, the message screen is refreshed to show the latest message. The following procedure guides you to exit the text message received. Procedure:

Press the Menu Select button below Exit or to return to Home screen. The other operations are the same as normal dynamic regroup command. When the radio exits the Geofence area, your radio reverts to original channel or newly assigned talkgroup. The radio display shows the new channel together with Voice Announcement to indicate the changes. Voice Announcement of the new channel only works if that channel is configured with Voice Announcement. 6.21.2 Mission Critical Geofence This feature allows the radio to use the GPS receiver to determine radio location at frequent intervals and evaluate if the radio is within the Geofence area in real time Check with your dealer or qualified technician to program the geofence coordinates and actions. 6.21.3 Entering Mission Critical Geofence When and where to use:

When the radio enters the predefined Geofence area, the radio displays <Geofence Alias> with the intelligent backlight and you hear a Voice Announcement. Zone and channel alias of the Geofence area is displayed. If the radio is set to manual, you can choose either to proceed with zone and channel change or cancel the change. 96 MN006147A01-AE Chapter 6: Advanced Features The radio then connects to the designated talkgroup. The radio displays the talkgroup alias and dynamic regroup tone sounds. The transmit power level changes and the radio shows a direct text message content without any user operation. NOTE:

The availability of the Voice Announcement (VA), TMS display, Intelligent Backlight, and Transmit Power Level alerts depend on your radio configuration. The VA can be programmed to alert continuously or momentarily. If Site Selectable Alert (SSA) is enabled, the radio mutes any alert that is received when entering the Geofence area and unmutes when exiting. 6.21.4 Exiting Mission Critical Geofence When and where to use:

When the radio exits the Geofence area, the radio reverts to the original transmit power level, intelligent lighting, channel, or newly assigned talkgroup. Voice announcement is canceled or you hear a preprogrammed VA tone. The radio displays the new channel and a message is received to indicate the changes. 6.22 Trunking System Controls This chapters explain the trunking system control features in your radio. 6.22.1 Operating in Failsoft System When and where to use:

The failsoft system ensures continuous radio communication during a trunked system failure. If a trunking system fails completely, the radio goes into failsoft operation and automatically switches to its failsoft channel. During failsoft operation, your radio transmits and receives in conventional operation on a predetermined frequency. You hear a medium-pitched tone and the display shows FAILSOFT. When the trunking system returns to normal operation, your radio automatically leaves failsoft operation and returns to trunked operation. To continue in Failsoft and to communicate with other talkgroups, refer to the following procedure. Procedure:

1 Rotate the Mode knob to change to a different repeater frequency. 2 Press the PTT button to talk, and release the button to listen. 6.22.2 Out-of-Range Radio When your radio goes out of the range of the system, it can no longer lock onto a control channel. You hear a low-pitched tone and/or the display shows the currently selected zone/channel combination and Out of range notification. Your radio remains in this out-of-range condition until it locks onto a control channel or failsoft channel, or if it is turned off. 97 MN006147A01-AE Chapter 6: Advanced Features 6.22.3 SmartConnect SmartConnect allows your radio to maintain voice communication when LMR is out of range by switching to a Wi-Fi, LTE through Tethered Data Modem and Satellite through Ethernet. Before switching broadband connections, your radio compares the relative signal strength of the various broadband connection types to one another, as well as LMR. Your radio remains or returns to LMR connection when the other broadband connections fall below the quality threshold. In addition, a radio operating on a lower priority broadband connection returns to the higher priority or quality connection while idle on SmartConnect. NOTE: This feature must be preprogrammed by a qualified radio technician. Contact your system administrator for more details of supported radio models. Your radio can connect through a fixed Wi-Fi access point in buildings or in-vehicle Broadband modem such as the following modems:

Motorola Solutions VML750 Sierra Wireless MP70 Sierra Wireless GX450 Your radio displays the SmartConnect capable icon the device is connected to an available network, the radio displays SmartConnect connection icon on the SmartConnect enabled channel, once

. Your radio displays OUT OF RANGE when both LMR and SmartConnect are unavailable. 6.22.4 SmartZone The SmartZone feature extends communications beyond the reach of a single-trunked site (antenna location) when operating in a SmartZone system. SmartZone units provide expanded wide-area coverage. SmartZone automatically switches the radio to a different site when the current site signal becomes unacceptable. This usually happens when the vehicle in which the radio is located is driven out of the range of one site, and into the range of another. Under normal conditions, a SmartZone-enabled radio functions invisibly to the operator. However, the operator does have some manual controls on the Control Headthe RSSI menu entry. This button can be used to check, or change, the SmartZone operation. 6.22.5 Site Trunking Feature If the Zone Controller loses communication with any site, that site reverts to site trunking. When this occurs, you can communicate only with the radios within your trunking site. The display shows the currently selected zone/channel and the Site Trunking message. 6.22.6 Locking and Unlocking a Site When and where to use:This feature allows your radio to lock onto a specific site and not roam among wide-area talkgroup sites. This feature should be used with caution, since it inhibits roaming to another site in a wide-area system. 98 MN006147A01-AE Chapter 6: Advanced Features You can toggle the lock state between locked and unlocked by pressing the preprogrammed Site Lock/Unlock button. Follow the procedure to lock and unlock a site using the radio menu. Procedure:

1 or to Site. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below Site. 3 Perform one of the following actions:

To lock the site, press the Menu Select button directly below Lock. The display shows Site To unlock the site, press the Menu Select button directly below Unlk. The display shows locked. Site unlocked. The radio saves the new site lock state and returns to the Home screen. 6.22.7 Viewing the Current Site Procedure:

Perform one of the following actions:

Press the preprogrammed Site Search button. or to RSSI and press the Menu Select button directly below RSSI. The display shows momentarily the name of the current site and its corresponding received RSSI. 6.22.8 Changing the Current Site Procedure:

Perform one of the following actions:

Press and hold down the preprogrammed Site Search button. Press and hold down the Menu Select button directly below RSSI. When the radio finds a new site, it returns to the Home screen. 6.22.9 Trunked Announcement The announcement capability allows you to make announcements to the entire user group, monitor talkgroup calls, and other announcements. Announcement calls are handled in two different ways, ruthless and non-ruthless preemption. Ruthless Preemption When a ruthless preemption announcement call is initiated, the requesting radio begins transmitting immediately. All associated talkgroup calls taking place on other channels are immediately halted, and the radios are steered to the announcement call. Transmitting radios continue to transmit until the PTT button is released, and unmute for the announcement call. 99 MN006147A01-AE Chapter 6: Advanced Features Non-Ruthless Preemption When a non-ruthless preemption announcement is initiated, the initiating unit receives a telephone-

type busy tone, followed by a callback when all associated talkgroup conversations end. 6.22.9.1 Initiating an Announcement Prerequisites:Ensure your radio has been programmed to allow announcement calls. Procedure:

1 Turn the Mode Knob to locate the announcement-group mode. 2 Press the PTT button to initiate the announcement. 6.23 Ignition Switch Options The Ignition Switch Options feature is configured in the Customer Programming Software (CPS) and it determines the functionality of the radio based on the ignition state of the vehicle. The available options are:

Blank Transmit Inhibit This option allows you to turn on/off the radio through the Power button regardless of the current state of the ignition. This option allows you to turn on/off the radio through the Power button regardless of the current state of the ignition. If the ignition is not present, all transmissions are inhibited. This includes receiving any trunking dispatch communications as the radio is not affiliated with the trunking systems. PTT Transmit Inhibit Required This option allows you to turn on/off the radio through the Power button regardless of the current state of the ignition. If the ignition is not present, all PTT button transmissions are inhibited. However, the radio is able to affiliate with the trunking systems. This option allows you to turn on the radio only if ignition is present. The radio turns off either through a Power button press or when the ignition is lost. If the radio turns off due to ignition being removed, it automatically turns on when the ignition is present. If the radio is configured with the Auto Power Off Timer, it automatically turns off after being inactive for a period (with or without ignition). Soft Power Off This option allows you to turn on the radio either through the Power button or when the ignition is detected. Meanwhile, if the Power button is pressed or the ignition is removed, the radio turns off. If the radio is configured with the Auto Power Off Timer, it automatically turns off after being inactive for a period (with or without ignition). Ignition Only Power Up In this option, the radio turns on only when ignition is detected and turns off when ignition is removed. It does not turn on/off with the Power button press. 100 MN006147A01-AE Chapter 6: Advanced Features If the radio is configured with the Auto Power Off Timer, it automatically turns off after being inactive for a period (with or without ignition). NOTE:

If the radio is turned on with an Emergency Power Up footswitch-press, you are required to press the Power button to turn off the radio even if ignition is not present. If the radio is previously turned off due to the Auto Power Off Timer, you are required to press the Power button to turn on the radio even if ignition is present. 6.23.1 Using Emergency Power Up When and where to use:This feature allows you to power on the radio and automatically transmits an emergency mode transmission on personalities with emergency enabled, with the use of a footswitch. This feature is not available if the Ignition Switch option is set to either Tx Inhibit or PTT Tx Inhibit. Procedure:

Press the footswitch to turn on the radio and launch Emergency. A tone sounds and the display shows Emergency. 6.24 Mission Critical Wireless Bluetooth Wireless Technology This feature allows your radio to extend its functionality by connecting to external proprietary Motorola Solutions accessories. Use Motorola Solutions proprietary Mission Critical Wireless (MCW) devices with APX radios during Mission Critical operations. Other Bluetooth devices may or may not meet the mission critical standard. By default, Bluetooth wireless technology is activated on your radio. Your radio supports the following Bluetooth enabled devices or profiles:

Headset (HSP) Dial Up Networking (DUN) Personal Area Networking (PAN) Serial Port (SPP) Generic Access Profile (GAP) General Attribute Profile (GATT) 6.24.1 Turning On Bluetooth Procedure:

Turning on the Bluetooth using the radio menu BT:

a. b. or to BT. To access the Bluetooth feature screen, press the Menu Select button directly below BT. or to Status and press the Menu Select button directly below On. For Bluetooth devices, the display shows Status On, and appears. 101 MN006147A01-AE Chapter 6: Advanced Features For Wireless-Pair devices, the display shows Status On, and appears. If Bluetooth fails to launch, the display shows Bluetooth on failed. c. To return to the Home screen, press the Menu Select button directly below Exit. Turning on the Bluetooth using the preprogrammed button:

a. Press the preprogrammed button to turn on the Bluetooth. You hear a short, medium-pitched tone. If Bluetooth fails to launch, the display shows Bluetooth on failed. For Bluetooth devices, the display shows BT. For Wireless-Pair devices, the display shows WP. 6.24.2 Turning Off the Bluetooth When and where to use:Do one of the following to turn off the Bluetooth. You can use the options interchangeably depending on your preference and the programmed functions. Procedure:

a. b. Turning off the Bluetooth using the radio menu BT:

or to BT. To access the Bluetooth feature screen, press the Menu Select button directly below BT. or to Status and press the Menu Select button directly below Off. The display shows Status Off, and disappears. For Bluetooth devices, the display shows Status Off, and disappears. For Wireless-Pair devices, the display shows Status Off, and disappears. c. To return to the Home screen, press the Menu Select button directly below Exit. Turning off the Bluetooth using the preprogrammed button:

a. Press the preprogrammed button to turn off the Bluetooth. You hear a short, medium-pitched tone. For Bluetooth devices, the display shows BT. For Wireless-Pair devices, the display shows WP. 6.24.3 Pairing with Low Frequency-Motorola Proximity Pairing (LF-MPP) Feature Prerequisites:

Ensure that Bluetooth feature of your radio is on and the Bluetooth tones are enabled. 102 MN006147A01-AE Chapter 6: Advanced Features Bluetooth tones, Bluetooth menu and preprogrammed buttons must be preprogrammed by a qualified radio technician. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. When and where to use:The range of Bluetooth operation when using a MCW accessory is 10 meters line-of-sight communication. This is an unobstructed path between the location of the signal transmitter

(your radio) and the location of the receiver (your device or accessory). Obstacles that can cause an obstruction in the line-of-sight include trees, buildings, mountains, cars, and others. For high degree of reliability, Motorola Solutions recommends to NOT separate the radio and the accessory. At the fringe areas of reception, both voice and tone quality will start to sound "garbled" or "broken". To correct this problem, simply position the accessory and radio closer to each other (within the 10 meter defined range) to re-establish clear audio reception. In a multi-control head to one transceiver configuration, one control head must be assigned to Bluetooth for speaker, microphone and LF-MPP interactions. NOTE: Once a COTS headset is paired to your radio, it is always connected. Therefore the battery life of the accessory is aligned with the Talk Time power consumption, not the Standby Time consumption. Procedure:

Turn on the accessory. Then, place it close to the radio aligning the Bluetooth Pairing Location

(a blue dot) on the radio to the Bluetooth Pairing Location (a blue dot) on the accessory. If the pairing process is successful, you hear an incremental-pitched tone. The radio begins to connect to the device. If the pairing process fails, you hear a short, low-pitched tone. The display shows Bluetooth pairing failed. Repeat this step. The radio tries to establish connection with the device once paired. NOTE: If the connection fails within 6 seconds, you hear a decremental-pitched tone to indicate that the device is unpaired. The display shows <Device Type> unpaired. Repeat this step to re-initiate the pairing process. If the connection is successful, you hear an incremental-pitched tone. If the radio has the pairing record of the device and the connection fails, you hear a short, low-pitched tone. The display shows <Device Type> connect failed. For Bluetooth devices, the display shows BT. For Wireless-Pair devices, the display shows WP. 6.24.4 Standard Pairing Feature The Bluetooth Standard Pairing feature enables your Bluetooth enabled radio to search for other Bluetooth enabled and discoverable devices. NOTE: Bluetooth tones, Bluetooth menu, and preprogrammed buttons must be preprogrammed by a qualified radio technician. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. Once a device is discovered, you can initiate your radio to send a pairing request to pair with the device. 103 MN006147A01-AE Chapter 6: Advanced Features 6.24.4.1 Searching and Pairing the Bluetooth Device Prerequisites:Ensure the Bluetooth on your device is turned on and is set to Discoverable in order to enable your radio to detect your device in Bluetooth. When and where to use:Bluetooth Search in Bluetooth Standard Pairing method is used to scan for other Bluetooth devices nearby. It is set to turn off by default. Procedure:

1 Perform one of the following actions:

Press the preprogrammed Bluetooth Search button. or to BT. Press the Menu Select button directly below BT to access the Bluetooth feature to Search Devices and press the Menu Select button directly below On. screen. or If successful, the display shows followed by the names of Bluetooth devices found, if any. When the search timer expires, Available Dev screen shows a list of Bluetooth devices found. To stop the search before the search timer expires, press the preprogrammed Bluetooth Search button or the Menu Select button below Stop. If the feature fails to initiate, the radio sounds a short, low-pitched tone. The screen shows BT Search failed. Press the Menu Select button below Back to return to Bluetooth feature screen, or press or the Menu Select button below Exit to return to Home screen. 2 or to the device name and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel to connect to the device. The radio starts pairing to the device. For Bluetooth devices, the display shows BT. For Wireless-Pair devices, the display shows WP. Postrequisites:To continue with Bluetooth pairing, see Pairing with Low Frequency-Motorola Proximity Pairing (LF-MPP) Feature on page 102. 6.24.4.2 Turning On Bluetooth Visibility When and where to use:Turning Bluetooth visibility on enables other Bluetooth devices to search for your radio. The visibility of the Bluetooth is set to turn off by default. Do one of the following to turn on Bluetooth visibility. You can use the options interchangeably depending on your preference and the programmed functions. Turn on Bluetooth visibility using the radio menu BT:

or to BT. Press the Menu Select button directly below BT to access the Bluetooth feature screen. or to Visibility and press the Menu Select button directly below On. The status changes to Visible to all. Visibility mode is enabled. When the timer expires, the status changes to Visibility failed. Repeat the procedure to turn on Bluetooth visibility. Procedure:

a. b. 104 MN006147A01-AE Chapter 6: Advanced Features Turn on Bluetooth visibility using the preprogrammed button. a. Press the preprogrammed button to enable the Bluetooth visibility feature. You hear a short, medium-pitched tone. The display shows momentary Visible to all. Visibility mode is enabled. When the timer expires, the display shows momentary Visibility failed. Repeat the procedure to turn on Bluetooth visibility. NOTE: Press the preprogrammed button to toggle the Bluetooth visibility on or off. For Bluetooth devices, the display shows BT. For Wireless-Pair devices, the display shows WP. 6.24.4.3 Receiving Pairing Request from other Devices When and where to use:When your radio receives a pairing request from other device, the display shows <Device Friendly Name>pair request. Procedure:

Press the Menu Select button below Ok to accept or Cncl to refuse pairing request. For Bluetooth devices, the display shows BT. For Wireless-Pair devices, the display shows WP. 6.24.4.4 Turning Off Bluetooth Visibility Prerequisites:Ensure that Bluetooth Visibility is turned on. When and where to use:The following methods are options on how to turn off Bluetooth visibility. The result of all the methods is the same. You can use the options interchangeably depending on your preference and the programmed functions. Procedure:

a. b. Turn off Bluetooth visibility using the radio menu BT:

or to BT. Press the Menu Select button directly below BT to access the Bluetooth feature screen. or to Visibility and press the Menu Select button directly below Off. The display shows Visibility Off. When the timer expires, the status changes to Visibility off failed. Repeat this step to turn off Bluetooth visibility. c. To return to the Home screen, press the Menu Select button directly below Exit. For Bluetooth devices, the display shows BT. For Wireless-Pair devices, the display shows WP. 105 MN006147A01-AE Chapter 6: Advanced Features 6.24.5 PIN Authentication in Pairing This feature allows your radio to verify the correct device to pair with using PIN authentication. NOTE: The PIN authentication method is only applicable for Bluetooth version 2.1 and above. 6.24.5.1 Pairing the Authentication PIN when Receiving a Pairing Request Procedure:

1 When the radio display shows <Device Friendly Name> pair request, perform one of the following actions:

To accept, press the Menu Select button below Ok. To reject, press the Menu Select button below Cncl. Your radio only supports HSP, DUN, GAP, PAN, and SPP Bluetooth profiles. When the pairing timer expires, the display shows <Device Friendly Name> pair canceled and return to Home screen. If you choose to accept the pairing process, the display shows Compare PIN: XXXXXX. If you choose to reject the pairing process, the display shows Cancel pairing in progress... followed by <Device Friendly Name> pair canceled and return to Home screen. 2 Perform one of the following actions when the display shows Compare PIN: XXXXXX.:

Press the Menu Select button below Ok if the PIN is correct. Press the Menu Select button below Cncl to reject if the PIN number is incorrect. The display shows Cancel pairing in progress... followed by <Device Friendly Name> pair canceled and return to Home screen. When the PIN authentication timer expires, the display shows <Device Friendly Name>pair canceled and return to Home screen. If successful, the display shows Pairing in progress...., <Device Friendly Name>

paired followed by <Device Friendly Name>connected. If unsuccessful, one of the following scenarios will occur:

The display shows <Device Friendly Name> pair failed (if the pairing timer expires). expires). The display shows <Device Friendly Name> connect failed (if the connecting timer If the PIN is correct but the profiles are not supported, the display shows BT profiles not supported. The display returns to Home screen. For Bluetooth devices, the display shows BT. For Wireless-Pair devices, the display shows WP. 106 MN006147A01-AE Chapter 6: Advanced Features 6.24.5.2 Pairing the Authentication PIN with the Generated Numeric PIN Prerequisites:Follow the procedure in Searching and Pairing the Bluetooth Device on page 104 to search for available Bluetooth devices. Start pairing with the Authentication PIN by following the steps described next. Procedure:

1 or pairing. to the required device. Press the Menu Select button directly below Sel to initiate Your radio only supports HSP, DUN, GAP, PAN, and SPP Bluetooth profiles. If successful, the display shows Pairing in progress... followed by a randomly generated numeric PIN, Compare PIN: XXXXXX. If unsuccessful, the display shows BT profiles not supported. The display returns to Available Dev screen. 2 Press Ok to continue pairing the radio and the device. The pairing process can be canceled by pressing the Menu Select button below Cncl. If successful, the display shows Pairing in progress,<Device Friendly Name> paired, Connecting in progress... followed by <Device Friendly Name>connected. The display returns to the Bluetooth feature screen. If unsuccessful, one of the following scenarios will occur:

The display shows <Device Friendly Name> pair failed (if the PIN numbers are different).

<Device Friendly Name> connect failed (if the connection fails). The display returns to Available Dev screen. For Bluetooth devices, the display shows BT. For Wireless-Pair devices, the display shows WP. 6.24.6 Turning On the Bluetooth Audio When and where to use:Do one of the following to turn on the Bluetooth audio. You can use the options interchangeably depending on your preference and the programmed functions. Procedure:

a. b. Turning on the Bluetooth audio using the radio menu BT:

or to BT. Press the Menu Select button directly below BT to access the Bluetooth feature screen. or to Bluetooth spkr and press the Menu Select button directly below On. The display shows On. c. To return to the Home screen, press the Menu Select button directly below Exit. Turning on the Bluetooth audio using the preprogrammed button:

107 MN006147A01-AE Chapter 6: Advanced Features a. To route the audio routing from the radio to the headset, press the preprogrammed Bluetooth Audio Reroute button. You hear a short, medium-pitched tone. The display shows BT on. BT audio routing can be configured in CPS to route the audio to RSM or radio's internal speaker. The audio routes to the radio's speaker if RSM is not connected. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information on the programming of this feature. NOTE: For BT PTT press, the active microphone can be configured in CPS to transmit from either the RSM, the radio microphone, or the BT headset. If the configured device is not available, audio transmission reverts to BT headset. For Bluetooth devices, the display shows BT. For Wireless-Pair devices, the display shows WP. 6.24.7 Turning Off the Bluetooth Audio When and where to use:Do one of the following to turn off the Bluetooth Audio. You can use the options interchangeably depending on your preference and the programmed functions. Procedure:

a. b. Turning off the Bluetooth audio using the radio menu BT:

or to BT. Press the Menu Select button directly below BT to access the Bluetooth feature screen. or to Bluetooth spkr and press the Menu Select button directly below Off. The display shows Off. c. To return to the Home screen, press the Menu Select button directly below Exit. Turning off the Bluetooth audio using the preprogrammed button:

a. To route the audio routing from the headset to the radio, press the preprogrammed Bluetooth Audio Reroute button. You hear a short, medium-pitched tone. The display shows Radio audio. For Bluetooth devices, the display shows BT. For Wireless-Pair devices, the display shows WP. 6.24.8 Adjusting the Volume of the Radio from Bluetooth Audio Device Prerequisites:Ensure that the Bluetooth audio device is connected to the radio. When and where to use:

108 MN006147A01-AE Chapter 6: Advanced Features Your radio can control the volume of MCW, OCW, and other Bluetooth enabled audio devices that are capable of remote volume control. Procedure:

Adjust volume up/down on the Bluetooth audio device. The radio display shows Volume XX, and you hear a short, medium-pitched tone. For Bluetooth devices, the display shows BT. For Wireless-Pair devices, the display shows WP. 6.24.9 Viewing and Clearing the Bluetooth Device Information Procedure:

1 2 or to Devices. or to BT. Press the Menu Select button directly below BT to access the Bluetooth feature screen. Once the display highlights the Devices, the display shows XX connected alternates with XX paired. 3 Press the Menu Select button directly below Sel. 4 If there are devices being paired or connected, or along the list of <Device Friendly Name> to see the status of each device. If there are no active Bluetooth devices being paired or connected, the display shows No devices. 5 Perform one of the following actions:

To clear the device from the list, or to the required device, press the Menu Select button directly below Clr. To exit from this function, press the Menu Select button directly below Back to return to the previous screen without deleting the device name. If Clr is selected, the display shows <Device Friendly Name> clear?. 6 Press the Menu Select button directly below Yes or No to proceed delete the device or to exit this function and return to previous screen. If the device is deleted successfully, the display shows <Device Friendly Name> cleared to indicate clearing is successful. If the device is not deleted successfully, you hear the radio sounds a short, low-pitched tone. The display shows <Device Friendly Name> clear failed. The display returns to previous screen. For Bluetooth devices, the display shows BT. For Wireless-Pair devices, the display shows WP. Postrequisites:

NOTE: If Re-Pair Timer is set to infinite and you clear keys on the radio, you must clear keys on all previously paired devices as well. (Please see your Accessories manual for further details.) 109 MN006147A01-AE Chapter 6: Advanced Features 6.24.10 Clearing All Bluetooth Devices Information When and where to use:Do one of the following to clear all Bluetooth devices information. You can use the options interchangeably depending on your preference and the programmed functions. Procedure:

Clearing all Bluetooth devices information using the preprogrammed Bluetooth On/Off button:

a. Long press the preprogrammed Bluetooth On/Off button. You hear a short, medium-pitched tone. The display shows Please wait to indicate clearing is in progress. If successful, the display shows All BT devices cleared. If unsuccessful, the radio sounds a short, low-pitched tone. The display shows Clear all BT devices failed. The display returns to Bluetooth feature screen. Clearing all Bluetooth devices information using the radio menu Clr:

a. or to Devices and press the Menu Select button directly below Clr. You hear a short, medium-pitched tone. The display shows Clear all BT devices?. b. Press the Menu Select button directly below Yes to proceed. The display shows Please wait to indicate clearing is in progress. If successful, the display shows All BT devices cleared. If unsuccessful, you hear the radio sounds a short, low-pitched tone. The display shows Clear all BT devices failed. The display returns to Bluetooth feature screen. For Bluetooth devices, the display shows BT. For Wireless-Pair devices, the display shows WP. Postrequisites:

NOTE: If Re-Pair Timer is set to infinite and you clear keys on the radio, you must clear keys on all previously paired devices as well. (Please see your accessories manual for further details.) 6.24.11 Editing the Bluetooth Friendly Name Prerequisites:Your radio must be preprogrammed to allow you to use this feature. or to BT. Press the Menu Select button directly below BT to access the Bluetooth feature screen. or to Friendly name and press the Menu Select button directly below Edit. A blinking cursor appears in the Friendly Name screen. 3 Use the keypad to edit the text. 4 Perform one of the following actions:

Procedure:

1 2 110 MN006147A01-AE Chapter 6: Advanced Features Press the Menu Select button directly below Ok to save the new Friendly Name and return to the Bluetooth feature screen. Press the Menu Select button directly below Cncl to return to the Bluetooth feature screen. For Bluetooth devices, the display shows BT. For Wireless-Pair devices, the display shows WP. 6.25 ASTRO 25 (P25) Programming Over Project 25 (POP25) Also called Over-the-Air Programming, this feature allows configuration data and firmware to be upgraded to your radio over-the-air. Full use of the radio is retained during the data transfer without interrupting communication. If the upgrade happens on the ASTRO 25 and ASTRO Conventional systems, the upgrade pauses to give priorities to voice call, and continues after the voice call ended. If the upgrade happens on a Wi-Fi network, the upgrade process runs concurrently with voice calls. Once a configuration upgrade is downloaded to your radio, you can install new changes immediately or delay changes to be installed on the radio when it is being powered up. 6.25.1 Responding to the Notification of Upgrade Procedure:

1 The display shows Upgrade? and two short, medium- pitched tones sound every 30 seconds until the user makes a choice of either accepting, delaying, or rejecting the request. NOTE: Do not remove the power cable or power down the radio during the firmware upgrade process. 2 Perform one of the following actions:

One of the following scenarios occurs:

If you choose to accept, the display shows Programming Dont power off to indicate that the upgrade is about to begin. The radio resets to install the upgrade. In the case of configuration data upgrade, the process only takes a few seconds. In the case of firmware upgrade, the installation takes several minutes. NOTE: The radio cannot be used while the upgrade is being installed. Therefore, make sure to only accept the upgrade at a convenient time when immediate radio use is not required. If you choose to delay, a configuration data upgrade is installed automatically at the next power up. However, in the case of a firmware upgrade, the radio prompts Upgrade? again at the next power up. If you choose to reject, the display shows Upg Aborted. The radio continues to function with the current configuration until it gets reprogrammed. NOTE: If your radio has problems upgrading over-the-air, consult a qualified technician for details. 6.26 Voice Announcement This feature enables the radio to audibly indicate the current feature mode, zone, or channel assigned to the user. 111 MN006147A01-AE Chapter 6: Advanced Features The available voice announcement priority options are:

Voice announcement is enabled even when the radio is receiving calls. High Low Voice announcement is disabled when the radio is receiving calls. 6.27 Site Selectable Alerts (ASTRO 25 Trunking) A Site Selectable Alert (SSA) is an Intelligent Lighting indicator with audio alert. The alert is sent to radios at sites to notify the users when special situations occur. Your radio supports up to 250 site aliases. Only authorized radios are enabled to send SSA. NOTE:

The alert alias, alert tone, and alert period are configured in the Customer Programming Software. Contact your system administrator for more information. The SSA alert volume is reduced when voice audio is received at the same time. It is important that the SSA audio file is created with clear loud audio to ensure audio clarity at reduced levels. 6.27.1 Sending SSA Notification to Single Site Procedure:

1 or to SSA. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below SSA. The display shows the Site Alert screen. or to Start Alert and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel. The display shows the Select Site screen. or to the desired Site Alias. Press the Menu Select button directly below Sel. The display shows the Select Alert screen. or to select the desired Alert Alias and press the Menu Select button directly below Send. The display shows Sending req. If radio is out of range, roaming to a foreign system or in a failsoft situation, the display shows Req failed. If the request is successful, the display shows Req successful. If the site is not available, the display shows <Site Alias> not available. If the site does not exist, the display shows <Site Alias> does not exist. 6 To return to the Home screen, press the Menu Select button directly below Exit. If you are at the site designated to receive this alert, you can hear an alert tone repeated periodically. The display shows the <Alert Alias> with the intelligent lighting at Home screen. 3 4 5 112 MN006147A01-AE Chapter 6: Advanced Features 6.27.2 Sending SSA Notification to Single Site by Manual Entry Procedure:

1 or to SSA. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below SSA. The display shows the Site Alert screen. or to Start Alert and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel. The display shows the Select Site screen. or to [SiteID Entry] to send alert through the manual entry. Press the Menu Select button directly below Edit. The display shows the Enter SiteID screen. 5 Key in the desired Site ID and press the Menu Select button directly below OK. If a correct Site ID is entered, the display shows the Select Alert screen. If a wrong Site ID is entered, the display shows Invalid ID and prompts to enter the Site ID again. 6 or to select the desired Alert Alias and press the Menu Select button directly below Send. The display shows Sending req. If radio is out of range, roaming to a foreign system or in a failsoft situation, the display shows Req failed. If the request is successful, the display shows Req successful. If the site is not available, the display shows <Site ID> not available. If the site does not exist, the display shows <Site ID>does not exist. 7 To return to the Home screen, press the Menu Select button directly below Exit. If you are at the site designated to receive this alert, you can hear an alert tone repeated periodically. The display shows the <Alert Alias> with the intelligent lighting at Home screen. 6.27.3 Sending SSA Notification to All Sites Procedure:

1 or to SSA. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below SSA. The display shows the Site Alert screen. or to Start Alert and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel. The display shows the Select Site screen. or to [All Sites] and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel. The display shows the Select Alert screen. 3 4 3 4 113 MN006147A01-AE Chapter 6: Advanced Features 5 or to select the desired <Alert Alias> and press the Menu Select button directly below Send. The display shows Sending req. If radio is out of range, roaming to a foreign system or in a failsoft situation, the display shows Req failed. If the request is successful, the display shows Req successful. If one or more sites are not available, the display shows Not all sites available. Repeat step 3. 6 To return to the Home screen, press the Menu Select button directly below Exit. If you are at the site designated to receive this alert, you can hear an alert tone repeated periodically. The display shows the <Alert Alias> with the intelligent lighting at Home screen. 6.27.4 Sending SSA Notification to All Available Sites Procedure:

1 or to SSA. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below SSA. The display shows the Site Alert screen. or to Start Alert and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel. The display shows the Select Site screen. or to [All Avail] and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel. The display shows the Select Alert screen. or to select the desired Alert Alias and press the Menu Select button directly below Send. The display shows Sending req. If radio is out of range, roaming to a foreign system or in a failsoft situation, the display shows Req failed. If the request is successful, the display shows Req successful. 6 To return to the Home screen, press the Menu Select button directly below Exit. If you are at the site designated to receive this alert, you can hear an alert tone repeated periodically. The display shows the <Alert Alias> with the intelligent lighting at Home screen. 6.27.5 Stopping SSA Notification of a Single Site Procedure:

1 or to SSA. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below SSA. The display shows the Site Alert screen. 3 4 5 114 MN006147A01-AE Chapter 6: Advanced Features 3 4 3 4 or to Stop Alert and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel. The display shows the Select Site screen. or to select the desired Site Alias and press the Menu Select button directly below Send. The display shows Sending req. If radio is out of range, roaming to a foreign system or in a failsoft situation, the display shows Req failed. If the request is successful, the display shows Req successful. If the site is not available, the display shows <Site Alias> not available. If the site does not exist, the display shows <Site Alias>does not exist. 5 To return to the Home screen, press the Menu Select button directly below Exit. The SSA Alert for the designated site stops. 6.27.6 Stopping SSA Notification of a Single Site by Manual Entry Procedure:

1 or to SSA. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below SSA. The display shows the Site Alert screen. or to Stop Alert and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel. The display shows the Select Site screen. or to [SiteID Entry] and press the Menu Select button directly below Edit. The display shows the Enter SiteID screen. 5 Key in the required Site ID and press the Menu Select button directly below Send. One of the following scenarios occur:

If a wrong Site ID is entered, the display shows Invalid ID and prompts to enter the Site ID again. If a correct Site ID is entered, the display shows Sending req. If the request is successful, the display shows Req successful. If the single site is not available, the display shows <Site ID> not available. If the single site does not exist, the display shows <Site ID> does not exist. 6 To return to the Home screen, press the Menu Select button directly below Exit. The SSA Alert for the designated site stops. 115 MN006147A01-AE Chapter 6: Advanced Features 6.27.7 Stopping SSA Notification of All Sites Procedure:

1 or to SSA. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below SSA. The display shows the Site Alert screen. or to Stop Alert and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel. The display shows the Select Site screen. or to [All Sites] and press the Menu Select button directly below Send. The display shows Sending req. If radio is out of range, roaming to a foreign system or in a failsoft situation, the display shows Req failed. If the request is successful, the display shows Req successful. If one or more sites are not available, the display shows Not all sites available. Repeat step 3. 5 To return to the Home screen, press the Menu Select button directly below Exit. The SSA Alert for all sites stop. 6.27.8 Stopping SSA Notification of All Available Sites Procedure:

1 or to SSA. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below SSA. The display shows the Site Alert screen. or to Stop Alert and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel. The display shows the Select Site screen. or to [All Avail] and press the Menu Select button directly below Send. The display shows Sending req. If radio is out of range, roaming to a foreign system or in a failsoft situation, the display shows Req failed. If the request is successful, the display shows Req successful. 5 To return to the Home screen, press the Menu Select button directly below Exit. The SSA Alert for all available sites stop. 6.28 Channel Change on Off-Hook This feature determines the mode of the radio based on the Hub on/off-hook state of all the control heads. 3 4 3 4 116 MN006147A01-AE Chapter 6: Advanced Features Whenever the radio goes off-hook, it changes to a preprogrammed zone channel assigned for off-hook state. While in off-hook state, you can change the mode manually. When you return the radio to on-hook state, it reverts to its previous channel zone before the radio goes off-hook. NOTE: If the radio is operating on Tone Private Line (PL) Defeat or Suspend Scan operations during on-hook state, the radio is converted to work in a new channel and the Channel Change on Off-Hook feature is suspended until these conditions end. During Dynamic Regroup channel selector lock state, Emergency, Transmit Inhibit, radio lock, or when an external key loader is attached to the radio, the Channel Change on Off-Hook feature is suspended until the following conditions end. The Off-Hook State for APX Dual-Radio Setup For Dual-Radio, the state of the Hub on the unselected radio is always considered as on-hook. When the Hub is in off-hook state, the selected radio changes the channel according to the configuration of the Customer Programming Software (CPS), and the unselected radio does not trigger a channel change. With Channel Change on Off-Hook enabled, when the Hub is placed off-hook and radio switch happens, the new selected radio moves to the target channel zone of its off-hook state. The new unselected radio reverts to the last user selected channel before the off-hook state. The Off-Hook State for Multiple Radios Setup When multiple control heads are connected, the states of these Hubs reflect the state of the active control head(s). Any Hub placed off-hook by the active control head(s) makes the radio goes into off-hook state. The radio can be in on-hook state only when all Hubs are placed on-hook. NOTE: Familiarize yourself with the functionality of this feature as removing the microphone easily triggers a mode change on the radio. 6.29 Low Voltage Threshold Warning A specific external device is attached to the radio to monitor the automobile voltage. When the car battery went lower than a pre-defined threshold, the external device asserts the Vehicular Interface Port (VIP) input to the radio. When the VIP switch turns on, the VIP asserts input to the radio. The radio immediately initiates a 15 seconds of low Voltage Pre-alert Timer. If the status of the VIP changed before this time-out timer ends, the radio returns to normal operation. If the status from the VIP remains unchanged when the time-out timer ends, the radio shows Low Battery message on the display and low alert tone. The radio sounds a high-pitched tone immediately after the PTT button is released. NOTE: If the mobile radio does not have a control head connected, the bricks can only alert the user with battery alert tone and the transmit chirp. 6.30 Wi-Fi You can connect your radio to a Wi-Fi network for wireless programming. Your service administrator preprograms the Wi-Fi Service Set Identifier (SSID) or network name that your radio can connect to. 6.30.1 Turning Wi-Fi On or Off Procedure:

Turning Wi-Fi on or off using the preprogrammed button:

117 MN006147A01-AE Chapter 6: Advanced Features a. To toggle the Wi-Fi on or off, press the preprogrammed Wi-Fi button. This button must be preprogrammed by a qualified radio technician. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. Turning Wi-Fi on or off using the radio menu button:

a. or to WiFi and press the Menu Select button directly below WiFi.

If the display shows WiFi Status being Off, press the Menu Select button directly below On. If the display shows WiFi Status as Searching, Connecting, Connected or No Service, press the Menu Select button directly below Off to turn off Wi-Fi. 6.30.2 Selecting WiFi Network Procedure:

This feature allows you to view and select the available WiFi network. 1 Press the Menu Select button directly below WiFi to enter WiFi screen. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below On to turn on the WiFi. Radio starts searching for available network. 3 Press the Menu Select button directly below List. Radio displays available network selection and the network signal strength. If the radio displays No network available, press the Menu Select button directly below to search for available networks. 4 Press or to scroll through the list and press Menu Select button directly below Sel to connect to the selected network. Radio displays the WiFi status, the selected network, and the signal strength. NOTE: The List and buttons are not available when WiFi is searching or connecting to network. 6.30.3 Checking the Wi-Fi Configuration and Status of the Radio Procedure:

1 Perform one of the following actions:

Long press the preprogrammed Wi-Fi button. or to WiFi and press the Menu Select button directly below WiFi. The display shows the current status of the Wi-Fi as described next. Searching Looking for available Wi-Fi networks that have been preprogrammed into the radio. In the process of connecting to a found Wi-Fi network. Connecting Connected Connected to one of the preprogrammed Wi-Fi networks. 118 MN006147A01-AE Chapter 6: Advanced Features No Service No available networks or connection with one of the networks failed. If the radio is Wi-Fi connected, you see a Wi-Fi signal strength indicator, on the display.In addition, the WiFi menu shows Connected under the connection Status heading, what network you are connected to under the Network heading, and the signal strength to that network under the Sig Strength heading. 2 Press to exit. 6.31 Utilities 6.31.1 Selecting the Power Level Prerequisites:

This chapter explains the operations of the utility functions available in your radio. NOTE: This feature must be preprogrammed by a qualified radio technician. When and where to use:This feature enables you to reduce the transmit power level for specific case that requires a lower power level. You can select the power level at which your radio transmits. The radio always turns on to the default setting. Power level Low enables a shorter transmitting distance and to conserve power. Power level High enables a longer transmitting distance. Do one of the following to select the power level. You can use the options interchangeably depending on your preference and the programmed functions. Procedure:

Selecting the Power Level using the Transmit Power Level switch:

a. Use the preprogrammed Transmit Power Level switch to toggle the power level between low and high power. Selecting the Power Level using the radio menu:

a. or to Pwr. b. Press the Menu Select button directly below Pwr. The display shows Low power and the low power icon or the display shows High power and the high power icon. 6.31.2 Selecting a Radio Profile When and where to use:This feature allows you to manually switch the visual and audio settings of the radio. The display, backlight, alert tones, and audio settings are defined according to the preprogrammed radio settings of each radio profile. Refer to a qualified technician for more information. 119 MN006147A01-AE Chapter 6: Advanced Features Do one of the following to select a radio profile. You can use the options interchangeably depending on your preference and the programmed functions. Procedure:

Selecting a radio profile using the preprogrammed Profile button:

a. Press the preprogrammed Profile button. b. or to scroll through the menu selections. c. Press the Menu Select button directly below Sel to select the required radio profile, or press the Menu Select button directly below Exit to exit the screen without making any changes. The radio returns to the Home screen. The profile name on the Home screen indicates the current selected radio profile. Selecting a radio profile using the radio menu:

a. or to Prfl and press the Menu Select button directly below Prfl to access the Profiles feature screen. b. or to scroll through the menu selections. c. Press the Menu Select button directly below Sel to select the required radio profile, or press the Menu Select button directly below Exit to exit the screen without making any changes. The radio returns to the Home screen. The profile name on the Home screen indicates the current selected radio profile. 6.31.3 Controlling the Display Backlight When and where to use:You can enable or disable the radio display backlight as needed, if poor light conditions make the display or keypad difficult to read. Press the Dimmer button to adjust the brightness of the display. Long press to toggle between day and night mode. 6.31.4 Turning the Keypad Tones On or Off When and where to use:You can enable and disable keypad tones as needed. Turning the tones on or off using the preprogrammed Keypad Mute button:

a. To turn the tones off or on, press the preprogrammed Keypad Mute button. Turning the tones on or off using the radio menu:

a. or to Mute. b. Press the Menu Select button directly below Mute. The display shows momentary Tones off, indicating that the tones are disabled or the display shows momentary Tones on, and you hear a short tone indicating that the tones are enabled. Procedure:

Procedure:

120 MN006147A01-AE Chapter 6: Advanced Features This feature allows you to mute the voice transmission of the current zone and channel. 6.31.5 Turning Voice Mute On or Off When and where to use:

Procedure:

Turning Voice Mute off or on using the preprogrammed Voice Mute button:

a. To turn the feature off or on, press the preprogrammed Voice Mute button. Turning Voice Mute on or off using the radio menu:

a. or to VMut. The display shows Voice mute off, and you hear a short tone, indicating that the feature is disabled or the display shows Voice mute on, and you hear a short tone, indicating that the feature is enabled. 6.31.6 Using the Time-Out Timer When and where to use:This feature turns off the transmitter of your radio. You cannot transmit longer than the preset timer setting. If you attempt to do so, the radio automatically stops your transmission, and you hear a talk-prohibit tone. The timer is defaulted at 60 seconds, but it can be preprogrammed from 15 to 465 seconds, in 15-second intervals, or it can be disabled entirely for each radio mode, by a qualified radio technician. NOTE: You hear a brief, low-pitched, warning tone four seconds before the transmission times out. Procedure:

1 Hold down the PTT button longer than the preprogrammed time. You hear a continuous talk prohibit tone. The transmission is cut off and the LED goes out. 2 Release the PTT button. The timer resets. 3 To re-transmit, press the PTT button. The time-out timer restarts and the LED lights up solid red. 6.31.7 Conventional Squelch Operation This feature filters out unwanted calls with low signal strength or channels that have a higher than normal background noise. Tone Private Line, Digital Private-Line, and carrier squelch is available (preprogrammed) per channel. Analog Options Option Carrier squelch Result You hear all traffic on a channel. 121 MN006147A01-AE Chapter 6: Advanced Features Option Result Tone Private Line or Digital Private-Line The radio responds only to your messages. Digital Options One or more of the following options may be preprogrammed in your radio. Contact your system administrator for more information. Option Result Digital Carrier-Operated Squelch You hear all digital traffic. You hear any digital traffic having the correct network access code. You hear any digital traffic having the correct network access code and correct talkgroup. 6.31.7.1 Using Conventional Squelch Operation Features Normal Squelch Selective Switch Procedure:

1 or to Sql. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below Sql. The display shows Squelch XX, where XX is the value for the current squelch. 3 Perform one of the following actions:

Press the Menu Select button directly below + to increase the squelch volume. Press the Menu Select button directly below - to decrease the squelch volume. 4 Press to return to the selected channel. 6.31.8 Using the PL Defeat Feature This feature allows you to override any coded squelch that preprogrammed to a channel. The radio also unmutes to any digital activity on a digital channel. When this feature is active, the Carrier Squelch status indicator is displayed. Procedure:

Remove the microphone from the hub to enable the PL Defeat feature. One of the following occurs:

The radio plays the active transmission on the channel. If no activity is present, the radio is muted 122 MN006147A01-AE Chapter 6: Advanced Features 6.31.9 Digital PTT ID Support This feature allows you to see the radio ID (number) of the radio from whom you are currently receiving a transmission. The receiving radio and the dispatcher can view the ID, which consists of up to a maximum of eight characters. The ID number of your radio is also automatically sent every time you press the PTT button. This feature is preprogrammed per channel. For digital voice transmissions, the ID of your radio is sent continuously during the voice message. 6.31.10 Smart PTT (Conventional Only) Smart PTT is a per-personality, programmable feature used to keep radio users from talking over other radio conversations. When Smart PTT is enabled in your radio, you cannot transmit on an active channel. The following table shows the variations of Smart PTT. Mode Description Transmit Inhibit on Busy Channel with Carrier Transmit Inhibit on Busy Channel with Wrong Squelch Code You cannot transmit if traffic is detected on the channel. You cannot transmit on an active channel with a squelch code or (if secure-equipped) encryption key other than your own. If the PL code is the same as yours, the transmission is not preven-

ted. You cannot transmit when the radio is in a NAC operated digital voice call channel. You cannot transmit when the radio is in a dig-

ital voice call with the last signal status bit as inbound busy or unknown. Transmit Inhibit on Correct NAC Transmit Inhibit on Status Symbols 6.31.11 Transmit Inhibit This feature allows you to stops all transmission including voice and data. The radio can receive messages but not able to reply the acknowledgment request of the received message. This feature is available for APCO 25 trunking, Type II trunking and Conventional operations for all APX radios. You can physically control the transmission of the radio especially during operation in hazardous environments. An environment is considered hazardous if radio transmission could initiate an explosion or other dangerous reactions. 6.31.11.1 Enabling Transmit Inhibition Procedure:

Perform one of the following actions:

or to TxIn. Press the Menu Select button below TxIn. 123 MN006147A01-AE Chapter 6: Advanced Features Turn off the ignition through Ignition Sense Line. The display shows Tx inhibit on. You hear a sequence of short, low-high tones to indicate that transmission is inhibited. Pressing PTT triggers the radio sounds a constant short, low-pitched tone (reject tone). NOTE: The status of the Transmit Inhibit does not change after the radio powers up. The softkey TxIn is created to ease the user of inhibition transmission besides relying solely on Ignition Sense Line. Only if the Ignition Sense Line is on, the softkey TxIn works. If the Ignition Sense Line is on, you can always turn on or off the Transmit Inhibition using the softkey TxIn; but when the Ignition Sense Line is off, function of softkey TxIn is suspended, and the Transmit Inhibition function is always off. If PTT TX Inhibit is enabled, when using multi-control head with one active configuration, with the PTT pressed on the active control head, any press on the programmable button of the other control head which meant for that control head to be active control head causes an unstoppable long low-pitched tone (Talk Prohibit Tone). The display shows Tx inhibit. This behavior can be stopped by pressing PTT button again on the active control head 6.31.11.2 Disabling Transmit Inhibition Procedure:

Perform one of the following actions:

or to TxIn. Press the Menu Select button below TxIn. Turn on the ignition through Ignition Sense Line. The display shows Tx inhibit off. You hear a sequence of short, high-low tone (Transmit Inhibit Off tone) to indicate that the transmission is back to normal operation. 6.31.12 Universal Relay Controller The Universal Relay Controller (URC) is a relay module that controls the patterns on the Light Bar operation. The URC receives logic level input signals configured by programmable logic controller (PLC), process controllers, and indicators to switch on/off a series of output signals. The URC supports up to 25 customized patterns, each pattern is a combination of 10 relays in the URC. The buttons or knobs that support URC are:

P Button Keypad Buttons URC also supports Action Consolidation feature to run the lightbar. Consult a qualified radio technician for details on customizing different relay patterns using the Customer Programming Software. 6.31.13 External Alarms (Horn and Lights) Your service administrator may configure the control heads with external alarms (horn and lights) that are activated when a Call Alert Page, Private Call, or Phone Call is received. The radio always powers up with the horn and lights feature enabled. 124 MN006147A01-AE Chapter 6: Advanced Features 6.31.13.1 Using Non-Permanent Horn and Lights Procedure:

1 Press the Menu Select button directly below H/L momentarily. The last selected alarm(s) are enabled, and the display shows the enabled alarm(s) alternating with the selected mode, until it is turned off. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below H/L momentarily to turn off the alarm(s). The display shows Horn/Lites off. 6.31.13.2 Using Permanent Horn and Lights When and where to use:If Permanent Horn and Lights is enabled, horn and lights will automatically turn on when the radio powers up. Procedure:

alarm(s). 1 Press the Menu Select button directly below H/L once to turn off the alarm(s). 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below H/L momentarily to enable the last selected The display briefly shows the enabled alarms, and then reverts to the selected mode. 6.31.13.3 Changing the Selected Alarms Procedure:

2 Perform one of the following actions:

1 Press the Menu Select button directly below H/L until the display shows the required alarm. Press the Menu Select button directly below H+L to turn on both horn and lights. Press the Menu Select button directly below Lgts to turn on the lights. Press the Menu Select button directly below Horn to turn on the horn. One of the following scenarios occurs:

If you choose H+L, the display shows Horn/Lites on. If you choose Lgts, the display shows Lights on. If you choose Horn, the display shows Horn on. An Off entry is shown at the softkey when one of the alarms is active. Selecting Off deactivates the current active alarm. 6.31.13.4 Receiving a Call While Alarms are Turned On When and where to use:When you receive a call with the Alarms turned on, the vehicle horn sounds for 4 seconds, and/or the car lights turn on for 60 seconds. The display shows the type of call received (Call, Page, or Phone) and the selected mode name. 125 MN006147A01-AE Chapter 6: Advanced Features The time interval can be modified by a qualified radio technician. 6.31.13.5 Turning Off Non-Rearmable External Alarms Procedure:

1 Perform one of the following actions:

Press the Menu Select button directly below Call, Page or Phon to turn off the external alarm(s) and access that feature. Press the PTT button or any control-head button to turn off the external alarm(s). 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below H/L momentarily to rearm the horn and lights feature. 6.31.13.6 Turning Off Rearmable External Alarms Procedure:

Perform one of the following actions:

Press the Menu Select button directly below Call, Page or Phon to turn off the external alarm(s) and access that feature. The external alarm(s) is turned off and automatically rearmed so that when you exit the entry, the external alarm(s) will automatically turn on. Press the PTT button or any control head button other than the Menu Select button directly below H/L to turn off the external alarm(s). The external alarm(s) is turned off and automatically rearmed so that when you exit the entry, the external alarm(s) will automatically turn on. Press the Menu Select button directly below H/L to turn off the external alarm(s) and exit the Horn and Lights feature. Press the Menu Select button directly below H/L momentarily to rearm the horn and lights feature. 6.31.14 Programmable Button Configurations for Gun Lock This feature uses the programmable buttons of the radio to control up to three gun locks. The available configurations are:

Gun Lock 1 triggers first gun lock to open. Gun Lock 2 triggers second gun lock to open. Gun Lock 3 triggers third gun lock to open. All Gun Locks triggers all gun locks to open concurrently but close in a sequence with a few seconds of difference in between. Due to security purposes, neither text nor icon is displayed for this feature. 6.31.14.1 Unlocking All Gun Locks Unlocking all Gun Locks with relock timer:

Procedure:

126 MN006147A01-AE Chapter 6: Advanced Features a. Press the preprogrammed Gun Lock Button. All the Gun Locks open concurrently. b. Place or remove your guns from the Gun Locks in the sequence from Gun Lock 1 to Gun Lock 3. The locks close when the timer for each lock expires. The locks are arranged in the sequence from Gun Lock 1 to Gun Lock 3. Unlocking all Gun Locks without relock timer a. Press and hold the preprogrammed Gun Lock Button. All the Gun Locks open. b. Place or remove the required guns from the Gun Locks. c. Release the preprogrammed Gun Lock Button. All the Gun Locks close. 6.31.15 Action Consolidation Mode This feature allows your radio to execute a series of actions by a preprogrammed button. The Action Consolidation Mode has the following features:

Activates the lightbar with patterns Activates the siren Switches to predefined zone or channel for Talkaround or Direct Mode Sends a status update to dispatch for Talkaround or Direct Mode Sends a GPS report All other activities are blocked during Action Consolidation, except Group Call. NOTE: Action for Siren, Lightbar, or Gunlock can only be activated one at a time in Action Consolidation mode. 6.31.15.1 Activating the Action Consolidation Activities Procedure:

Press the preprogrammed button of Action Consolidation. The display shows the activities of the required programs run by the radio. If successful, the radio reverts to normal when Action Consolidation activities are complete. If unsuccessful, the display shows Action Consolidation Failed. The Failed Actions screen appears. The screen shows a list of actions that failed to run. 127 6.31.15.2 Deactivating the Action Consolidation Activities When and where to use:When the radio is running activities of the Action Consolidation, the following interruptions shall end the Action Consolidation activities. MN006147A01-AE Chapter 6: Advanced Features Procedure:

Press

. The display shows Action Consolidation Canceled. The radio ends the transmission and reverts to Home mode. Press PTT button to transmit. The display shows Action Consolidation Canceled. The radio ends the transmission and reverts to Home mode. NOTE: The Siren and Lightbar activities run by Action Consolidation are not deactivated, but continue until they are completely or manually disabled. Press Emergency button or received an Emergency message. The display shows Action Consolidation Canceled. The radio ends the transmission and reverts to Home mode and launch emergency. 6.31.16 Front Panel Programming You are able to customize certain feature parameters in Front Panel Programming (FPP) to enhance the use of your radio. The radio can be programmed in two ways:

Front Panel Programming (FPP) using the front panel controls of the radio. Customer Programming Software (CPS), with the radio connected to a PC computer. There are two methods to program a channel within a zone. Either:

Select the zone and channel through the radio interface, and then initiate the FPP feature. Or, initiate the FPP feature, and then select the zone and channel. NOTE: When any of the Rx parameters such as Rx frequency, Rx PL, Rx DPL, and Rx NAC is changed, FPP automatically copies these Rx parameter values to the equivalent Direct operation (also known as Talkaround operation) parameters. If you use FPP to change the Rx frequency to be the same as the Tx frequency and subsequently use the CPS to read then write to the radio, Direct/Talkaround mode will operate differently from when a receive channel parameter value is changed through FPP (as described in the above note). Refer to the CPS help files for a description of Direct/ Talkaround Mode operation, in respect to a CPS write to the radio. 6.31.16.1 Initiating the FPP Feature Prerequisites:Before using this feature, you should:

Familiarize yourself with the your radio. Remove the universal connector seal or any other accessories if it is attached to the radio. 128 MN006147A01-AE Chapter 6: Advanced Features Procedure:

1 Press or to FPP. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below FPP. If you are going to program zones which are not password protected (only supported in Federal FPP), go to step 4. If you are going to program a set of zones, of which one or more are password protected, go to step 3. The radio displays Password. 3 Key in the password. The radio displays Password: ********. 4 Press OK. The radio displays Radio Param and Zn/Ch Param. 6.31.16.2 Changing Password (Optional) Radios from the Motorola Solutions factory are provisioned with a blank password. Prerequisites:To access the protected channels, press OK when the Enter Old password:

prompt to change the password Procedure:

1 Press EDIT. The radio displays Enter Old password. 2 Key in the old password, and press OK to accept the entry. The screen displays Enter New password. 3 Key in the new password, and press OK to accept the entry. The screen displays Re-enter New password. 4 Key in the new password again, and press OK to accept the entry. 6.31.16.3 Selecting a Channel within a Zone Procedure:

1 Press or to FPP and press the Menu Select button directly below FPP. The radio displays the Enter password screen 2 Enter the password and press the Menu Select button directly below Ok. 3 Press or to select Zn/Ch. 4 Press 5 Press or or to select the required zone and press SEL to view the channels. to select the required channel and press SEL to access the channel parameter. The radio displays the channel parameter screen. 6 Press or to select the required channel parameter. 129 MN006147A01-AE Chapter 6: Advanced Features 6.31.16.4 Changing a Channel Parameter Procedure:

1 Press or to FPP and press the Menu Select button directly below FPP. The radio displays the Enter password screen 2 Enter the password and press the Menu Select button directly below Ok. 3 or to scroll through the various information. 4 Press EDIT to edit the channel parameter. 5 Change the parameter value. 6 Press OK to accept the parameter change and return to view mode. 7 Perform one of the following actions and proceed to the next step:

or to select other channel parameters. Press BACK to access a different channel and make any necessary programming changes. 8 Press BACK to return to Zone List Selector. 9 Press BACK to return to FPP main menu. 10 Press to return to the Home screen. 6.31.16.5 Editing Parameters When and where to use:Use the keypad to enter the numeric digits. Each key can generate different characters of the alphabet through multiple presses of the same key. For all parameters except Chan Name, Zone Name, Top Chan Name and Top Zone Name the or buttons increment or decrement the selected value by scrolling through the valid entries. Procedure:

1 Perform the following actions based on the type of the parameter:

Table 8: Parameter Editing Keys Parameter Editing Keys Value Tx Rx Tx PL Rx PL Tx DPL Rx DPL Tx NAC Rx NAC 130 Perform one of the following:

or to increment entry and to move cursor. Use keypad to directly enter the desired value. Perform one of the following:

or to increment entry and to move cursor. Use keypad to directly enter the desired value. DEL to delete the parameter value of PL entered. In addition, for Tx DPL and Rx DPL, the INVT softkey switches INVERT on and off. or to increment or decrement entry and to move cursor within parameter value. MN006147A01-AE Chapter 6: Advanced Features Parameter Editing Keys Value Use keypad to enter hexadecimal numbers:

Plus, multiple press 2 to scroll through A, B, C, 2. Plus, multiple press 3 to scroll through D, E, F, 3. Rx Type Perform one of the following:

or to toggle between valid entries. Press the keypad digits for quick access to locations in the list. Tx Type Bandwidth Protect Tx Deviation Power Level Hot Keypad Busy LED Low Batt LED MPL Enable Scan List Zone Name Top Chan Name Top Zone Name Chan Name Use keypad to enter numbers and alphabet characters. For more informa-

tion, see Keypad on page 21. NOTE:

To edit Tx PL, Rx PL, Tx DPL, and Rx DPL, the PL Setting must be set to Disabled. If PL setting is set to ALL, Rx or Tx, there is no Edit selection available to change the codes for Tx PL, Rx PL, Tx DPL, or Rx DPL. If PL setting is set to Rx, you can only edit Tx PL and Tx DPL codes. If PL setting is set to Tx, you can only edit Rx PL and Rx DPL codes. ANALOG/

DIGITAL/

MIXED ANALOG/

DIGITAL 25kHz/

20kHz/

12.5kHz ON/OFF 5.0 kHz/4.0 kHz/2.5 kHz High/Low ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF Disabled/Rx

/Tx/All None/Scan List 1, 2, 3,... 131 MN006147A01-AE Chapter 7: Accessories Chapter 7 Accessories Not all accessories are FCC certified to operate with all radio models and/or band splits. See the radio price pages for a list of FCC certified accessories or contact your sales representative for accessory compatibility. Accessories for usage in the HAZARD ZONE include:

Accessories that are prohibited in the HAZARD ZONE include:

See http://www.motorolasolutions.com to know more about the accessories supported by this radio. NOTE: GPS only antenna is used in either a single band UHF or 700/800 MHz application where the Public Safety Microphone (PSM) is used with the corresponding PSM antenna. This antenna is only for GPS reception and cannot be used for receive/transmit operation at UHF, VHF, or 700/800. Do not use this antenna on the PSM. 132 MN006147A01-AE Legal and Compliance Statements Legal and Compliance Statements Disclaimer The information in this document is carefully examined, and is believed to be entirely reliable. However, no responsibility is assumed for inaccuracies. Furthermore, Motorola Solutions reserves the right to change any products to improve readability, function, or design. Motorola Solutions does not assume any liability arising out of the applications or use of any product or circuit described herein; nor does it cover any license under its patent rights, nor the rights of others. Declaration of Conformity Per FCC CFR 47 Part 2 Section 2.1077(a) Responsible Party Name: Motorola Solutions, Inc. Address: 2000 Progress Pkwy, Schaumburg, IL 60196-1078, U.S.A. Phone Number: 1-800-927-2744 Hereby declares that APX Mobile conforms to FCC Part 15, subpart B, section 15.107(a), 15.107(d), and section 15.109(a) Class B Digital Device As a personal computer peripheral, this device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

1 This device may not cause harmful interference, and 133 MN006147A01-AE Legal and Compliance Statements 2 This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. NOTE:

This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. Consult the dealer or an experienced radio or TV technician for help. Important Safety Information RF Energy Exposure and Product Safety Guide for Mobile Two-Way Radios CAUTION:

This radio is restricted to Occupational use only. Before using the radio, read the RF Energy Exposure and Product Safety Guide for Mobile Two-Way Radios which contains important operating instructions for safe usage and RF energy awareness and control for Compliance with applicable standards and Regulations. For a list of Motorola Solutions-approved antennas and other accessories, visit:

http://www.motorolasolutions.com Any modification to this device, not expressly authorized by Motorola Solutions, may void your authority to operate this device. Under Industry Canada regulations, this radio transmitter may only operate using an antenna of a type and maximum (or lesser) gain approved for the transmitter by Industry Canada. To reduce potential radio interference to other users, the antenna type and its gain should be so chosen that the equivalent isotropically radiated power (e.i.r.p.) is not more than that necessary for successful communication. This radio transmitter is approved by Industry Canada to operate with a Motorola Solutions-approved antenna with the maximum permissible gain and required antenna impedance for each antenna type indicated. Antenna types not included in this list, having a gain greater than the maximum gain indicated for that type, are strictly prohibited for use with this device. NOTE: Setting up the radio as an RF Modem takes complete control of the radio. In this mode, the radio no longer responds to button and PTT presses nor will it unmute to voice activity. This mode is designed to receive and pass formatted over-the-air data to a tethered computer with RF modem enabled applications. This mode can only be exit by reprogramming the radio with Customer Programming Software (CPS) to not operate in RF modem mode and cycling power. Notice to Users (FCC) This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules per the following conditions:

This device may not cause harmful interference. 134 MN006147A01-AE Legal and Compliance Statements The device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Changes or modifications made to this device, not expressly approved by Motorola Solutions, could void the authority of the user to operate this equipment. FCC Licensing Information This device complies with Parts 90 and 15 of the Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Rules. Operation is subject to the condition that this device does not cause harmful interference. The radio operates on radio frequencies that are regulated by the Federal Communications Commission (FCC). To transmit on these frequencies, you are required to have a license issued by the FCC. Application is made available on FCC Form 601 and Schedules D, H, and Remittance Form 159. To obtain these FCC forms, request document 000601 which includes all forms and instructions. If you wish to have the document faxed, mailed or have questions, use the following contact information. Contact the Fax-On-Demand system at 1-202-418-0177 Call the FCC forms hotline at 1-800-418-FORM or 1-800-418-3676 Fax Mail Contact For questions regarding FCC license, contact 1-888-CALL-FCC, 1-888-225-5322, or http://

www.fcc.gov. Before filling out your application, you must decide which frequency you can operate on. For questions on determining the radio frequency, call Motorola Solutions Product Services at: 1-800-448- 6686. Changes or modifications not expressly approved by Motorola Solutions may void the user authority granted by the FCC to operate this radio and should not be made. To comply with FCC requirements, transmitter adjustments should be made only by or under the supervision of a person certified as technically qualified to perform transmitter maintenance and repairs in the private land mobile and fixed services as certified by an organization representative of the user of those services. Replacement of any transmitter component such as crystal, semiconductor, and others not authorized by the FCC equipment authorization for this radio could violate FCC rules. NOTE: Use of this radio outside the country where it was intended to be distributed is subject to government regulations and may be prohibited. Applying for Canadian License The operation of your Motorola Solutions radio is subject to the Radio communications Act and must comply with rules and regulations of the Federal Government's department of Industry Canada. Industry Canada requires that all operators using Private Land Mobile frequencies obtain a radio license before operating their equipment. Prerequisites:Obtain the latest Canadian License Application form at http://www.ic.gc.ca/ic_wp-

pa.htm. Procedure:

1 Fill in the items as per the instructions. Be sure to print legibly. If you need additional space for any item, use the reverse side of the application. 2 Make a copy of your files. for each radio purchased. 3 Prepare a cheque or money order payable to the "Receiver General for Canada", for an amount The license is renewed on April 1st each year, and issued for a period of 12 months. 135 MN006147A01-AE Legal and Compliance Statements 4 Mail your completed application along with your cheque or money order to the closest Industry Canada District office. 136 MN006147A01-AE Maritime Radio Use in the VHF Frequency Range Maritime Radio Use in the VHF Frequency Range Special Channel Assignments Emergency Channel If you are in imminent and grave danger at sea and require emergency assistance, use VHF Channel 16 to send a distress call to nearby vessels and the United States Coast Guard. Transmit the following information, in this order:

1 MAYDAY, MAYDAY, MAYDAY. 2 THIS IS _____________________, CALL SIGN __________. State the name of the vessel in distress 3 times, followed by the call sign or other identification of the vessel, stated 3 times. 3 Repeat MAYDAY and the name of the vessel. 4 WE ARE LOCATED AT _______________________. State the position of the vessel in distress, using any information that will help responders to locate you, e.g.:

latitude and longitude bearing (state whether you are using true or magnetic north) distance to a well-known landmark vessel course, speed or destination 5 State the nature of the distress. 6 Specify what kind of assistance you need. length and/or tonnage, hull color, etc. 9 OVER. 10 Wait for a response. 7 State the number of persons on board and the number needing medical attention, if any. 8 Mention any other information that would be helpful to responders, such as type of vessel, vessel 11 If you do not receive an immediate response, remain by the radio and repeat the transmission at intervals until you receive a response. Be prepared to follow any instructions given to you. Non-Commercial Call Channel For non-commercial transmissions, such as fishing reports, rendezvous arrangements, repair scheduling, or berthing information, use VHF Channel 9. Operating Frequency Requirements A radio designated for shipboard use must comply with Federal Communications Commission Rule Part 80 as follows:

on ships subject to Part II of Title III of the Communications Act, the radio must be capable of operating on the 156.800 MHz frequency. on ships subject to the Safety Convention, the radio must be capable of operating:

in the simplex mode on the ship station transmitting frequencies specified in the 156.025 157.425 MHz frequency band, and 137 MN006147A01-AE Maritime Radio Use in the VHF Frequency Range

in the semiduplex mode on the two frequency channels specified in the table below. NOTE:

Simplex channels 3, 21, 23, 61, 64, 81, 82, and 83 cannot be lawfully used by the general public in US waters. Additional information about operating requirements in the Maritime Services can be obtained from the full text of FCC Rule Part 80 and from the US Coast Guard. Table 9: VHF Marine Channel List Channel Number Frequency (MHz) 1 2

4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13**

14 15**

16 17**

18 19 20 22

24 25 26 27 28 60 138 Transmit 156.050 156.100 156.150 156.200 156.250 156.300 156.350 156.400 156.450 156.500 156.550 156.600 156.650 156.700 156.750 156.800 156.850 156.900 156.950 157.000 157.050 157.100 157.150 157.200 157.250 157.300 157.350 157.400 156.025 Receive 160.650 160.700 160.750 160.800 160.850 160.950 156.450 156.500 156.550 156.600 156.650 156.700 156.750 156.800 156.850 161.500 161.550 161.600 161.650 161.700 161.750 161.800 161.850 161.900 161.950 162.000 160.625 67**

77**

62 63

65 66 68 69 71 72 73 74 75 76 78 79 80

84 85 86 87 88 156.075 156.125 156.175 156.225 156.275 156.325 156.375 156.425 156.475 156.575 156.625 156.675 156.725

156.875 156.925 156.975 157.025 157.075 157.125 157.175 157.225 157.275 157.325 157.375 157.425 MN006147A01-AE Maritime Radio Use in the VHF Frequency Range 160.675 160.725 160.775 160.825 160.875 160.925 156.375 156.425 156.475 156.575 156.675 156.725

161.525 161.575 161.625 161.675 161.725 161.775 161.825 161.875 161.925 161.975 162.025 139 NOTE:

* Simplex channels 3, 21, 23, 61, 64, 81, 82, and 83 cannot be lawfully used by the general public in US waters.

** Low power (1 W) only.

*** Guard band. NOTE: A in the Receive column indicates that the channel is transmit only. MN006147A01-AE Maritime Radio Use in the VHF Frequency Range Declaration of Compliance for the Use of Distress and Safety Frequencies The radio equipment does not employ a modulation other than the internationally adopted modulation for maritime use when it operates on the distress and safety frequencies specified in RSS-182 Section 7.3. Technical Parameters for Interfacing External Data Sources Input Voltage (Volts Peak-to-peak) Max Data Rate Impedance RS232 18 V 115 Kbps 5000 USB 3.6 V 12 Mbps 90 SB9600 5 V 9.6 Kbps 120 140 MN006147A01-AE Limited Warranty Limited Warranty MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS COMMUNICATION PRODUCTS I. WHAT THIS WARRANTY COVERS AND FOR HOW LONG:

MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS, INC. (MOTOROLA) warrants the MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS manufactured Communication Products listed below (Product) against defects in material and workmanship under normal use and service for a period of time from the date of purchase as scheduled below:

ASTRO APX Mobile Radios Product Accessories One (1) Year One (1) Year MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS, at its option, will at no charge either repair the Product (with new or reconditioned parts), replace it (with a new or reconditioned Product), or refund the purchase price of the Product during the warranty period provided it is returned in accordance with the terms of this warranty. Replaced parts or boards are warranted for the balance of the original applicable warranty period. All replaced parts of Product shall become the property of MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS. This express limited warranty is extended by MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS to the original end user purchaser only and is not assignable or transferable to any other party. This is the complete warranty for the Product manufactured by MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS. MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS assumes no obligations or liability for additions or modifications to this warranty unless made in writing and signed by an officer of MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS. Unless made in a separate agreement between MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS and the original end user purchaser, MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS does not warrant the installation, maintenance or service of the Product. MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS cannot be responsible in any way for any ancillary equipment not furnished by MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS which is attached to or used in connection with the Product, or for operation of the Product with any ancillary equipment, and all such equipment is expressly excluded from this warranty. Because each system which may use the Product is unique, MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS disclaims liability for range, coverage, or operation of the system as a whole under this warranty. MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS offers the following optional extended service contracts. DEVICE MANAGED SERVICES (DMS) ACCIDENTAL DAMAGE Provides for extended hardware repair coverage INCLUDING CHEMICAL, LIQUID, FIRE, AND OTHER PHYSICAL DAMAGE. Accidental damage coverage is available in conjunction with MOTOROLA SOLUTIONSS standard Commercial Warranty and starts from the FIRST DAY the radio is put into use. Service performed under this plan consists of repair or replacement of the covered equipment as set forth in the terms and conditions. Repairs will be made only at the designated MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS repair depot. Local services are not included. MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS will pay the inbound shipping charges only with use of the MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS designated delivery service. MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS will pay for outbound shipping via MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS'S normal shipping methods. DEVICE MANAGED SERVICES (DMS) STANDARD HARDWARE Provides extended hardware normal wear and tear repair coverage beginning AFTER MOTOROLA SOLUTIONSS standard Commercial Warranty period expires. Service performed under this plan consists of repair of the covered equipment as set forth in the terms and conditions. Repairs will be 141 MN006147A01-AE Limited Warranty made only at the designated MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS repair depot. Local services are not included. MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS will pay for outbound shipping via MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS'S normal shipping methods. II. GENERAL PROVISIONS:

This warranty sets forth the full extent of MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS'S responsibilities regarding the Product. Repair, replacement or refund of the purchase price, at MOTOROLA SOLUTIONSs option, is the exclusive remedy. THIS WARRANTY IS GIVEN IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER EXPRESS WARRANTIES. IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION, IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, ARE LIMITED TO THE DURATION OF THIS LIMITED WARRANTY. IN NO EVENT SHALL MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS BE LIABLE FOR DAMAGES IN EXCESS OF THE PURCHASE PRICE OF THE PRODUCT, FOR ANY LOSS OF USE, LOSS OF TIME, INCONVENIENCE, COMMERCIAL LOSS, LOST PROFITS OR SAVINGS OR OTHER INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE SUCH PRODUCT, TO THE FULL EXTENT SUCH MAY BE DISCLAIMED BY LAW. III. STATE LAW RIGHTS:

SOME STATES DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR LIMITATION ON HOW LONG AN IMPLIED WARRANTY LASTS, SO THE ABOVE LIMITATION OR EXCLUSIONS MAY NOT APPLY. This warranty gives specific legal rights, and there may be other rights which may vary from state to state. IV. HOW TO GET WARRANTY SERVICE:

You must provide proof of purchase (bearing the date of purchase and Product item serial number) in order to receive warranty service and, also, deliver or send the Product item, transportation and insurance prepaid, to an authorized warranty service location. Warranty service will be provided by MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS through one of its authorized warranty service locations. If you first contact the company which sold you the Product (e.g., dealer or communication service provider), it can facilitate your obtaining warranty service. You can also call MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS at 1-800-927-2744 US/Canada. V. WHAT THIS WARRANTY DOES NOT COVER:

1 Defects or damage resulting from use of the Product in other than its normal and customary manner. 2 Defects or damage from misuse, accident, water, or neglect. 3 Defects or damage from improper testing, operation, maintenance, installation, alteration, modification, or adjustment. 4 Breakage or damage to antennas unless caused directly by defects in material workmanship. 5 A Product subjected to unauthorized Product modifications, disassembles or repairs (including, without limitation, the addition to the Product of non-MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS supplied equipment) which adversely affect performance of the Product or interfere with MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS's normal warranty inspection and testing of the Product to verify any warranty claim. 6 Product which has had the serial number removed or made illegible. 7 Rechargeable batteries if:

any of the seals on the battery enclosure of cells are broken or show evidence of tampering. 142 MN006147A01-AE Limited Warranty the damage or defect is caused by charging or using the battery in equipment or service other than the Product for which it is specified. 8 Freight costs to the repair depot. 9 A Product which, due to illegal or unauthorized alteration of the software/firmware in the Product, does not function in accordance with MOTOROLA SOLUTIONSs published specifications or the FCC certification labeling in effect for the Product at the time the Product was initially distributed from MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS. 10 Scratches or other cosmetic damage to Product surfaces that does not affect the operation of the Product. 11 Normal and customary wear and tear. VI. PATENT AND SOFTWARE PROVISIONS:

MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS will defend, at its own expense, any suit brought against the end user purchaser to the extent that it is based on a claim that the Product or parts infringe a United States patent, and MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS will pay those costs and damages finally awarded against the end user purchaser in any such suit which are attributable to any such claim, but such defense and payments are conditioned on the following:

1 that MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS will be notified promptly in writing by such purchaser of any notice of such claim, 2 that MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS will have sole control of the defense of such suit and all negotiations for its settlement or compromise, and 3 should the Product or parts become, or in MOTOROLA SOLUTIONSs opinion be likely to become, the subject of a claim of infringement of a United States patent, that such purchaser will permit MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS, at its option and expense, either to procure for such purchaser the right to continue using the Product or parts or to replace or modify the same so that it becomes non-infringing or to grant such purchaser a credit for the Product or parts as depreciated and accept its return. The depreciation will be an equal amount per year over the lifetime of the Product or parts as established by MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS. MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS will have no liability with respect to any claim of patent infringement which is based upon the combination of the Product or parts furnished hereunder with software, apparatus or devices not furnished by MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS, nor will MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS have any liability for the use of ancillary equipment or software not furnished by MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS which is attached to or used in connection with the Product. The foregoing states the entire liability of MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS with respect to infringement of patents by the Product or any parts thereof. Laws in the United States and other countries preserve for MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS certain exclusive rights for copyrighted MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS software such as the exclusive rights to reproduce in copies and distribute copies of such MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS software. MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS software may be used in only the Product in which the software was originally embodied and such software in such Product may not be replaced, copied, distributed, modified in any way, or used to produce any derivative thereof. No other use including, without limitation, alteration, modification, reproduction, distribution, or reverse engineering of such MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS software or exercise of rights in such MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS software is permitted. No license is granted by implication, estoppel or otherwise under MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS patent rights or copyrights. VII. GOVERNING LAW:

This Warranty is governed by the laws of the State of Illinois, U.S.A. 143 MN006147A01-AE Limited Warranty VIII. For Australia Only This provision applies to products and services supplied by Motorola Solutions to consumers within the meaning of the Australian Consumer Law. This warranty is given by Motorola Solutions Australia Pty Limited (ABN16 004 742 312) of Tally Ho Business Park, 10 Wesley Court. Burwood East, Victoria. Our goods come with guarantees that cannot be excluded under the Australia Consumer Law. For major failures with the service, you are entitled:

To cancel your service contract with us: and To a refund for the unused portion, or to compensation for its reduced value. You are entitled to choose a replacement or refund for a major failure with goods. If a failure with the goods or service does not amount to a major failure, you are entitled to have the failure rectified in a reasonable time. If this is not done you are entitled to a refund for the goods and to cancel the contract for the service and obtain a refund of any unused portion. You are also entitled to be compensated for any other reasonably foreseeable loss or damage from a failure in the goods or service. If you have any queries, please call Motorola Solutions Australia at 1800 457 439. You may also visit our website:

https://www.motorolasolutions.com/en_xa/support.html for current warranty terms. SERVICE Proper repair and maintenance procedures will assure efficient operation and long life for this product. A Motorola Solutions maintenance agreement will provide expert service to keep this and all other communication equipment in perfect operating condition. A nationwide service organization is provided by Motorola Solutions to support maintenance services. Through its maintenance and installation program, Motorola Solutions makes available the finest service to those desiring reliable, continuous communications on a contract basis. For a contract service agreement, please contact your nearest Motorola Solutions service or sales representative, or an authorized Motorola Solutions dealer. Express Service Plus (ESP) is an optional extended service coverage plan, which provides for the repair of this product for a period of three years from the date of shipment from the factory, or the date of delivery if purchased from an authorized Motorola Solutions two-way radio dealer. For more information about ESP, contact the Motorola Solutions Radio Support Center, 2204 Galvin Drive, Elgin, IL 60123, 1-800-227-6772. 144 MN006147A01-AE Glossary This glossary contains an alphabetical listing of terms and their definitions that are applicable to portable and mobile subscriber radio products. Glossary ACK Acknowledgment of communication. Active Channel A channel that has traffic on it. Analog Signal ARS Automatic Registration Service ASTRO 25 ASTRO conventional Autoscan AUX CH Auxiliary Control Head. Call Alert Carrier Squelch Central Controller Channel An RF signal that has a continuous nature rather than a pulsed or discrete nature. Motorola Solutions standard for wireless digital trunked communications. Motorola Solutions standard for wireless analog or digital conventional communications. A feature that allows the radio to automatically scan the members of a scan list. Privately paging an individual by sending an audible tone. Feature that responds to the presence of an RF carrier by opening or unmuting (turning on) a receiver audio circuit. A squelch circuit silences the radio when no signal is being received so that the user does not have to listen to noise. A software-controlled, computer-driven device that receives and generates data for the trunked radios assigned to it. It Monitors and directs the operations of the trunked repeaters. A group of characteristics, such as transmit/receive frequency pairs, radio parameters, and encryption encoding. 145 MN006147A01-AE Glossary CHIB Control Head Interface Board. Control Channel In a trunking system, one of the channels that is used to provide a continuous, two-way/data-

communications path between the central controller and all radios on the system. Conventional Typically refers to radio-to-radio communications, sometimes through a repeater. Frequencies are shared with other users without the aid of a central controller to assign communications channels. Conventional Scan List A scan list that includes only conventional channels. A visual tracking marker (a blinking line) that indicates a location on a display. Cursor Deadlock Digital Signal Dispatcher Displayed by the radio after three failed attempts to unlock the radio.The radio must be powered off and on prior to another attempt. Digital Private Line (DPL) A type of digital communications that utilizes privacy call, as well as memory channel and busy channel lock out to enhance communication efficiency. An RF signal that has a pulsed, or discrete, nature, rather than a continuous nature. An individual who has radio-system management duties and responsibilities. Digital Signal Processor A microcontroller specifically designed for performing the mathematics involved in manipulating analog information, such as sound, that has been converted into a digital form. DSP also implies the use of a data compression technique. Dynamic Regrouping A feature that allows the dispatcher to temporarily reassign selected radios to a single special channel so they can communicate with each other. Digital Vehicular Repeater System. Electrical Serial Number. DVRS ESN Failsoft 146 A backup system that allows communication in a non-trunked, conventional mode if the trunked system fails. MN006147A01-AE Glossary FCC Federal Communications Commission. Hang up Disconnect. Key Variable Loader (KVL) A portable, handheld, rugged device used to transfer encryption keys to a target device. Encryption keys can be entered manually by the KVL user, auto-generated by the KVL, obtained from or shared with another KVL, or downloaded from a Key Management Facility

(KMF). Liquid-Crystal Display (LCD) An LCD uses two sheets of polarizing material with a liquid-crystal solution between them. An electric current passed through the liquid causes the crystals to align so that light cannot pass through them. Light Emitting Diode (LED) An electronic device that lights up when current is passed through it. Millennium Control Head Board. Motorola Solutions Digital Communications. MCHB MDC Menu Entry Monitor A software-activated feature shown at the bottom of the display. Selection of a feature is controlled by the programming of the buttons on the side of the radio. Check channel activity by pressing the Monitor button. If the channel is clear, you hear static. If the channel is in use, you hear conversation. It also serves as a way to check the volume level of the radio, since the radio opens the squelch when the monitor button is pressed. Multi-System Talkgroup Scan List A scan list that can include both talkgroups (trunked) and channels (conventional). Network Access Code Network Access Code (NAC) operates on digital channels to reduce voice channel interference between adjacent systems and sites. Non-tactical/revert The user will talk on a preprogrammed emergency channel. The emergency alarm is sent out on this same channel. 147 MN006147A01-AE Glossary Over-The-Air Rekeying Allows the dispatcher to remotely reprogram the encryption keys in the radio. A one-way alert with audio and/or display messages. Personality A set of unique features specific to a radio. Page PIN Personal Identification Number. Preprogrammed A software feature that has been activated by a qualified radio technician. Private (Conversation) Call A feature that lets you have a private conversation with another radio user in the group. A sub-audible tone that is transmitted such that only receivers decoding the tone receives it. A radio control that can have a radio feature assigned to it. PTT-The switch or button usually located on the left side of the radio which, when pressed, causes the radio to transmit. When the PTT is released, the unit returns to receive operation. RF-The portion of the electromagnetic spectrum between audio sound and infrared light

(approximately 10 kHz to 10 GHz). Remote transmit/receive facility that re-transmits received signals in order to improve communications range and coverage (conventional operation). A feature that allows you to call a selected individual, intended to provide privacy and to eliminate the annoyance of having to listen to conversations of no interest to you. Any digital P25 traffic having the correct Network Access Code and the correct talkgroup. Muting of audio circuits when received signal levels fall below a pre-determined value. With carrier squelch, all channel activity that exceeds the preset squelch level can be heard. Private Line (PL) Programmable Push-to-Talk Radio Frequency Repeater Selective Call selective switch Squelch 148 MN006147A01-AE Glossary Synchronous Serial Interface (SSI) DSP interface to peripherals that consists of a clock signal line, a frame synchronization signal line, and a data line. An operating condition whereby the radios speaker is muted but still continues to receive data. Pre-defined text messages that allow the user to send a conditional message without talking. Tactical/non-revert The user will talk on the channel that was selected before the radio entered the emergency state. Bypassing a repeater and talking directly to another unit for local unit-to-unit communications. An organization or group of radio users who communicate with each other using the same communications path. The automatic sharing of communications paths between a large number of users. Allows users to share a smaller number of frequencies because a repeater or communications path is assigned to a talkgroup for the duration of a conversation. Trunking Priority Monitor scan list A scan list that includes talkgroups that are all from the same trunking system. Coordinated Universal Time. The international time standard (formerly Greenwich Mean Time, or GMT). Zero hours UTC is midnight in Greenwich, England, which is located at 0 degrees longitude. Everything east of Greenwich (up to 180 degrees) is later in time; everything west is earlier. There are 42 time authorities around the world that are constantly synchronizing with each other. Abbreviated as UTC (English backronym = Universal Time, Coordinated), it is also known as Zulu (Z) Time. Standby Status Calls TalkAround Talkgroup TMS Text Messaging Service. Trunking Unique shadow key. USK UTC VRS Zone Vehicular Repeater System. A grouping of channels. 149

 

 

en-US RF Energy Exposure Training and Product Safety Information for Mobile Two-Way Radios installed in Vehicles or as Fixed Site Control Stations fr-CA Formation sur lexposition aux RF et information sur la scurit du produit pour radios bidirectionnelles mobiles installes dans des vhicules ou comme stations de contrle emplacements fixes es-LA pt-BR Capacitacin sobre la exposicin a energa de radiofrecuencia e informacin de proteccin del producto para radios de dos vas mviles instalados en vehculos o como estaciones de control fijas Treinamento sobre a Exposio Energia de RF e Informaes de Segurana do Produto para Rdios Portteis Bidirecionais Instalados em Veculos ou como Estaes de Controle de Site Fixo https://learning.motorolasolutions.com/User_Documentation English Caution Before using this radio, read this booklet which contains important operating instructions. For information on product details, brochures, user manuals and approved accessories. Please refer to www.motorolasolutions.com. Compliance with RF Exposure Standards National and international regulations require manufacturers to comply with the RF energy exposure limits for mobile two-way radios before they can be marketed. Your Motorola Solutions two-way radio is designed, manufactured, and tested to comply with all applicable national and international regulations for human exposure to radio frequency electromagnetic energy. When two-way radios are used as a consequence of employment, applicable regulations may require users to be fully aware of and able to control their exposure to meet occupational requirements. RF Energy Exposure Awareness and Control Information and Operational Instructions for Occupational Use Notice: This radio is intended for use in occupational/controlled conditions where users are aware of their exposure and can exercise control over their exposure to meet the requirements in national and international regulations. This radio device is not authorized for general population, consumer use. For more information on what RF energy exposure is, and how to control your exposure to ensure compliance with established RF exposure limits, consult the following websites:

https://www.fcc.gov/

https://www.osha.gov/

https://osha.europa.eu/en http://www.who.int/peh-emf/project/en/

http://www.ic.gc.ca/eic/site/smt-gst.nsf/eng/sf11467.html http://www.ic.gc.ca/eic/site/smt-gst.nsf/eng/sf01904.html For additional user training information on exposure requirements, consult the following websites:

https://www.motorolasolutions.com/en_us/about/company-overview/corporate-

responsibility/governance-and-policies/wireless-communication-and-health-

faqs.html http://learning.motorolasolutions.com/

1 English RF Exposure Compliance and Control Guidelines To control exposure to yourself and others, and to ensure compliance with the relevant RF exposure limits, always adhere to the following guidelines:

Do not remove any of the RF Exposure Labels if present from this device or its related accessories. Attach these instructions to the device when you transfer it to other users. Do not use this device if the operational requirements described herein are not met. Notice to Users (FCC) This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules per the following conditions:

This device may not cause harmful interference. The device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Changes or modifications made to this device, not expressly approved by Motorola Solutions, could void the authority of the user to operate this equipment. Operating Instructions Transmit no more than 50% of the time. To transmit (talk), press the Push-To-

Talk (PTT) button. To receive calls, release the PTT button. Transmitting more than 50% of the time may cause RF exposure compliance requirements to be exceeded. Transmit only when people (bystanders) outside the vehicle are at least at the minimum lateral distance (as shown in Tables 1 and 2) away from the vehicle body. This separation will ensure that there is sufficient distance from a properly installed (according to the installation instructions) externally-mounted antenna to satisfy the relevant RF exposure limits. To ensure continued compliance with applicable RF exposure limits, use only Motorola Solutions approved, supplied or replacement antennas, batteries, and accessories. For a list of Motorola Solutions approved accessories please refer to your user manual or visit www.motorolasolutions.com Table 1 lists the minimum lateral distance for bystanders from the body of a vehicle

(For example, truck, van, car, motorcycle) equipped with an approved, properly installed single-band mobile radio and associated antenna(s). These lateral distances, for single-band radios, depend on the radio rated power. 2 Table 1: Rated Power of Vehicle-Installed Single-Band Mobile Radio and Minimum Lateral Distance from Vehicle Body Single-Band Mobile Radio Rated Power (see Notice) Minimum Lateral Distance of By-

standers from Vehicle Body English Less than 7 W 7 to 14 W 15 to 39 W 40 to 110 W 8 in. (20 cm) 1 ft (30 cm) 2 ft (60 cm) 3 ft (90 cm) Notice: If you are not sure of the rated power of your single-band radio, contact your Motorola Solutions representative or dealer and supply the radio model number found on the radio model label. If you cannot determine the rated power, then assure 3 ft (90 cm) separation for bystanders from the body of the vehicle. Table 2 lists the minimum lateral distance for bystanders from the body of a vehicle

(For example, truck, van, car, motorcycle) equipped with an approved, properly installed multi-band mobile radio and associated antenna(s). These lateral distances, for multi-band radios, depend on whether the radio is installed on a motorcycle, or on other kinds of vehicles. Table 2: Rated Power of Vehicle-Installed Multi-Band Mobile Radio and Minimum Lateral Distance from Vehicle Body Type of Vehicle Motorcycle Other vehicles Minimum Lateral Distance of By-

standers from Vehicle Body 2 ft (60 cm) 3 ft (90 cm) Mobile Antenna Installation Guidelines Make sure to follow the antenna installation guidelines that are provided in this mobile radio installation manual. Use only Motorola Solutions approved supplied antenna, or a Motorola Solutions approved replacement antenna. Unauthorized antennas, modifications, or attachments could damage the radio and may result in non-compliance with RF Safety Standards. 3 English Guidelines and Operating Instructions for Mobile Two-Way Radios Installed as Fixed Site Control Stations If mobile radio equipment is installed and operated at a fixed location, the antenna installation must comply with the following requirements in order to ensure optimal performance and compliance with applicable RF exposure limits. The antenna should be mounted outside the building on the roof or a tower if at all possible. As with all fixed site antenna installations, it is the responsibility of the licensee to manage the site in accordance with applicable regulatory requirements. Actions such as site survey measurements, signage, and site access restrictions may be required in order to ensure compliance with RF exposure limits. Vehicles To avoid possible interference between the radio transmitter and any vehicle electronic control modules, such as ABS, engine, or transmission control modules, your mobile radio should be installed only by an experienced installer, using the following precautions when installing the radio:

1 Refer to the manufacturer instructions or other technical bulletins for recommendations on radio installation. 2 Before installing the radio, determine the location of the vehicle electronic control modules and their harnesses within the vehicle. 3 Route all radio wiring, including the antenna cable, as far away as possible from the electronic control units and associated harnesses. Operational Warnings The following explains the operational warnings:

For Vehicle With Air Bags Warning:

Refer to vehicle manufacturers manual prior to installation of electronic equipment to avoid interference with air bag wiring. DO NOT mount or place a mobile radio in the area over an air bag or in the air bag deployment area. Air bags inflate with great force. If a radio is placed in the air bag deployment area and the air bag inflates, the radio may be propelled with great force and cause serious injury to occupants of the vehicle. 4 English Potentially Explosive Atmospheres Warning:

Do not carry a radio that is not certified for Hazardous Locations into a potentially explosive atmosphere. It could result in a serious injury or death. You should only use a radio certified for hazardous locations in potentially explosive atmospheres. Explosive atmospheres refer to hazard classified locations that may contain hazardous gas, vapors, dusts, such as fueling areas below decks on boats, fuel or chemical transferor storage facilities, and areas where the air contains chemicals or particles such as grain, dust or metal powders. Areas with potentially explosive atmospheres are often, but not always, posted. DO NOT remove, install, or charge batteries in such areas, or remove or install antennas. Sparks in a potentially explosive atmosphere can cause an explosion or fire resulting in bodily injury or even death. Blasting Caps and Blasting Areas Warning: To avoid possible interference with blasting operations, turn off your radio when you are near electrical blasting caps, in a blasting area, or in areas posted: Turn off two-way radio. Obey all signs and instructions. Batteries outlet. rating. If your mobile radio is equipped with a primary or backup battery, you must follow these instructions:

Caution: Use only Motorola Solutions approved batteries. Risk of explosion if the battery is replaced by an incorrect type. Charge your battery using the approved Motorola Solutions charger. Connect the charger/power supply to a nearby and easily accessible power Use the battery in accordance with its water and/or dust Ingress Protection (IP) Do not discard your battery into a fire. Do not replace the battery in any area labeled "Hazardous Atmosphere". Do not disassemble, crush, puncture, shred, or otherwise attempt to change the Do not dry a wet or damp battery with an appliance or heat source, such as a Do not allow conductive material such as jewelry, keys, or beaded chains to form of your battery. hair dryer or microwave oven. touch exposed battery terminals. 5 English Do not dispose of batteries with household waste. European Union (EU) Waste of Electrical and Electronic Equipment

(WEEE) Directive The European Union's WEEE directive requires that products sold into EU countries must have the crossed out trash bin label on the product (or the package in some cases). As defined by the WEEE directive, this cross-out trash bin label means that customers and end-users in EU countries should not dispose of electronic and electrical equipment or accessories in household waste. Customers or end-users in EU countries should contact their local equipment supplier representative or service centre for information about the waste collection system in their country. For Brazil, information for disposal and recycling of electronic waste, batteries, and packaging, please call: 0800168272. 6 NOTES NOTES Franais (Canada) Mise en garde Avant d'utiliser cette radio, lisez cette brochure qui contient d'importantes consignes d'utilisation. Pour obtenir plus dinformation sur les dtails du produit, les brochures, les manuels et les accessoires approuvs, Veuillez vous reporter www.motorolasolutions.com. Conformit aux normes sur l'exposition aux radiofrquences Les rglementations nationales et internationales noncent que les fabricants de radios bidirectionnelles portatives doivent sassurer que celles-ci sont conformes aux limites dexposition l'nergie RF avant de les commercialiser. Cette radio bidirectionnelle Motorola Solutions a t conue, fabrique et teste afin de garantir sa conformit aux normes nationales et internationales lies l'exposition des tres humains l'nergie lectromagntique de radiofrquence. Lorsque les radios bidirectionnelles sont utilises des fins professionnelles, la rglementation en vigueur exige que les utilisateurs soient pleinement conscients des effets de l'exposition et qu'ils soient capables de contrler le niveau d'exposition auquel ils se soumettent afin de rpondre aux exigences de leur profession. Information de sensibilisation et de gestion de l'exposition l'nergie RF, et consignes pour l'utilisation professionnelle Avis: Cette radio a t conue pour un usage professionnel dans un environnement contrl, o les utilisateurs sont pleinement conscients de l'exposition l'nergie RF laquelle ils sont soumis et peuvent exercer un contrle sur cette exposition afin de respecter les limites tablies par les rglements nationaux et internationaux. Ce dispositif radio n'est pas autoris pour l'utilisation grand public par des consommateurs ordinaires. Visitez les sites Web suivants pour obtenir plus de renseignements sur ce qu'est l'nergie RF et sur les moyens de contrle prendre afin de respecter les limites tablies en matire d'exposition aux radiofrquences :

https://www.fcc.gov/

https://www.osha.gov/

https://osha.europa.eu/en http://www.who.int/peh-emf/project/en/

http://www.ic.gc.ca/eic/site/smt-gst.nsf/eng/sf11467.html http://www.ic.gc.ca/eic/site/smt-gst.nsf/eng/sf01904.html Pour plus de renseignements sur la formation des utilisateurs relativement aux limites d'exposition, consultez les sites suivants :

1 Franais (Canada) https://www.motorolasolutions.com/en_us/about/company-overview/corporate-

responsibility/governance-and-policies/wireless-communication-and-health-

faqs.html http://learning.motorolasolutions.com/

Directives de conformit et de contrle de l'exposition aux RF Pour contrler votre exposition ainsi que celle des autres personnes et garantir le respect des limites d'exposition aux RF applicables, observez toujours les consignes suivantes :

Ne pas retirer les tiquettes relatives l'exposition aux RF qui sont apposes sur cet appareil ou sur ses accessoires. Joignez ces directives l'appareil lorsque vous le transfrez d'autres utilisateurs. N'utilisez pas cet appareil si les conditions de fonctionnement dcrites aux prsentes ne sont pas runies. Avis aux utilisateurs (FCC) Cet appareil est conforme la partie 15 des rglements de la FCC daprs les conditions suivantes : s Cet appareil ne doit pas causer dinterfrence nuisible. L'appareil doit accepter toute interfrence reue, y compris les interfrences pouvant entraner un fonctionnement indsirable. Toute modification apporte cet appareil sans l'autorisation explicite de Motorola Solutions peut annuler l'autorisation d'utiliser cet appareil. Consignes d'utilisation N'mettez pas plus de 50 % du temps. Pour transmettre (parler), appuyez sur le bouton (PTT). Pour recevoir les appels, relchez le bouton PTT. Le fait de transmettre plus de 50 % du temps peut entraner le dpassement de la limite dexposition normalise au rayonnement RF. mettez seulement lorsque les personnes (les passants) lextrieur du vhicule se trouvent la distance latrale minimale (indique dans les Tableaux 1 et 2) de la carrosserie du vhicule. Cet cart constitue une distance suffisante par rapport une antenne extrieure convenablement installe (conformment aux consignes dinstallation) pour rpondre aux exigences applicables en matire dexposition lnergie RF. Pour assurer la conformit continue avec les limites d'exposition aux RF applicables, utilisez uniquement les antennes, les batteries et les accessoires de remplacement ou fournis et approuvs par Motorola Solutions. 2 Franais (Canada) Pour obtenir une liste des accessoires approuvs par Motorola Solutions, veuillez consulter votre manuel ou visitez le site www.motorolasolutions.com Le Tableau 1 indique la distance latrale minimale entre les passants et la carrosserie dun vhicule (par exemple, un camion, une fourgonnette, une voiture, une moto) dot dune radio monobande et de son(ses) antenne(s) approuves et convenablement installes. Ces distances latrales, dans le cas dune radio monobande, dpendent de la puissance nominale de la radio. Tableau 1: Puissance nominale de la radio mobile monobande installe dans un vhicule et distance latrale minimale par rapport la carrosserie du vhicule Puissance nominale de la radio mobile monobande (voir avis) Distance latrale minimale des passants par rapport la carrosserie du vhicule Moins de 7 W 7 14 W 15 39 W 40 110 W 20 cm (8 po) 30 cm (1 pi) 60 cm (2 pi) 90 cm (3 pi) Avis: Si vous ntes pas sr de la puissance nominale de votre radio monobande, contactez le reprsentant ou le concessionnaire Motorola Solutions et indiquez-lui le numro de modle de la radio qui figure sur ltiquette de la radio. Si vous ne pouvez pas dterminer la puissance nominale, conservez une distance de sparation de 90 cm (3 pi) entre les passants et la carrosserie du vhicule. Le Tableau 2 indique la distance latrale minimale maintenir entre les passants et la carrosserie dun vhicule (par exemple, un camion, une fourgonnette, une voiture, une moto) dot dune radio multibande et de son(ses) antenne(s) approuves et convenablement installes. Ces distances latrales, dans le cas dune radio multibande, varient selon que la radio est installe sur une moto ou sur dautres types de vhicules. Tableau 2: Puissance nominale de la radio mobile multibande installe dans un vhicule et distance latrale minimale par rapport la carrosserie du vhicule Type de vhicule Motocyclette Autres vhicules Distance latrale minimale des passants par rapport la carrosserie du vhicule 60 cm (2 pi) 90 cm (3 pi) 3 Franais (Canada) Consignes d'installation pour les antennes de radios mobiles Veillez suivre les directives d'installation de l'antenne qui sont fournies dans le manuel d'installation de cette radio mobile. Utilisez uniquement l'antenne agre fournie par Motorola Solutions ou une antenne de rechange agre par Motorola Solutions. L'utilisation d'antennes ou d'accessoires non agrs, ainsi que les modifications non agres peuvent endommager la radio et constituer une violation des normes de scurit en matire d'nergie de RF. Directives et consignes de fonctionnement des radios bidirectionnelles mobiles installes comme stations de contrle emplacements fixes Si de l'quipement de radio mobile est install et utilis dans un emplacement fixe, l'installation de l'antenne doit satisfaire aux exigences suivantes afin d'assurer un rendement optimal et la conformit aux limites d'exposition l'nergie RF. L'antenne devrait tre monte l'extrieur de l'difice sur le toit ou sur une tour, si possible. Comme pour toutes les installations d'antennes emplacements fixes, il incombe au grant de maintenir l'emplacement en conformit avec les rglements en vigueur. Les actions telles que les mesures de propagation, la signalisation et les restrictions d'accs l'emplacement peuvent tre ncessaires afin de garantir le respect des limites d'exposition aux radiofrquences. Vhicules Afin d'viter une ventuelle interfrence entre la radio mettrice et l'un des modules de contrle lectronique du vhicule, comme le contrle du systme de freinage antiblocage (ABS), le contrle du moteur ou les modules de contrle de la transmission, il est recommand de faire appel uniquement un installateur qualifi pour raliser l'installation de la radio et de prendre les prcautions suivantes :

1 Consultez la notice du fabricant ou toute autre documentation technique contenant des recommandations pour l'installation de la radio. 2 Avant d'installer la radio, dterminez l'emplacement des modules de commande lectronique du vhicule et leurs points d'ancrage lintrieur de celui-ci. 3 Faites passer tout le cblage de la radio, y compris le cble de l'antenne, le plus loin possible des units de commande lectronique et de leurs points dancrage. Avertissements de fonctionnement Le tableau suivant explique les avertissements de fonctionnement :

4 Pour vhicules quips de coussins gonflables Franais (Canada) Atmosphres potentiellement explosives Avertissement:

Consultez le manuel du fabricant du vhicule avant d'installer un appareil lectronique, afin d'viter toute interfrence avec le cblage des coussins gonflables. NE MONTEZ PAS ET NE PLACEZ PAS de radio mobile dans la zone situe au-dessus d'un coussin gonflable ou dans la zone de dploiement de ce dernier. Un coussin gonflable de scurit se dploie avec beaucoup de force. Si une radio se trouve dans la zone de dploiement du sac, lorsque celui-ci se gonfle, la radio peut tre propulse avec une force considrable et risque alors d'occasionner de graves lsions corporelles aux passagers du vhicule. Avertissement:

Ne transportez pas une radio qui n'est pas certifie pour les emplacements dangereux dans une atmosphre potentiellement explosive. Cela pourrait entraner des blessures graves ou la mort. Vous ne devez utiliser qu'une radio certifie pour les endroits dangereux dans les atmosphres potentiellement explosives. On retrouve des atmosphres explosives dans les lieux classs comme tant dangereux en raison de la prsence de gaz, de vapeurs et de poussires reprsentant un danger, par exemple, les zones d'avitaillement en carburant dans des cales de bateau, les installations de transfert et de stockage de carburant ou de produits chimiques, et les zones dans lesquelles l'air est charg en produits chimiques ou en particules telles que de la poudre de crales, de la poussire ou de la poudre mtallique. Les zones atmosphres potentiellement explosives affichent gnralement des panneaux de mise en garde, mais ce n'est pas toujours le cas. VITEZ d'enlever, d'installer ou de charger les batteries, ou d'enlever ou d'installer des antennes dans de tels lieux. Les tincelles dans des atmosphres potentiellement explosives peuvent provoquer une explosion ou un incendie et entraner des lsions corporelles, voire la mort. Zone de dynamitage et dtonateurs Avertissement: teignez la radio lorsque vous vous trouvez proximit de dtonateurs lectriques ou dans une zone de dynamitage afin dviter de dclencher une explosion, ou lorsque vous vous trouvez dans un endroit o il est indiqu : teindre les radios bidirectionnelles . Respectez tous les panneaux et toutes les consignes. 5 Franais (Canada) Batteries Si votre radio mobile est dote dune batterie principale ou de secours, vous devez suivre ces instructions :

Mise en garde: Utilisez uniquement les batteries agres par Motorola Solutions. La batterie risque d'exploser si elle n'est pas correctement remplace. Chargez votre batterie l'aide du chargeur approuv par Motorola Solutions. Branchez le chargeur/bloc d'alimentation une prise murale proximit Utilisez la batterie conformment son indice de protection (IP) contre l'eau et la Ne jetez pas votre batterie au feu. Ne remplacez pas la batterie dans un endroit qui porte la mention atmosphre Veillez ne pas dmonter, craser, percer, dcouper ou autrement modifier la facilement accessible. poussire. dangereuse . forme de votre batterie. Ne faites pas scher une batterie mouille ou humide avec un appareil lectrique ou une source de chaleur, comme un schoir cheveux ou un four micro-

ondes. Ne permettez pas des matriaux conducteurs, comme des bijoux, des cls ou des mailles de chane dentrer en contact avec les bornes de la batterie. Ne jetez pas les batteries avec les ordures domestiques. Directive sur la mise au rebut des quipements lectriques et lectroniques de lUnion europenne (UE) (WEEE) La directive WEEE de lUnion europenne exige que les produits (ou leur emballage, dans certains cas) vendus dans les pays de lUE portent ltiquette de la poubelle barre. Comme le dfinit la directive WEEE, cette tiquette de poubelle barre signifie que les clients et les utilisateurs finaux dans les pays de lUE ne doivent pas jeter les quipements lectriques et lectroniques ou leurs accessoires dans les ordures domestiques. Les clients ou les utilisateurs finaux dans les pays de lUE doivent communiquer avec le reprsentant ou le centre de service de leur fournisseur dquipement pour obtenir des renseignements sur le systme de collecte des dchets de leur pays. 6 Franais (Canada) Pour obtenir des renseignements sur l'limination et le recyclage des dchets lectroniques, des batteries et des emballages pour le Brsil, veuillez appeler :

0800168272. 7 NOTES Espaol (Latinoamrica) Precaucin Antes de usar este radio, lea el folleto que contiene instrucciones de funcionamiento importantes. Para obtener informacin sobre los detalles del producto, folletos, manuales de usuario y accesorios aprobados. consulte www.motorolasolutions.com. Conformidad con las normas de exposicin a radiofrecuencia Las regulaciones nacionales e internacionales obligan a que los fabricantes cumplan con los lmites de exposicin a energa de radiofrecuencia para radios mviles de dos vas antes de que se puedan comercializar. El radio de dos vas de Motorola Solutions est diseado, fabricado y probado para cumplir con todas las regulaciones nacionales e internacionales correspondientes en materia de exposicin humana a la energa electromagntica de radiofrecuencia. Cuando los radios de dos vas se usan para trabajar, las regulaciones correspondientes podran exigir que los usuarios conozcan y controlen su nivel de exposicin para cumplir con los requisitos de uso profesional. Conocimiento de la exposicin a energa de radiofrecuencia, informacin de control e instrucciones de funcionamiento para uso ocupacional Nota: Este radio est diseado para usarse en condiciones controladas o profesionales, donde los usuarios tengan pleno conocimiento de su exposicin y puedan controlarla con el fin de cumplir con los requisitos de las regulaciones nacionales e internacionales. Este dispositivo de radio no est autorizado para el uso particular de la poblacin en general. Para obtener ms informacin sobre el significado de la exposicin a energa de radiofrecuencia y cmo controlar la exposicin con el fin de asegurar el cumplimiento de los lmites de exposicin a radiofrecuencias establecidos, consulte los siguientes sitios web:

https://www.fcc.gov/

https://www.osha.gov/

https://osha.europa.eu/en http://www.who.int/peh-emf/project/en/

http://www.ic.gc.ca/eic/site/smt-gst.nsf/eng/sf11467.html http://www.ic.gc.ca/eic/site/smt-gst.nsf/eng/sf01904.html Para obtener informacin adicional de la capacitacin de los usuarios sobre los requisitos de exposicin, consulte los siguientes sitios web:

1 Espaol (Latinoamrica) https://www.motorolasolutions.com/en_us/about/company-overview/corporate-

responsibility/governance-and-policies/wireless-communication-and-health-

faqs.html http://learning.motorolasolutions.com/

Cumplimiento de exposicin a radiofrecuencia y pautas de control Para controlar el nivel de exposicin a la que usted y otros estn expuestos y garantizar el cumplimiento de los lmites de exposicin a radiofrecuencias correspondientes, respete siempre las siguientes pautas:

No retire ninguna de las etiquetas de exposicin a radiofrecuencias, si las hubiere, de este dispositivo o sus accesorios respectivos. Adjunte estas instrucciones al dispositivo cuando se lo transfiera a otros usuarios. No utilice este dispositivo si no se cumple con los requisitos de funcionamiento descritos en este documento. Nota para los usuarios (FCC) Este dispositivo cumple con la Parte 15 de las normas de la FCC segn las siguientes condiciones:

Este dispositivo no puede provocar interferencia nociva. El dispositivo debe aceptar toda interferencia recibida, incluida aquella interferencia que pudiera causar un funcionamiento no deseado. Los cambios o las modificaciones que se realicen en este dispositivo, no aprobados expresamente por Motorola Solutions, podran anular el permiso del usuario de operar este equipo. Instrucciones de funcionamiento No transmita ms de un 50 % del tiempo. Para transmitir (hablar), presione el botn Push-to-Talk (PTT). Para recibir llamadas, suelte el botn PTT. Una transmisin superior al 50 % del tiempo de uso podra provocar que se superen los requisitos de cumplimiento de exposicin a radiofrecuencia. Realice transmisiones solo cuando las personas (transentes) que estn fuera del vehculo se encuentren, por lo menos, a la distancia lateral mnima (segn se indica en las Tablas 1 y 2) desde el vehculo. Con esta separacin se garantiza que haya una distancia suficiente entre una antena instalada correctamente en el exterior (segn las instrucciones de instalacin) para cumplir con los lmites de exposicin a radiofrecuencia correspondientes. Para garantizar el cumplimiento continuo de los lmites de exposicin a radiofrecuencia correspondientes, utilice solamente las antenas, las bateras y los accesorios de repuesto suministrados o aprobados por Motorola Solutions. 2 Espaol (Latinoamrica) Para obtener una lista de los accesorios aprobados por Motorola Solutions, consulte el manual del usuario o visite www.motorolasolutions.com. En la Tabla 1, se indica la distancia lateral mnima para transentes desde un vehculo (por ejemplo, un camin, un furgn, un automvil, una motocicleta) equipado con un radio mvil de banda nica y sus respectivas antenas, aprobados e instalados apropiadamente. Estas distancias laterales, para radios de banda nica, dependen de la potencia nominal del radio. Tabla 1: Potencia nominal del radio mvil de banda nica instalada en el vehculo y distancia lateral mnima desde el vehculo Potencia nominal de radio mvil de banda nica (consulte Aviso) Distancia lateral mnima para transentes desde el vehculo Menor que 7 W De 7 a 14 W De 15 a 39 W De 40 a 110 W 8 pulg. (20 cm) 1 pie (30 cm) 2 pies (60 cm) 3 pies (90 cm) Nota: Si no est seguro de la potencia nominal del radio de banda nica, contctese con un representante, distribuidor o proveedor de Motorola Solutions e indquele el nmero de modelo del radio que figura en la etiqueta. Si no puede determinar la potencia nominal, asegrese de establecer una separacin de 3 pies (90 cm) entre los transentes y el vehculo. En la Tabla 2, se indica la distancia lateral mnima para transentes desde un vehculo (por ejemplo, un camin, un furgn, un automvil, una motocicleta) equipado con un radio mvil multibanda y sus respectivas antenas, aprobados e instalados apropiadamente. Estas distancias laterales, para radios multibanda, dependen de si el radio est instalado en una motocicleta o en otro tipo de vehculos. Tabla 2: Potencia nominal del radio mvil multibanda instalado en el vehculo y distancia lateral mnima desde el vehculo Tipo de vehculo Motocicleta Otros vehculos Distancia lateral mnima para transentes desde el vehculo 2 pies (60 cm) 3 pies (90 cm) 3 Espaol (Latinoamrica) Pautas de instalacin de la antena mvil Asegrese de seguir las pautas de instalacin de la antena incluidas en el manual de instalacin de este radio mvil. Use nicamente antenas suministradas y aprobadas por Motorola Solutions o una antena de repuesto aprobada por Motorola Solutions. Las antenas, las modificaciones o los agregados no autorizados podran daar el radio y causar el incumplimiento con los estndares de seguridad de RF. Pautas de control e instrucciones de funcionamiento para radios mviles de dos vas instalados en estaciones de control fijas Si el equipo de radio mvil se instala y utiliza en una ubicacin fija, la instalacin de la antena debe cumplir con los siguientes requisitos para garantizar el rendimiento ptimo y el cumplimiento de los lmites de exposicin a energa de radiofrecuencia correspondientes. La antena debe instalarse en el exterior de los edificios, en el techo o en una torre de ser posible. Al igual que en todas las instalaciones de antena en sitios fijos, la administracin del sitio, conforme a los requisitos normativos correspondientes, es responsabilidad del titular de la licencia. Es posible que sea necesario realizar acciones como inspeccionar el sitio, instalar sistemas de sealizacin y restricciones de acceso al sitio para garantizar el cumplimiento con los lmites de exposicin a radiofrecuencia. Vehculos Para evitar posibles interferencias entre el transmisor del radio y cualquier mdulo de control electrnico de un vehculo, como sistemas de frenado antibloqueo, motor o mdulos de control de transmisin, la instalacin del radio mvil debe ser responsabilidad de una sola persona con experiencia y que tome las siguientes precauciones durante la instalacin:

1 Consulte las pautas del fabricante u otros boletines tcnicos para ver las recomendaciones a la hora de instalar el radio. 2 Antes de instalar el radio, determine la ubicacin de los mdulos de control electrnico y el cableado dentro del vehculo. 3 Enrute todo el cableado del radio, incluido el cable de la antena, lo ms alejado posible de las unidades de control electrnicas y el cableado asociado. Advertencias de funcionamiento A continuacin, se explican las advertencias de funcionamiento:

4 Para vehculos con bolsas de aire Espaol (Latinoamrica) Atmsferas potencialmente explosivas Advertencia:

Consulte el manual del fabricante del vehculo antes de instalar equipos electrnicos para evitar la interferencia con el cableado de las bolsas de aire. NO instale ni ubique el radio mvil en el rea que se encuentra encima de la bolsa de aire ni en el rea de despliegue de esta. Las bolsas de aire se inflan con mucha fuerza. Si se pone un radio en la zona de despliegue de la bolsa de aire y esta se infla, es posible que el radio salga disparado con gran fuerza y cause lesiones graves a los ocupantes del vehculo. Advertencia:

No lleve un radio que no est certificado para lugares peligrosos a una atmsfera potencialmente explosiva. Puede provocar lesiones graves o la muerte. En atmsferas potencialmente explosivas, solo debe utilizar un radio certificado para lugares peligrosos. El trmino atmsferas explosivas se refiere a lugares clasificados como peligrosos en los que podra haber gases, vapores o polvos peligrosos, como reas con combustibles bajo las cubiertas de los botes o instalaciones de almacenamiento o transferencia de qumicos, y reas en que el aire contenga productos qumicos o partculas, como material granulado, polvo o polvo metlico. A menudo, en las reas con atmsferas potencialmente explosivas hay seales de precaucin, aunque no siempre es as. NO retire, instale ni cargue bateras, ni tampoco retire o instale antenas en dichas reas. Las chispas en ambientes potencialmente explosivos pueden desencadenar una explosin o un incendio, y ocasionar lesiones o incluso la muerte. reas de voladuras y explosivos Advertencia: Para evitar posibles interferencias en operaciones de voladuras, apague el radio cuando se encuentre cerca de zonas de voladuras elctricas, en un rea de explosivos o en reas donde se encuentre el siguiente aviso: Apague el radio de dos vas. Obedezca todas las seales e instrucciones. Bateras Si el radio mvil cuenta con una batera principal o de reserva, deber seguir estas instrucciones:

5 Espaol (Latinoamrica) Precaucin: Utilice nicamente bateras aprobadas por Motorola Solutions. Existe un riesgo de explosin si sustituye la batera por otra de una clase incorrecta. Cargue la batera con cargadores aprobados por Motorola Solutions. Conecte el cargador/la fuente de alimentacin a una toma de corriente cercana y de fcil acceso. contra polvo y agua. Utilice la batera de acuerdo con su clasificacin de proteccin de ingreso (IP) No arroje la batera al fuego. No cambie la batera en un rea designada como Atmsfera peligrosa. No desarme, rompa, perfore, triture ni intente cambiar de ningn otro modo la forma de la batera. No intente secar una batera mojada o hmeda con un electrodomstico o una fuente de calor externa, como un secador de pelo o un horno microondas. No permita que materiales conductores como joyas, llaves o cadenas hagan contacto con los terminales expuestos de la batera. No bote las bateras en la basura domstica. Directiva de Residuos de Aparatos Elctricos y Electrnicos

(RAEE) de la Unin Europea (UE) La directiva de RAEE de la Unin Europea requiere que los productos que se venden en los pases de la UE tengan la etiqueta de un bote de residuos tachado sobre el producto (o en el paquete en algunos casos). Como se define en la Directiva de RAEE, esta etiqueta con un bote de basura tachado indica que los clientes y los usuarios finales en los pases de la UE no deben deshacerse de los equipos o accesorios elctricos y electrnicos con la basura domstica. Los clientes o los usuarios finales en los pases de la UE deben comunicarse con su representante distribuidor de equipos o el centro de servicio locales para obtener informacin sobre el sistema de recoleccin de residuos de su pas. Para Brasil, informacin de eliminacin y reciclaje de desechos electrnicos, bateras y embalajes, llame al: 0800168272. 6 Portugus (Brasil) Ateno Antes de usar o rdio, leia este folheto, que contm importantes instrues de operao. Para obter informaes sobre detalhes do produto, folhetos, manuais do usurio e acessrios aprovados. Consulte www.motorolasolutions.com. Conformidade com os Padres de Exposio RF Os regulamentos nacionais e internacionais exigem que os fabricantes estejam em conformidade com os limites de exposio energia de RF para rdios mveis bidirecionais antes de serem comercializados. O rdio bidirecional da Motorola Solutions foi projetado, fabricado e testado para estar em conformidade com todos os regulamentos nacionais e internacionais para exposio de seres humanos energia eletromagntica de radiofrequncia. Ao usar rdios bidirecionais por motivos de trabalho, os regulamentos aplicveis podem exigir que os usurios estejam totalmente conscientes e aptos a controlar sua exposio de modo a atender s exigncias ocupacionais. Informaes sobre Conscientizao e Controle de Exposio Energia de RF e Instrues Operacionais para o Uso Ocupacional Comunicado: Este rdio destina-se ao uso em condies ocupacionais/

controladas, em que os usurios estejam cientes de sua exposio e possam exercer controle sobre ela, para atender aos requisitos nos regulamentos nacionais e internacionais. O uso do dispositivo de rdio pela populao em geral no autorizado. Para obter mais informaes sobre a exposio energia de RF e como controlar a exposio para garantir a conformidade com os limites de exposio RF estabelecidos, acesse os seguintes sites:

https://www.fcc.gov/

https://www.osha.gov/

https://osha.europa.eu/en http://www.who.int/peh-emf/project/en/

http://www.ic.gc.ca/eic/site/smt-gst.nsf/eng/sf11467.html http://www.ic.gc.ca/eic/site/smt-gst.nsf/eng/sf01904.html Para informaes adicionais de treinamento sobre os requisitos de exposio, acesse os seguintes sites:

https://www.motorolasolutions.com/en_us/about/company-overview/corporate-

responsibility/governance-and-policies/wireless-communication-and-health-

faqs.html http://learning.motorolasolutions.com/

1 Portugus (Brasil) Diretrizes de Conformidade e Controle de Exposio RF Para controlar a exposio para si e demais pessoas, e garantir conformidade com os limites de exposio RF em questo, sempre siga estas diretrizes:

No remova as Etiquetas de Exposio RF, se houverem, do dispositivo ou acessrios relacionados. Anexe essas instrues ao dispositivo quando o transferir a outros usurios. No use este dispositivo se os requisitos operacionais descritos aqui no forem atendidos. Aviso aos Usurios (FCC) Este dispositivo est em conformidade com a parte 15 das normas da FCC, de acordo com as seguintes condies:

Este dispositivo no pode causar interferncias prejudiciais sade. O dispositivo deve aceitar qualquer interferncia recebida, inclusive as que possam causar operao indesejvel do dispositivo. Alteraes ou modificaes feitas neste dispositivo, que no sejam expressamente aprovadas pela Motorola Solutions, podero anular o direito do usurio de operar o equipamento. Instrues Operacionais Transmita, no mximo, 50% do tempo. Para transmitir (falar), pressione o boto PTT (Push-To-Talk). Para receber chamadas, solte o boto PTT (Push-To-Talk, apertar para falar). Transmitir mais de 50% do tempo pode fazer que os requisitos de conformidade de exposio RF sejam excedidos. Transmita somente quando as pessoas (observadores) fora do veculo estiverem, pelo menos, distncia lateral mnima (conforme exibido na Tabela 1 e 2) da carroceria de um veculo. Essa separao garantir que haja distncia suficiente de uma antena externa adequadamente instalada (de acordo com as instrues de instalao) para atender aos limites de exposio RF em questo. Para garantir constantemente a conformidade com os limites aplicveis de exposio RF, use apenas antenas, baterias e acessrios de reposio aprovados ou fornecidos pela Motorola Solutions. Para obter uma lista dos acessrios aprovados pela Motorola Solutions, consulte o manual do usurio ou acesse www.motorolasolutions.com A Tabela 1 lista a distncia lateral mnima para os observadores, da carroceria de um veculo (por exemplo, caminho, van, carro, motocicleta) equipado com um rdio mvel de banda nica aprovado e instalado adequadamente e suas antenas 2 Portugus (Brasil) associadas. Essas distncias laterais, para rdios de banda nica, dependem da potncia nominal do rdio. Tabela 1: Potncia Nominal de Rdios Mveis de Banda nica Instalados em Veculos e Distncia Lateral Mnima da Carroceria do Veculo Potncia Nominal do Rdio Mvel de Banda nica (consulte o Aviso) Distncia Lateral Mnima dos Observadores da Carroceria do Veculo Inferior a 7 W 7 a 14 W 15 a 39 W 40 a 110 W 20 cm (8 polegadas) 30 cm (1 p) 60 cm (2 ps) 90 cm (3 ps) Comunicado: Se voc no tiver certeza da potncia nominal do seu rdio de banda nica, entre em contato com o representante ou o fornecedor da Motorola Solutions e fornea o nmero do modelo encontrado na etiqueta de modelo do rdio. Se voc no conseguir determinar a potncia nominal, garanta uma separao de 90 cm (3 ps) da carroceria do veculo. A Tabela 2 lista a distncia lateral mnima para os observadores, da carroceria de um veculo (por exemplo, caminho, van, carro, motocicleta) equipado com um rdio mvel de vrias bandas aprovado e instalado adequadamente e suas antenas associadas. Essas distncias laterais, para rdios de vrias bandas, dependem se o rdio est instalado em uma motocicleta ou em outros tipos de veculos. Tabela 2: Potncia Nominal de Rdios Mveis de Vrias Bandas Instalados em Veculos e Distncia Lateral Mnima da Carroceria do Veculo Tipo de Veculo Motocicleta Outros veculos Distncia Lateral Mnima dos Observadores da Carroceria do Veculo 60 cm (2 ps) 90 cm (3 ps) Diretrizes de Instalao da Antena Mvel No deixe de seguir as diretrizes de instalao da antena fornecidas neste manual de instalao do rdio mvel. 3 Portugus (Brasil) Use somente antenas aprovadas, fornecidas ou de reposio aprovadas pela Motorola Solutions. Antenas, modificaes ou acessrios no autorizados podem danificar o rdio e resultar em no conformidade com os Padres de Segurana de RF. Diretrizes e Instrues de Operao para Rdios Mveis Bidirecionais Instalados como Estaes de Controle de Site Fixo Se o equipamento de rdio mvel for instalado e operado em um local fixo, a instalao da antena dever seguir estes requisitos para garantir o desempenho ideal e o cumprimento dos limites de exposio energia de RF. A antena deve ser instalada fora do prdio, no teto ou em uma torre, se possvel. Assim como ocorre com todas as instalaes de antena em site fixo, de responsabilidade do licenciado gerenciar o site de acordo com os requisitos regulamentares. Aes adicionais, como medidas de inspeo do site, sinalizao, e restrio de acesso ao site podem ser necessrias a fim de garantir a conformidade com os limites de exposio RF. Veculos Para evitar uma possvel interferncia entre o transmissor de rdio e quaisquer mdulos de controle eletrnico de veculos, como ABS, motor ou de controle da transmisso, o rdio mvel dever ser instalado apenas por um profissional experiente, observando-se as precaues a seguir durante a instalao do rdio:

1 Consulte as instrues do fabricante ou outros boletins tcnicos para obter recomendaes sobre a instalao do rdio. 2 Antes de instalar o rdio, determine o local dos mdulos de controle eletrnico e sua fiao eltrica no veculo. 3 Direcione a fiao do rdio, incluindo o cabo da antena, o mais distante possvel de unidades de controle eletrnico e dos chicotes associados. Avisos Operacionais A seguir so explicados os avisos operacionais:

Para Veculos Equipados com Air Bags Aviso:

Consulte o manual do fabricante do veculo antes de instalar equipamentos eletrnicos para evitar interferncia com o funcionamento do air bag. NO instale nem coloque um rdio mvel sobre um air bag ou sobre a rea de expanso dos air bags. Os air bags inflam com muita fora. Se um rdio estiver colocado na rea de abertura do air bag e ele inflar, o 4 rdio poder ser impelido com grande fora e causar graves ferimentos aos ocupantes do veculo. Ambientes Potencialmente Explosivos Portugus (Brasil) Aviso:

No transporte um rdio que no seja certificado para locais de risco em ambientes potencialmente explosivos. Isso pode resultar em ferimentos graves ou morte. Voc deve usar apenas um rdio certificado para locais de risco em ambientes potencialmente explosivos. Ambientes potencialmente explosivos referem-se a locais classificados como de risco que podem conter gases, vapores ou ps nocivos, como reas de abastecimento embaixo do convs principal em barcos, instalaes de armazenamento ou transferncia de produtos qumicos ou combustvel e reas onde o ar contm partculas ou elementos qumicos, como fibras, poeira ou ps metlicos. As reas com ambientes potencialmente explosivos so frequentes, mas nem sempre h avisos sobre isso. NO remova, instale ou carregue baterias nessas reas, nem remova ou instale antenas. Fascas em um ambiente potencialmente explosivo podem causar uma exploso ou incndio, que pode resultar em ferimentos e, at mesmo, morte. reas e Equipamentos para Detonao Aviso: Para evitar possveis interferncias em operaes de detonao, desligue o rdio quando estiver prximo a detonadores eltricos, reas de detonao ou reas onde haja avisos tais como: Desligue rdios bidirecionais. Obedea a todas as sinalizaes e instrues. Baterias Solutions. acesso. Se o seu rdio mvel estiver equipado com uma bateria principal ou de reserva, voc deve seguir estas instrues:

Ateno: Use somente baterias aprovadas pela Motorola Solutions. Se a bateria for substituda por uma de tipo incorreto, haver risco de exploso. Sempre carregue a bateria usando o carregador aprovado pela Motorola Conecte o carregador/fonte de alimentao a uma tomada prxima e de fcil Use a bateria de acordo com sua classificao de Proteo contra entrada (IP) de p e gua. No descarte a bateria no fogo. 5 Portugus (Brasil) Perigosas". alterar a forma da bateria. No troque a bateria em lugares identificados como "Atmosferas Potencialmente No desmonte, comprima, perfure, fragmente ou tente, de outras maneiras, No seque baterias molhadas nem midas usando aparelhos ou fontes de calor, como secadores de cabelo ou fornos de micro-ondas. No permita que materiais condutores como joias, chaves ou correntes toquem os terminais expostos da bateria. No descarte baterias no lixo domstico. Diretiva de Resduos de Equipamentos Eltricos e Eletrnicos

(WEEE) para a Unio Europeia (UE) A Diretiva de WEEE da Unio Europeia exige que os produtos vendidos nos pases da UE tenham a etiqueta de lixeira riscada no produto (ou no pacote, em alguns casos). Conforme definido pela diretiva WEEE, essa etiqueta de lixeira cruzada indica que os clientes e os usurios nos pases da UE no devem descartar equipamentos ou acessrios eltricos ou eletrnicos em lixo domstico. Os clientes ou os usurios nos pases da UE devem entrar em contato com o representante local do fornecedor do equipamento ou com a central de servios para obter informaes sobre o sistema de coleta de lixo em seu pas. Para informaes sobre descarte e reciclagem de resduos eletrnicos, baterias e embalagens, por favor, ligue: 0800168272. 6 NOTES Cover2.fm Page 1 Wednesday, April 24, 2019 1:07 PM MOTOROLA, MOTO, MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS and the Stylized M logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Motorola Trademark Holdings, LLC and are used under license. All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners. 2005 and 2020 Motorola Solutions, Inc. All rights reserved. Printed in

*NNTN7851J*

NNTN7851J

*6881095C99*

6881095C99-KE

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Applicant: Motorola Solutions Inc FCC ID: AZ492FT7141 / IC: 109U-92FT7141 EXHIBIT 1 IDENTIFICATION LABEL

(Pursuant to FCC Part 2.1033(c)(11), 2.1033(b)(7) and RSP 100 Annex C and Sec 3) LOCATION See the Attached Photograph or Sketch ____ ____ Bottom of the device ____ Front of the device _X__ Back of the device ____ Back of the device under Belt Clip ____ ____ Electronic labeling: In the user manual (Section: XX) In the Battery Compartment TYPE X __ The label is a poly carbonate film laminate with a pressure sensitive adhesive backing. The adhesive is a permanent type acrylic with the minimum peel strength of 40 oz/inch. The label is an electronic print accessible in the device. MARKINGS (TEXT) X See the Attached Photograph and Exhibit 3 for the actual location of the FCC/IC label on the device. X Label Attached Below See Attached Drawing. EXHIBIT 1 Revision 1 (2 Aug 2022) SHEET 1 OF 3 Applicant: Motorola Solutions Inc FCC ID: AZ492FT7141 / IC: 109U-92FT7141 Figure 1: FCC/IC Label for APX 4500 Figure 2: FCC/IC Label for APX 6500 EXHIBIT 1 Revision 1 (2 Aug 2022) SHEET 2 OF 3 Applicant: Motorola Solutions Inc FCC ID: AZ492FT7141 / IC: 109U-92FT7141 RF Exposure Label (Close View)

*** END ***

EXHIBIT 1 Revision 1 (2 Aug 2022) SHEET 3 OF 3

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

BT and WIFI 2.4GHz / 5GHz Declaration Date: August 19, 2022 To whom it may concern, This is a Bluetooth/WIFI 2.4GHz / 5GHz combination antenna with FCC/IC ID: AZ492FT7141/109U-

92FT7141. This Bluetooth/WIFI 2.4GHz / 5GHz co-existence mechanism is to ensure that the Bluetooth and WIFI 2.4GHz / 5GHz transmitters would not simultaneously operate. Therefore, Bluetooth and WIFI 2.4GHz /

5GHz antennas in FCC/IC ID:AZ492FT7141/109U-92FT7141 should not be considered to be able to transmit simultaneously. Though the users can use Bluetooth and WIFI 2.4GHz / 5GHz simultaneously, the real situation is that Bluetooth and WIFI 2.4GHz / 5GHz are used by time sharing and no overlap transmission. Should you have any questions, please have my best attention. Sincerely yours,

Name Title Tel E-mail : boonhoong.ooi@motorolasolutions.com

: Ooi Boon Hoong

: Engineering Manager

: +6042240179 EXHIBIT 2 Revision 1 (2 Aug 2022) SHEET 1 OF 3 WLAN Channels and Mode Declaration We, Motorola Solutions, Inc., declare that the device, FCC ID: AZ492FT7141, does not support any non-

US channels in all the operational mode(s) in the US market. All non-US frequencies, US 2.4G channel 12-

13 and Country code selection are disabled through proprietary software and are not user changeable. For ISED with IC: 109U-92FT7141, the device operating in 5600-5650MHz band shall be disable. Should you have any question or comment regarding this matter, please do not hesitate to contact me. Sincerely yours,

Name Title Tel E-mail : boonhoong.ooi@motorolasolutions.com

: Ooi Boon Hoong

: Engineering Manager

: +6042240179 EXHIBIT 2 Revision 1 (2 Aug 2022) SHEET 2 OF 3 DTS-UNII Device Declaration Letter To whom it may concern, We have declared below featured for FCC equipment authorization, Device FCC ID: AZ492FT7141

(1) DFS Device -- Master Client with Radar detection capability , Client without radar detection capability N/A

(2) Active / Passive Scanning , ad-hoc mode access point capability Frequency Band

(MHz) 5150-5250 5250-5350 5470-5725 5725-5850 Active Scanning

(the device can transmit a probe

(beacon)) Yes , No No Yes , Yes , Yes , No No passive scanning

(where the device is can listen only with no probes) Yes , No Yes , No Yes , No Yes , No Ad Hoc Mode or WIFI Direct capability Access point capability Yes , No No Yes , Yes , Yes , No No Yes , No No Yes , Yes , Yes , No No

(3) Country code selection ability - Yes , No If yes, please explain how it was implemented: (please also help to provide detail of options for each country selection)

(4) Meet 15.202 requirement -

Yes, No, A master device is defined as a device operating in a mode in which it has the capability to transmit without receiving an enabling signal. In this mode it is able to select a channel and initiate a network by sending enabling signals to other devices A client device is defined as a device operating in a mode in which the transmissions of the device are under control of the master. A device in client mode is not able to initiate a network. For client devices that have software configuration control to operate in different modes (active

(5) scanning in some and passive scanning in others) in different bands (devices with multiple equipment classes or those that operate on non-DFS frequencies) or modular devices which configure the modes of operations through software, the application must provide software and operations description on how the software and / or hardware is implemented to ensure that proper operations modes cannot be modified by end user or an installer. Apply, No Apply, (If apply, please help to provide explanation on it was implement, and how software was controlled) Factory set only.

Name Title Tel E-mail : boonhoong.ooi@motorolasolutions.com

: Ooi Boon Hoong

: Engineering Manager

: +6042240179 EXHIBIT 2 Revision 1 (2 Aug 2022) SHEET 3 OF 3

 

 

CONFIDENTIALITY REQUEST FCC ID: AZ492FT7141 September 7, 2022 Office of Engineering and Technology Laboratory Division Equipment Authorization Branch FCC Laboratory 7435 Oakland Mills Road Columbia, MD 21046 Subject: Confidentiality Request for Transmitter with FCC ID: AZ492FT7141 Dear Sir / Madam, Motorola Solutions Inc is requesting that Exhibit 4 (Circuit Descriptions), Exhibit 5 (Schematic Diagrams), Exhibit 10 (Parts List and Tune Up Procedures), and Exhibit 12 (Operational Description) not be made routinely available for public inspection. Motorola Solutions Inc considers the information in these exhibits to be classified as trade secrets, pursuant to 47 CFR Section 0.457(d), 0.459 and Section 552(b)(4) of the Freedom of Information Act. Please mark Exhibits 4, 5, 10, and 12 as Confidential. Please contact me if you require any additional information. Sincerely, ____________________ Deanna Zakharia Regulatory Compliance Manager E-mail: Deanna.zakharia@motorolasolutions.com _______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________ Motorola Solutions Inc. 8000 West Sunrise Boulevard, Fort Lauderdale, Florida 33322 EXHIBIT 13B Revision 1 (2 Aug 2022)

 

 

FCC ID: AZ492FT7141 Date: September 16, 2022 Office of Engineering and Technology Laboratory Division Equipment Authorization Branch Federal Communications Commission Laboratory 7435 Oakland Mills Road Columbia, MD 21046 Subject: Application for Certification of Transmitter with FCC ID: AZ492FT7141 Dear Sir/Madam, Motorola Solutions, Inc (8000 West Sunrise Boulevard, Fort Lauderdale, Florida) herein submits application for Certification of the subject transmitter. This transmitter is intended for use in a portable radio application with capabilities for clear and coded communications with a variable transmit power operating within the following frequency ranges:

Product Name Model Numbers Frequency Range RF Power LMR: 806-825 MHz;

851-870 MHz LMR: 896-901, 935-940 MHz LMR: 901-902, 940-941 MHz APX 4500 M22VRS9PW1CN BT: 2402-2480 MHz APX 6500 M25VRS9PW1CN BTLE 4.0: 2402-2480MHz WLAN 802.11 b/g/n: 2412-

2462 MHz WLAN 802.11 a/n: 5180-5825 MHz 3-35 W: 42W (Max declared) 1-30W: 36W (Max declared) 1-3W: 4W (Max declared) 11.19mW (max measured conducted peak) 5.58mW (max measured conducted average) 33.67mW (max measured conducted average) 15.58mW (max measured conducted average) Table 1b (motorcycle) (order option (W/G138)) Product Name Model Numbers Frequency Range RF Power LMR: 806-825 MHz;

851-870 MHz LMR: 896-901, 935-940 MHz LMR: 901-902, 940-941 MHz BT: 2402-2480 MHz APX 6500 M25VRS9PW1CN BTLE 4.0: 2402-2480MHz WLAN 802.11 b/g/n: 2412-

2462 MHz WLAN 802.11 a/n: 5180-

5825 MHz 3-15 W: 18W (Max declared) 1-15W: 18W (Max declared) 1-3W: 4W (Max declared) 11.19mW (max measured conducted peak) 5.58mW (max measured conducted average) 33.67mW (max measured conducted average) 15.58mW (max measured conducted average) FCC Rules Part 90 90, 24D 15C 15C 15C 15E FCC Rules Part 90 90, 24D 15C 15C 15C 15E It is capable of operating as a system in tandem with MOBEXCOM DVRS (Table 2) and Sierra LTE/VML750 Modems (Table 3) for vehicle use only and not for motorcycle _______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________ Motorola Solutions Inc. 8000 West Sunrise Boulevard, Fort Lauderdale, Florida 33322 EXHIBIT 13A Revision 2 (15 Aug 2022) Model No. MOBEXCOM DVRS VHF MOBEXCOM DVRS UHF MOBEXCOM DVRS 700 MOBEXCOM DVRS 800 FCC ID: AZ492FT7141 Table 2 Product Description MOBEXCOM Digital Vehicular Repeater DVR VHF (136-174 MHz) MOBEXCOM Digital Vehicular Repeater DVR UHF (380-512 MHz) MOBEXCOM Digital Vehicular Repeater DVR 700 (764-776 MHz; 794-806 MHz) MOBEXCOM Digital Vehicular Repeater DVR 800 (806-824 MHz; 851-869 MHz) FCC LO6-DVRSVHF LO6-DVRSUHF LO6-DVRS700 LO6-DVRS800 Product Name Table 3 Product Description MP70 Sierra Wireless High Performance Vehicle Router GX450 MG90 Sierra Wireless Mobile Gateway Sierra Wireless High Performance Multi-Network Vehicle Router RV55 Sierra Wireless Rugged LTE-A Pro Router VML750 LTE Vehicle Modem FCC N7NMC7455 TK4WLE900VX N7NMC7355 N7NEC4501 T7V1316 N7NEM75S TK4WLE900VX N7NEM75S N6C-SDPAC AZ492FT7058 VML750 Contains: Module LM63S1 2AAGMLM63S1 Contains: Module MC7354 N7NMC7355 We are requesting certification under Part(s) of the Commissions Rules listed above to allow operation of this equipment. The subject transmitter complies with Section 90.203 of the Rules in that the operator cannot directly program transmit frequencies using the unit's normally accessible external controls. A complete Certification application is enclosed. If you require any additional information, please contact me at (954) 723-4707. Sincerely, ____________________ Deanna Zakharia Regulatory Compliance Manager E-mail: Deanna.zakharia@motorolasolutions.com _______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________ Motorola Solutions Inc. 8000 West Sunrise Boulevard, Fort Lauderdale, Florida 33322 EXHIBIT 13A Revision 2 (15 Aug 2022)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Applicant: Motorola Solutions Inc FCC ID: AZ492FT7141/ IC: 109U-92FT7141 EXHIBIT 2 Statement of Certification

(Pursuant to FCC Part 2.907, 2.908 and RSP 100 Sec 4) 1. Statement of Certification Transceiver type described herein (AZ492FT7141/109U-92FT7141) is in compliance with all applicable parts of the FCC rules and ISED RSS standards. This device is P25 Compliant as well which meets FCC Part 90.548 and RSS 119 Section 5.11 as declared in exhibit 12 (Remove if not applicable). Each unit manufactured, imported, or marketed will conform to the samples tested herein, within the statistical variations that can be expected due to high volume production and test measurement error. NAME:

Ooi Boon Hoong SIGNATURE:

DATE:

16th August 2022 TITLE:

Engineering Manager EXHIBIT 2 Revision 1 (2 Aug 2022) SHEET 1 OF 2 Applicant: Motorola Solutions Inc FCC ID: AZ492FT7141/ IC: 109U-92FT7141 2.2 Attestation Statement (Equipment Class DTS and DSS Bluetooth/WiFi) This device contains an embedded Bluetooth device and WiFi device that are compliant with the applicable FCC Part 15C and ISED RSS 247 regulations. Part 15.247 (a)(1) / RSS 247 Section 5.1 The hopping sequence must be pseudo random. Each frequency must be used equally on the average by each transmitter The receivers input bandwidth is approximately equal to the transmit bandwidth The receiver hops in sequence with the transmitted signal Part 15.247 (g) / RSS 247 Section 5.1 The system is designed to comply with all of the regulations in this section when the transmitter is presented with a continuous data (or information) Part 15.247(h) / RSS 247 Section 5.1 The system does not coordinate its channel selection/hopping sequence with other frequency hopping systems for the express purpose of avoiding the simultaneous occupancy of individual hopping frequencies by multiple transmitters. NAME:

Ooi Boon Hoong SIGNATURE:

DATE:

16th August 2022 TITLE:

Engineering Manager EXHIBIT 2 Revision 1 (2 Aug 2022) SHEET 2 OF 2

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

FCC ID: AZ492FT7141 September 7, 2022 Authorization & Evaluation Division Federal Communications Commission Laboratory 7435 Oakland Mills Road Columbia, MD 21046 Subject: Extended Frequencies Justification for Certification of Transmitter with FCC ID: AZ492FT7141. Dear Sir/Madam:

This transmitter is designed to operate in the frequency ranges as described in the Exhibit 13a. To aid equipment authorization in other countries which accept the United States FCC Grant for Certification, Motorola Solutions is requesting that the FCC lists the above applicable frequencies range under FCC Rule Parts 90 on the FCC Grant. For the FCCs Rule Parts 90 applications, this radio is used in systems by Federal and Public Safety agencies including Police, Fire, and Emergency Medical Services, etc. as indicated in the table below. Equipment programming is the responsibility of Authorized Service Personnel. Also, the radio complies with 47 CFR Part 90.203(e), in that the operator cannot directly program the transmit frequencies using the normally accessible external controls. Per the FCCs KDB634817 guidance, as an alternative to listing the exact frequencies, we acknowledge that its a violation of the FCC Rules if this device operates on unauthorized frequencies. Frequency Range

(MHz) 806*

806-809 809-824 824-825 851-854 854-869 869-870 896-901 901-902 935-940 940-941

*Canada Part 24D Part 90 Other Regions x x x x x x x x x x x Please contact me if you required any additional information. Sincerely, ____________________ Deanna Zakharia Regulatory Compliance Manager E-mail: Deanna.zakharia@motorolasolutions.com _______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________ Motorola Solutions Inc. 8000 West Sunrise Boulevard, Fort Lauderdale, Florida 33322 EXHIBIT 13C Revision 1 (2 Aug 2022)